Ramallah Recreational Complex - UNDP

Technical Specifications Sports center -Ramallah FIRST OPTION 

Ramallah Municipality 

Project Name: 

Ramallah Recreational Complex 

Phase 1 

Sports Center 

Ramallah, Palestine 

Volume VI 

GENERAL AND PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS 

A- Architectural & Structural 

SPORT HALL 

Funded by: IBSA 

INDIA BRAZIL SOUTH AFRICA 

Through: United Nations Development Programme 

Programme Assistance to the Palestinian people 

Designed by 

First Option- Amara 

Architects, Engineers & Construction Managements 

2009 

1

Technical Specifications Sports Center -Ramallah FIRST OPTION 

1 Scope 

SECTION: 24 

DRAINAGE 

This Specification deals with the installation of the materials, fittings and equipment, the design and 

performance, the workmanship and the testing and commissioning of the below ground drainage. 

This Specification is in addition to and will be read in conjunction with the Contract Drawings and 

relevant parts of the Contract Documents. 

2 General 

Works shall be constructed in accordance with BS CP 301 : 1971 Building Drainage. The Contractor 

shall notify the Engineer of discrepancies between BS CP 301 and the working drawings and 

specifications. 

Pipes and fittings shall be jointed and laid in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of discrepancies between the manufacturer's recommendations 

and the design. 

Unless otherwise stated, the provisions of the latest revised additions of relevant British Standards and 

Codes of Practice shall be held to be incorporated in the specification of materials and workmanship. 

Drains shall be accurately laid, true to line and grade from point to point. Manholes shall be provided 

at changes of direction or gradient and at points of connection. Drain runs between manholes should be 

absolutely straight. Lines and falls shall be accurately set as shown on Drawings or as directed on Site. 

Pipe work materials shall be as stated in the Particular Conditions or on the Drawings. 

The Contractor shall perform all necessary excavation for drains, manholes, septic tanks, soak ways etc. 

, uphold sides , level or grade bottoms , return fill and ram and remove surplus spoil as directed . 

The system shall be maintained in accordance with Clause 6 of CP 301 . 

3 Pipe work 

Excavation of any section of the work shall not start until a complete set of the pipes and components 

for that section is available. 

The trench shall be as narrow as practicable but not less than the pipe diameter plus 300mm from each 

side to permit adequate compaction of side fill. Adequate working space shall be left for pipe jointers 

and joint holes shall be formed where necessary. 

The trench sides shall be kept vertical unless the approved use of a batter is unavoidable. In the latter 

case the sides of the trench shall be kept vertical up to 300mm above the top of the pipe. If over width 

excavation occurs at or below this level the trench shall be reformed using concrete to 300mm above the 

level of the top of the pipe or the Engineer's approval shall be obtained for the proposed bedding for the 

wider trench condition. 

Bedding material shall be 

(a) Local korkar . 

(b) Sand to BS 882 Zones 1 - 4 . 

Pipes and fittings shall be inspected before fixing, and defective items shall be rejected. 

Pipes shall be laid with the socket ends against the flow and shall rest on a solid and even bearing for 

the full length of the barrel. 

Trenches shall be back-filled only after drains have been tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

98


Flexible pipes including pitch fiber pipes, PVC pipes, steel pipes and tubes and ductile iron pipes shall 

be laid on a granular or sand bed. The trench shall be excavated below the invert level of the pipe to 

depth that will allow a minimum thickness of 200mm of Sand as bedding material, which shall extend 

to the full width of the trench. 

In rocky ground a minimum of 200mm of granular or sand bed shall be used. 

The bedding material shall be well tamped down on the trench bottom, which shall be free from hard, 

or soft spots. 

The finished bottom shall be true to line and gradient. 

Rigid pipes including vitrified clayware, asbestos cement pipes, grey iron pipes and concrete pipes 

shall either be laid on a granular or sand bed or on a concrete base in the trench bottom. The type of 

base provided shall depend on the nature of the trench formation and the presence of ground water. 

Where the nature of the ground is such as to allow the trench formation to be trimmed to provide a 

uniform and solid bearing, pipes shall be laid upon the formation. Socket and joint holes shall be as 

short as practicable and shall be scraped or cut into the formation. 

Where because of the nature of the ground or the presence of ground water pipes cannot be laid directly 

on the trench formation, the trench shall be excavated below the invert level of the pipe to a depth to 

allow a minimum thickness of 200mm of granular bedding material, which shall extend the full width 

of the trench. The bedding material, trench, etc., shall be as for flexible pipes. 

Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete bed, bed and haunch or surrounds, the trench bottom shall be 

prepared as for the laying of pipes on a granular bed but with a layer of concrete at least 50mm thick. 

The pipes shall be supported clear of the trench bottom by blocks or cradles placed under the pipe and 

immediately behind each socket for short small pipes with a second block near the spigot end for long 

or large pipes. 

The support should yield under load sufficiently to permit the barrel of the pipe to rest uniformly on its 

bed after the normal setting shrinkage of the concrete has occurred. The clearance under the barrel 

before placing the concrete should be not less than 100mm. The concrete bed or haunch should extend 

to 150mm on each side of the pipe. 

Concrete shall not be laid until the drain has been approved by the Engineer. 

Where rigid pipes with flexible joints are employed with a concrete bed, haunch or surround a simple 

constructional flexible joint shall be provided in the concrete and at the face of a pipe joint at intervals of 

not more than 5 meters to reduce the natural rigidity of the concrete. 

The first 300mm of filling above the top of pipes and the filling around the pipes shall be placed by 

hand over the pipe and compacted by hand in finished layers of 150mm to a maximum of 300mm and 

shall be selected material, well watered and carefully rammed around the pipes .The material shall be 

distributed equally to both sides of the pipe to buttress it to the sides of the trench. Subsequent filling 

shall be placed, rammed and watered if necessary in 300mm thick layers. Drains shall be kept free from 

earth, sand, surplus mortar and other obstructions during laying. Adequate cover shall be provided 

before using power compactors or heavy rollers. 

Vitrified clay pipes and concrete pipes with more than 4.25 m of earth cover shall be laid on a 150mm 

thick bench of concrete and be haunched with concrete 150mm thick to at least the horizontal diameter 

of the pipe and above that level splayed tangentially to the extrados. 

Where vitrified clay pipes and concrete pipes with more than 6 m of earth cover are used or where the 

pipes are laid in a heading or the cover is less than 1.2m if the pipes are laid in roads or 0.90 m 

elsewhere, the pipe shall be completely surrounded with concrete to a thickness of not less than 150mm. 

The width of concrete beds shall be 150mm greater than the external diameter of the pipe on both sides. 

99


Where drains run beneath buildings they shall be constructed of cast iron pipes and shall be encased in 

concrete on bottom, top and both sides to a thickness of 150mm greater than the external diameter of the 

pipe and adequate flexibility in the pipeline shall be allowed. 

The Engineer shall be consulted if pipes are to be laid with less than 600mm of cover or within 150mm 

of the underside of a concrete slab. 

The head of every drainage system shall be ventilated and such ventilating pipes shall, where possible, 

be fixed against the outside face of an external wall unless otherwise shown on the Drawings and 

carried up to a height of 900mm above that part of the structure immediately adjacent to it. The 

ventilating pipe shall be fitted with a galvanized or copper wire balloon at the top. 

Except where branches or other fittings occur, the top length of each ventilating stack shall consist of a 

complete length of pipe which shall be anchored 1.20 m from the top by means of wrought steel strap 

fixed as described elsewhere and painted to match the pipe. Any short length required to make up the 

length of the stack shall be fitted immediately below the top length. 

4 UPVC Pipes and Fittings 

UPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 4660 . 

All pipes and fittings on all soil, waste and vent pipes shall be in Unplasticised Polyvinyle Chloride, 

with solvent weld cement joints, to pipes and fittings. 

All branch waste and vent pipes from baseness and sinks to stacks, floor gullies, collection boxes and 

manholes shall be in modified UPVC with seal ring joints suitable to receive high temperature water 

discharge. 

Fittings and coupling for use with UPVC pipes shall be jointed with solvent cement in accordance with 

manufacturer recommendations. 

Fittings and coupling for use with UPVC pipes on movement joints shall be jointed with an incorporate 

synthetic rubber rings in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations. 

Slip on cover plates shall be provided as a finish to pipe work, up to and including 50mm diameter, 

emerging from a wall in occupied areas other than service voids. Samples shall be first submitted to the 

Engineer for approval. 

On pipe work up to and including 50mm diameter union type fittings shall be provided to make up to 

outlets of basin, bath and sink wastes. 

Access plates shall be fitted at the roof of each vertical stack at changes, to enable the complete disposal 

system to be internally cleaned and rodded. 

Soil, waste and vent stacks above their highest branches shall be continued upwords, at their full 

diameter, above roof level. 

5 Safety 

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and uphold safety measures adequate for the particular hazards 

of drainage works for all his employees. All safety measures taken by the Contractor should be 

approved by the Engineer. 

Such approval will not affect the full responsibility of the contractor toward the safety of all his 

employees, the supervision staff and any other third party existing on site. 

The Contractor shall ensure that all timbering, shuttering , staging, strutting , ladders etc. , used in 

drain trenches and pits are adequate for the duty involved . 

6 Manholes 

Manhole dimensions shall be as shown on Drawings. 

Manholes shall be constructed from approved precast concrete rings. 

100


Manholes, chambers, Septic tanks, disintegration and settling tanks and percolating pits shall be 

constructed in the positions and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed by the 

Engineer. The method of execution of all work in connection with these shall be as elsewhere described 

in the appropriate trades. 

Manhole base slabs shall be according to drawings, and at least 150mm thick grade (A) concrete or as 

directed and approved by the Engineer. 

Manhole cover slabs shall be a minimum of 150mm thick suitably reinforced grade (A) concrete, where 

also approved precast covers can be used. 

Precast concrete manholes shall comply with BS 556 . 

Manhole sections shall be jointed using a cement and sand mortar, 1: 2, and proprietary bituminous or 

resin fillers. Where flexible fillers are used their shape, thickness and location in the joint shall be in 

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The remainder of the joint shall be filled with a 

cement and sand mortar 1: 2, to prevent settlement of the sections with possible point contact and 

subsequent spalling of the concrete joint. 

Precast concrete manholes used below water table level shall be surrounded with a minimum thickness 

of 150mm concrete which shall be not less than a 1:2:4 mix. 

Sulphate resisting cements shall be used in concrete and mortar, or accepted epoxy paint should be 

made for all concrete and mortars facing the wastewater. 

Cast iron manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497 except that the bituminous based 

protective coating shall not flow or chip when exposed to temperatures in the range of 0 O C to 76.7 O C . 

Manholes exceeding 1.00 meter deep internally shall have a minimum internal diameter of 80 cm. 

Where required the channels in manhole bottoms shall be constructed of glazed earthenware channels 

jointed in a similar manner to the pipes. Alternatively when so described the channels shall be formed 

in fine concrete finished smooth. The channels shall be semi circular in section and the concrete shall 

then be carried up vertically for a distance of 80mm at each side and sloped back at a minimum fall of 1 

: 10 . 

The benching shall be of fine concrete and shall be rendered over in cement and sand (1: 3) mix. Pipes 

entering manholes shall not project beyond the face of the internal rendering. The invert of the pipes 

and the channels shall be continuous. All benching surfaces should be painted by approved epoxy 

paint. 

Covers and frames shall comply with the following: 

GRADE A: Heavy duty covers suitable for heavy fast moving wheeled traffic ( 25 tons ) . 

GRADE B: Medium duty covers suitable where heavy commercial vehicles would be excepted ( 8 tons) 

GRADE C: Light duty covers suitable for pedestrian traffic only (5 tons). 

Manhole covers situated inside buildings or on verandahs shall be as follows: 

Either (a) Double seal type cover and frame 

or (b) Frame with ground - fit air tight cover manufactured for use inside buildings . 

Manhole frames shall be bedded and pointed with cement and sand mortar and the rebates sealed with 

manhole grease. 

Step irons shall be located and comply with BS CP 301 , Clause 3.12.5.1. 

Channels and benching shall comply with BS CP 301 . 

Where cast iron inspection chambers are shown on the Drawings these are to comply with BS 1130 

using caulked joints and gasket sealed covers set in concrete block manholes benched to top of cover 

level. The manhole cover required can be single seal in lieu of double seal . 

101


7 Septic Tanks 

Septic tanks shall be sized and constructed as shown on the Engineer's Drawings and shall be 

constructed as stated in BS CP 302 unless otherwise stated. 

Septic tanks shall be constructed with concrete floors and walls of block work or concrete. 

External Walls of septic tanks shall be at least 300mm thick. 

Where indicted on the drawings the Contractor shall provide an intercepting trap with cleaning arm 

and lever-locking stopper to be set in cement mortar in the intercepting manhole adjacent to the septic 

tank or inside the site boundary in the case of main drainage. The normal drop from inlet to outlet of 

trap shall be preserved. A fresh air inlet shall be taken to the intercepting manhole with 100mm cast iron 

drainpipes with an easy bend to a point just below ground level. 

Septic tanks shall meet the requirements of the local Authority. 

8 Soak ways 

Soakaways shall be constructed in one of the following ways: 

(a) Precast concrete rings to BS 556 . 

(b) 200mm (min) cast in situ concrete. 

Cover and base slabs shall be at least 150mm thick Grade (A) reinforced concrete, or precast covers 

according to Specification and as directed and approved by the Engineer. 

Removable covers shall be as described for manhole covers. 

Soak ways shall be of the sizes and in the positions shown on the Drawings or as directed on site by the 

Engineer. 

Soak ways constructed in cast in site concrete shall have walls of at least 200mm thicknesses. 

Soak ways shall meet the requirements of the Local Authority. 

9 Connections To Existing Manholes And Drains 

When work is being undertaken on existing drains and manholes including the construction of new 

manholes, building in pipes, cutting through manhole walls, cutting out and reforming benching, 

completing pipe entries and making good the Contractor shall keep existing drains open to flow and 

reasonably free form debris at all times during the progress of works . 

On completion all work shall be in a watertight condition. 

10 Cleaning, Protection and Testing Of Drains 

The Contractor shall remove all silt and foreign matter from drains and manholes and leave the whole 

in a clean and workable condition. 

In the event of delay between the laying of a drain and the placing of the first 300mm of back filling 

over the top of the pipe, precautions shall be taken to protect the pipes from damage arising from 

differential exposure to sun or wind. 

Lengths of drain, manholes and inspection chambers shall be capable of withstanding the test. The test 

shall be applied after laying and before back filling or placing concrete surround and bedding concrete. 

102


Leakage of the section under test, including sweating, which causes a drop in the test water level shall 

be noted and the defective part of the work shall be rectified on the Contractor's own expenses. 

The test shall be repeated after back filling and any faults in the bedding or support of the pipe, 

inadequacies in design or accidental damage during, or subsequent to, back filling, shall be noted and 

the defective part of the work shall be rectified on the Contractor's own expenses. 

Whenever possible testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. 

Testing shall not be started until at least 48 hours after completion of the last joint. 

Tests before back filling: 

(1The section shall be filled with water and after about one hour test readings shall be taken. 

(2) A test pressure of 1. 2m head of water shall be applied at the high end of the section (but not 

Than 2.4m at the low end) . Steeply graded mains shall be tested in sections. 

(3) The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a measuring 

Vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required maintaining the original 

Water level in the standpipe. 

(4)The average quantity of water added shall not exceed 0.06 liters per hour per 100 linear meters per 

millimeter of nominal bore of the drain. 

(5) For sections of drain where the highest point is more than 1.2m below the water table the 

Following infiltration test shall be undertaken. 

(A) Inlets to the system shall be closed. Visual inspection at manholes or inspection chambers will 

Reveal any flow the cause of which shall be investigated and the faults rectified. 

(B) Tests for line, level and freedom from obstruction shall be applied by means of a mirror at one end 

Of the drain and a lamp at the other. 

(C) Final test: 

The water test shall be repeated in accordance with the requirements of the Local Authority or the 

Engineer. 

103


SECTION : 25 

ASPHALT WORKS 

1 GENERAL 

The Contractor shall construct the area to be paved in accordance with the applicable specifications 

stipulated herein after, in conformity with the alignment, dimensions, and typical sections shown on the 

Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. 

2 TYPE OF WORK 

For the purpose of these specifications, the following type of asphalt works is designated: 

- Preparing and leveling of existing base - coarse. 

- Compacting of existing base - coarse. 

- Prime coat. 

- Single asphalt surface layer. 

3 BASE - COARSE 

General 

The Contractor shall provide only an aggregate material for the base-coarse consisting of hard, durable, 

crushed limestone or crushed wadi gravel, provided that the crushed aggregates retained on sieve No. 4 

shall have 80% by weight of at least two fractured faces, which have to be crushed by approved 

crushing plant and shall be free from any organic matter or any other deleterious substances and also 

free from clay balls. 

Base coarse aggregate shall conform to the following gradation: 

Sieve Size 

Percent Passing 

11/2 inch (38.10 mm) 100 

1 inch (25.40 mm) 75-100 

3/4 inch (19.10 mm) 60-90 

1/2 inch (12.70 mm) 45-80 

3/8 inch (09.52 mm) 40-70 

No.4 (04.76 mm) 35-65 

No.10 (02.00 mm) 20-40 

No.40 (00.42 mm) 8-20 

No.200 (00.075 mm) 5-10 

The fraction passing No. 200 sieve shall not be greater than 70% of the fraction passing No. 40 sieve. 

Base - coarse aggregates shall confirm to the requirements of the following standard tests: - 

Los Angeles Abrasion, 

(AASHTO -T- 96) 35 max. 

Liquid Limit 

(AASHTO -T- 89) 25 max. 

Plasticity Index 

(AASHTO -T- 90) 2 min. 6 max. 

Flaky & Elongated Particles (B.S.812) 15% max. Each . 

The base-coarse shall be compacted to not less than 100% of the density obtained at optimum moisture 

content as determined by ASTM-DT 99C. 

The following test shall also be performed: 

a) Gradation tests shall be performed on samples of base-coarse taken after mixing with water and 

spreading before compaction and shall have a maximum % passing sieve No. 200 of 10%. 

b) Gradation tests shall be performed on samples of base - coarse taken after compaction and the 

maximum material passing sieve No. 200 shall not exceed 10%. 

104


The thickness of the compacted layer shall be measured and recorded when performing filed density 

tests and sieve tests on samples taken from compacted layers in place. 

Construction 

Aggregate for base-coarse shall be delivered to the area to be paved as a uniform mixture and shall 

spread in layers. 

Segregation shall be avoided and the base-coarse shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine materials. 

The base-coarse shall be spread by a grader or any other mechanical method, approved by the Engineer, 

watered, shaped and compacted to the required grade and cross section. 

The finished surface of the base-coarse shall not vary at any point by more than 1 cm below the grade 

established by the Engineer, and the total thickness of the base-coarse shall not vary by more +0.50 cm . 

In addition to level checking, longitudinally the surface shall be checked with a straight edge (4m long), 

where irregularities in this direction shall not vary by more than 1cm. 

A minimum of (4) levels of the base at the total longitudinal side shall be taken and if (2) or more of 

these levels exceed the tolerance given the Contractor shall re-grade the entire length of the area. If one 

of these levels exceeds the tolerance then the Contractor shall make good this point. 

The aggregate base shall be compacted to not less than 100% of the maximum density determined in 

accordance with the latest modified AASHTO T-191, T-205 or T-205 and T-239. 

The base-coarse shall be maintained in a condition satisfactory to receive surfacing material. Aggregate 

base-coarse, which does not conform to the above requirements, shall be reshaped or reworked, 

watered and thoroughly re-compacted to conform to the specified requirements at the Contractors own 

expense. 

Method of Measurement 

Base-coarse shall be measured per square meter in place, acceptably laid and compacted according to 

the dimensions shown on the Drawings. 

Method of Payment 

Payment shall be made at the Contract unit rate for "compacted aggregate base-coarse" per square meter 

. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including 

watering, compacting, shaping and all labor, equipment, tools, supplies, tests, and incidentals necessary 

to complete the work. 

4 PRIMECOAT 

General 

Liquid asphalt for prime coat shall be medium curing grade MC70, in conformance with AASHTO 

standard 

or equivalent according to the manufacturer instructions and lab tests results. 

be true to grade, and cross- 

The surface to be treated shall be smooth, compact and tight. It shall 

section where dust shall be removed by booming. 

Equipment 

The equipment used by the Contractor shall include a power broom or a power blower or both; a self - 

propelled, pneumatic roller, or steel-wheeled tandem (5 tons) or both; mechanical or self-propelled 

aggregate spreading equipment that can be adjusted to spread accurately the specified amounts per 

square meter, a pressure distributor and equipment for heating the asphalt material. Pneumatic - tired 

rollers shall have a total compacting width of not less than 120 cm and shall have minimum contact 

pressures of 2.8 kg/cm 2 or as specified by the Engineer. Other equipment is to be used in addition to, or 

in lieu of the specified equipment when approved by the Engineer. 

105


The pressure distributor shall be designed and operated to distribute the asphalt material in a uniform 

spay with atomization, in the amount and between the limits of temperature specified. It shall be 

equipped with a tachometer having a dial registering feet or meters of travel per minute. The dial shall 

be visible to the truck driver so he can maintain the constant speed required for application at the 

specified rate. The pump shall be equipped with a bitumetre having a dial registering liters, or gallons 

per minute passing through the nozzles. The dial shall be readily visible to the operator. 

Means for indicating accurately the temperature of the asphalt material at all times shall be provided. 

The thermometer reservoir shall not be in contact with a heating tube. 

The spray bar shall be adjustable to a reasonable width. A hose and spray nozzle attachment shall be 

provided for applying asphalt material to paths and areas inaccessible to the spray bar. 

The distributor shall be provided with heating attachments and the asphalt material shall be circulated 

during the entire heating process. 

Application of Prime coat 

The Engineer will select the rate of application for the asphalt primer to be used. The Contractor shall 

keep a record of the application rates selected. Tentatively an application rate of 1.0-1.5 Kg/m 2 of MC 70 

shall be used. 

Application of the asphalt prime shall be made uniformly at this rate with the pressure distributor. The 

asphalt prime shall be applied at the temperature specified by the Engineer. When heating is required, 

precautions shall be taken to avoid fire hazard. 

Application shall be made when the surface is dry or slightly damp and, unless otherwise permitted by 

the Engineer, when the air temperature in the shade is not less than 10C. After application of the asphalt 

prime, at least forty - eight (48) hours shall elapse before further applications are made. 

Before beginning application, building paper shall be spread over the surface, from the joint back, for a 

sufficient distance for the spray bar to begin spraying and be operating at full force when the surface to 

be treated is reached. After the asphalt is applied the building paper shall be removed and destroyed. 

The spray bar shall be shut off instantaneously at each construction joint to assure a straight line and the 

full application of asphalt prime up to the joint. If necessary to prevent dripping, a drip pan shall be 

inserted under the nozzle when application is stopped. A hand spray shall be used to apply primer 

material necessary to touch up all spots unavoidably missed by the distributor. 

Following the application, the primed surface shall be allowed to dry for a period of not less than 48 

hours without being disturbed or for such an additional period of time as may be necessary to permit 

the drying out of the prime until it will not be picked up. 

The surface shall then be maintained by the Contractor until the surfacing has been placed and no traffic 

(other than that necessary for the Contractor) shall be allowed on the primed surface before placing of 

the surface treatment. 


The quantities to be paid for shall be the total quantity in sq.m. of the primed surface area, actually 

applied, and shall be based on the approved records of the application rates as selected by the Engineer 

. 

Method of Payment 

Payment shall be based on the Contract unit rate for "Prime Coat" per sq.m. 

5 HOT MIX ASPHALT SURFACING 

Scope 

Furnishing and mixing non-plastic aggregate crushed limestone and asphalt binder at a central mixing 

plant, spreading and single layer surface coarse. 

106


Construction shall be in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with lines, grades and 

thickness as shown on drawings or established by the Engineer. 

Composition of Mixes of Mixes 

The paving mix shall be Composed of specified aggregates and asphalt cement within the limits of the 

following table : 

Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing Surface Course 

1 inch (25.40 mm) 100 

3/4 inch (19.10 mm) 90-100 

3/8 inch (90.52 mm) 56-80 

No.4 (04.76 mm) 35-65 

No.8 (02.00 mm) 23-49 

No.50 (00.42 mm) 5-19 

No.200 (00.075 mm) 2-8 

Asphalt to be added by weight of total weight according to design . 

The aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 35% in 500 revolutions as determined 

by AASHTO T96. The sand equivalent shall be 50 minimums according to AASHTO T-176. Aggregate 

shall in all respects comply with the relevant standards. Aggregate limestone to be used be fresh 

mechanically crushed coarse aggregate. Materials on sieve No.4 shall have 90% by weight of at least two 

fractured faces. 

Filler Material 

When the combined grading of the coarse and fine aggregate is deficient in material passing No. 200 

sieve, a filler conforming to the requirements specified hereafter shall be added . 

Mineral filler shall comply in all respects with AASHTO Standard Specification M17. 

The amount of commercial filler to be added shall be only that amount necessary to make the combined 

grading of the material comply with the grading requirements for the complete mixture. 

In no case shall the amount of commercial filler added exceed three percent (3%), sample obtained form 

hot bins , by weight of the combined aggregate , The material passing No. 200 sieve may consist of fine 

particles of the aggregates or mineral filler, or both .It shall free from organic matter and clay particles . 

Job Mix Formula 

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a job mix formula within the limits of these 


The maximum permissible variation from the job mix formula within the specification limits, shall be as 

follows: 

Standard Sieve Size Permissible Variation Percent by Weight of Total Mix 

3/8 inch and larger + 5.00 

No. 4 to No. 80 + 4.00 

No. 200 + 1.00 

Asphalt + 0.30 

Mix Test Criteria 

Test requirements and criteria for the paving mixes prepared these specifications shall be as follows: 

Surfacing 

No. of compactive blows 

each end specimen 75 

107


Minimum Stability (Kg) 900 

Flow (1/100") 2-4 

Percent air voids 3-5 

V.M.A. using bulk S/Gr. 

(Tolerance - 1%) 

min.14% 

V.F.B. 60-75 % 

Loss of stability 

(soaking 24 hours compared 

with 30 min. at 60OC for 

all specimens in water bath). 

Plasticity Index for material 

passing sieve No.40(from hot bins) 

Stripping Test(ASTM D1664) 

max.25 

non plastic 

uncoated 

aggregate 

Laboratory test specimens of paving mixes, combined in the proportions of the job mix formula, shall be 

prepared and tested in accordance with the procedures of the Marshall method of mix design as 

detailed in the 'Asphalt Institute Manual - MS2' and ASTM method of Test D 1559 . 

General Equipment Requirements 

All equipment furnished by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of this section and shall be 

maintained in its best mechanical condition . Equipment shall be serviced and lubricated away form the 

paving site; units drip fuel, oil, or grease shall be removed from the site until such leakage is corrected. 

Elements for All Plants 

Uniformity 

The plants shall be designed, co-coordinated and operated to produce a uniform mix within the 

specified job mix tolerances. 

Job Mix Formula 

The Engineer will make frequent gradation analyses of the hot aggregates and of the completed mix to 

be certain that the materials being used and produced are within the tolerances of the job mix formula 

and the specifications of the mix number being used. 

If the mix is found to be outside the job mix formula tolerances or outside of the specification limits, 

correction shall be made in quantities measured from the hot bins and adjustments made the cold bin 

feeders and the Contractor shall submit a new mix design. 

Sampling and Testing 

Stockpiles and bins will be sampled for gradation analyses and examined for dust coating and for other 

purposes, in compliance with stated requirements. Gradation analyses of each hot bin will be performed 

and a combined analysis conducted at least twice a day once in the forenoon, and once in the afternoon. 

If materials do not run uniform, more frequent tests will be made. 

When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide representative samples by taking 

aggregate from each bin through the mixing chamber (without asphalt) into a truck or other receptacle 

At least one sample shall be taken from each truck of the hot mix being delivered to the site. Samples 

will be used to determine compliance with general and special requirements set forth in these 


108


Construction Method 

Weather Limitations 

When the moisture of the aggregate in the stockpile or from the dryer in the plant interferes with the 

quality of mix production, or with normal plant operations, or when pools of water are observed on the 

base, then mixing and placing of hot-mix asphalt will not be permitted. 

The temperature of the surface on which the hot-mix asphalt is placed shall not be less than 5oC When 

the surface temperature on which the material is to be placed falls below 10oC, precautions shall be 

taken to compact the mix before it cools too much, to obtain the required density. 

All truckloads shall be delivered continuously and immediately spread and compacted. In cold weather 

and for shall be delivered at a temperature within 8oC of that temperature specified by the Engineers 

Representative. 

Preparation of Area 

The area to be paved shall be true to line and grade, and have a dry and properly prepared surface prior 

to the start of paving operations. It shall be free from all loose screenings, and other loose or foreign 

material. 

The surface shall be primed as specified. The surface of structures in actual contact with asphalt mixes 

shall be painted with a thin, complete coating of asphalt material to provide a closely bonded water - 

tight joint . 

Proportioning and Mixing 

To aid in determining the proper temperature of the completed batch, current viscosity data shall be 

available at the plant at all times. 

With information relative to the viscosity of the particular asphalt being used, the temperature of the 

completed mix at the plant and at the paver shall be designated by the Engineer's Representative after 

discussing with the Contractor the hauling and placing conditions. 

The asphalt shall be heated so that it can be distributed uniformly throughout the batch. For mixing 

applications, the specified temperature will generally be such that the asphalt viscosity is within the 

range of 150-300 centistokes (75-150 seconds, Saybold Fuyol). The material shall be sufficiently fluid to 

produce a complete coating on every particle of aggregate within the specified mixing time . The 

temperature of the aggregates and asphalt immediately prior to mixing shall be approximately that of 

the completed batch. 

When the mix is produced in a batch type plant the aggregate shall be weighed accurately in the 

designated proportions to provide the specified batch weight. The temperature of the aggregate at the 

time of introduction into the mixer shall be as directed by the Engineer's Representative with a tolerance 

of + 8OC. 

In no case , however , shall temperature of the mixture exceed 165OC . 

Transportation of Mix 

The mix shall be transported to the job site in vehicles and painted, or sprayed, with a limewater, soap 

or detergent solution, at least once a day or as often as required. 

After this operation the truck bed shall elevated and thoroughly drained; no excess solution shall be 

permitted. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be so scheduled that all material. 

109


Delivery of material to the paver shall be at a uniform rate and in an amount well within the capacity of 

the paving and compacting equipment. 

Spreading and Finishing 

Spreading and finishing shall be conducted in the following manner: 

Mechanical Paver 

The binder and surface courses shall be spread and struck-off with a mechanical paving machine 

connected with an automatic sensor. The paving machine connected with an automatic sensor. The 

paving machine shall be operated so that material dose not accumulate and remain along the sides of 

the receiving hopper. 

Equipment, which leaves tracks or indented areas which cannot be corrected in normal operation, or 

which produces flushing or other permanent blemishes or fails to produce a satisfactory surface shall 

not be used. 

Lines for the paver to follow will be established by the Engineer's Representative parallel to the 

centreline of the proposed roadway. The paver shall be positioned and operated to follow closely the 

established lines. 

In backing trucks against the paver , care shall be taken not to jar it out of its proper alignment . 

As soon as the first load of material has been spread, the texture of the unrolled surface shall be checked 

to determine its uniformity. 

Segregation of materials shall not be permitted If suspended until the cause is determined and 

corrected. 

Transverse joints in succeeding courses shall be offset at least 60 cm. 

Any irregularities in alignment left by the paver shall be corrected by trimming directly behind the 

machine. Immediately after trimming, the edges of the course shall be thoroughly compacted by 

tamping. Distortion of the pavement during this operation shall be avoided. 

Edges against which additional pavement is to be placed shall be straight and immediately vertical. A 

lute or covered rake shall be used immediately behind the paver when required to obtain a true line and 

vertical edge. Any irregularities in the surface of the pavement course shall be corrected directly behind 

the paver . Excess material forming high spots shall be removed by a shovel or lute. Indented areas shall 

be filled with hot mix and smoothed with the back of a shovel being pulled over the surface. 

Fanning of material over such areas shall not be permitted. 

Hand Spreading 

In small areas where the use of mechanical finishing equipment is not practical, the mix may be spread 

and finished by hand, if so authorized by the Engineer's Representative. Wood or steel form, approved 

by the Engineer's Representative, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross-section, may be 

used. In such instances, measuring blocks and intermediate strips shall be used to aid in obtaining the 

required cross-section. Placing by hand shall be performed carefully; the material shall be distributed 

uniformly to avoid segregation of the coarse and fine aggregate 

Broadcasting of material shall not be permitted. During the spreading operation, all materials shall be 

thoroughly loosened and uniformly distributed by lutes or covered rakes. Material that has formed into 

lumps and dose not break down readily shall be rejected. 

Following placing and before rolling, the surface shall be checked with templates and straight edges and 

all irregularities shall be corrected. 

Heating equipment used for keeping hand tools free from asphalt shall be provided. Caution shall be 

exercised to prevent high heating temperatures, which may burn the material. The temperature of the 

110


tools when used shall not be greater than the temperature of the mix being placed. Heat only shall be 

employed to clean hand tools; petroleum oils or solvents shall not be permitted. 

Compaction General 

General 

Except for small jobs, such as driveways, at least two rollers shall be required at all times. As many 

additional rollers shall be used as necessary to provide specified pavement density. 

During rolling, the roller wheels shall be kept moist with only sufficient water to avoid picking up the 

material. 

After the edges have been compacted rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and gradually 

progressing toward the centre of the pavement. 

The rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheel nearest the paver . The 

speed shall not exceed 5 kph for steel-wheeled rollers or 8 kph for pneumatic - tired rollers. 

The line of rolling shall not be changed suddenly. If rolling causes displacement of the material, the 

affected areas shall be loosened at once with lutes or shovels and restored to the original grade of the 

loose material before being re-rolled. 

Heavy equipment or rollers should not be permitted to stand on the finished surface before it has been 

compacted and has thoroughly cooled. 

Rolling shall be in the following order: - 

a) Transverse joints. 

b) Outside edge 

c) Initial or breakdown rolling, beginning on the low-side and progressing toward the high side 

d) Second rolling, same procedure as (c) 

e) Finish rolling. 

The compaction temperature (laboratory) shall be (viscosity) of bitumen is 280+30 centistokes, as 

follows : 

148+3oC for 60/70 penetrations. 

Transverse Joints 

Transverse joints shall be held to a minimum and thoroughly compacted to provide a smooth riding 

surface. 

Joints shall be straight edges and string - lined to assure smoothness and true alignment. If a joint is 

formed with a bulkhead, such as a board, to provide a straight line and vertical face, it shall be checked 

with straight edges before fresh material is placed against it to complete the joint. If a bulkhead is not 

used to form the joint and the roller is permitted to roll over the end of the new material, the line shall 

be located back of the rounded edge a sufficient distance to provide a true surface and cross-section. If 

the joint has been distorted by traffic or by other causes, it shall be trimmed to line. 

In either case, the joint face shall face shall be painted with a thin coating of asphalt before fresh material 

is placed against it. 

To obtain through compaction of these joints, material placed against the joint shall be tightly crowded 

against the vertical face of the joint. 

111


To accomplish this, the paving machine shall be positioned so that the material shall overlap the edge of 

the joint by 3 to 5 cm. The depth of the overlapped material shall be kept uniform. 

The coarse aggregate in the overlapped material that was dislodged through raking or luting shall be 

removed form the pavement surface and discarded. 

A tandem roller shall be placed on the previously compacted material transversely so that no more 15 

cm of the rear-rolling wheel rides on the edge of the joint. 

The roller shall be operated to pinch and press the mix place at the transverse joint. The roller shall 

continue to roll along this line, shifting its position gradually across the joint, in 15 to 20 cm P17 

increments, until the joint has been rolled with the entire width of the roller wheel. Rolling joint is 

obtained 

Edges 

Care shall be exercised in consolidating the coarse along the entire length of the edges. Before it is 

compacted, the material along the unsupported edges shall be slightly elevated with a tamping tool or 

lute. 

This will permit the full weight of the roller wheel to bear on the material to the extreme edges of the 

mat. In rolling pavement edges, roller wheels shall extend 5 cm to 10 cm beyond the pavement edge. 

Breakdown Rolling 

Breakdown rolling shall commence at a temperature of not less than 120 O C and immediately follow the 

rolling of the longitudinal joint and edge. Rollers shall be operated as close to the pavement as necessary 

to obtain adequate density without undue displacement. The breakdown roller shall be operated with 

the drive roll or wheel nearest the finishing machine. Exceptions may be made by the Engineer's 

Representative when working on steep slopes. 

When both three-wheeled rollers and tandem rollers are used, the three-wheeled rollers shall work 

directly behind the paver following by the tandem rollers. Only experienced roller operators shall be 

used for used this work. 

Second Rolling 

Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be used for the second rolling. The second rolling shall follow the 

breakdown rolling, as closely as possible and while the paving mix is still of at a temperature that will 

result in maximum density from this operation. 

Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be continuous (at least three complete coverage) after the initial rolling 

until all of the mix placed rollers on the hot paving mix which causes undue displacement will not be 

permitted. 

Finish Rolling 

The finish rolling shall be accomplished with two-axle tandems or three-axle tandems while the 

material is still warm enough for the removal of the rollers marks. If necessary to obtain the required 

surface finish, the Engineer's Representative shall specify the use of pneumatic - tired rollers. All rolling 

operations shall be conducted in close sequence. 

In places inaccessible for the operation of standard rollers as specified, compaction shall be performed 

by trench rollers or others. The trench roller shall be operated at the direction of the Engineer's 

Representative until the course is thoroughly compacted. Hand tamping, manual or mechanical, may be 

used in such areas if it proved to the Engineer's Representative that such operations will give the 

desired density. 

Shoulder 

The shoulder material shall not be placed against the edges of the pavement until the rolling of the 

surface course has been completed. 

112


Adequate precaution shall be taken to prevent distortion of the pavement edge from specified line and 

grade. 

When the rolling of the surface course has been completed and the edges have been thoroughly 

compacted, shoulder material shall be immediately placed against the edges and rolled . 

Density and Surface Requirements 

The completed pavement shall have a relative compaction equal to or greater than 98% (from daily 

Marshall) of a laboratory specimen prepared as specified in Section A, "Test Methods and Definitions”, 

and made form plant mix conforming to the result of density from samples taken on site . 

The final surface shall be of uniform texture and shall conform to line and grade shown on the plans. 

Before final acceptance of the project, or during the progress of the work, the thickness of all coarses will 

be determined by the Engineer's Representative. 

All unsatisfactory work shall be repaired, replaced or corrected. 

Both density and thickness shall be carefully controlled during construction and shall be in full 

compliance with the plans and specifications. During compaction, preliminary tests as an aid for 

controlling the thickness, shall be made by inserting a flat blade , correctly graduated, through the 

material to the top of the previously placed base , or by other means approved by the Engineer's 

Representative 

In checking compacted depth, the cutting of the test holes, refilling with acceptable materials, and 

proper compaction shall be done by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer's 

Representative. 

For the purpose of testing the surface on all courses, a 3- meter long aluminum straight edge at the 

longitudinal direction shall be used. 

Any irregularities which vary more than 0.5 cm in 3 meters shall be corrected. Irregularities, which vary, 

may develop before the completion of rolling shall be remedied as may be required. 

Should any irregularities or defects remain after the final compaction, the surface course shall be 

removed promptly and sufficient new material laid to form a true and even surface. All minor surface 

projections, joints, and minor honeycombed surfaces shall be ironed smooth to grade as may directed by 

the Engineer's Representative. 


Asphalt concrete shall be measured by square meters of the actual area paved and accepted in place 

including the bitumen according to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. 

Edge slopes shall be done but will not be measured for payment. 

Basis of Payment 

Payment shall be based on the Contract unit rate for "Asphalt mix surface thickness 0.05m" per square 

meter, complete in place including bituminous material. No payment shall be made for extra width or 

for extra thickness. 

The required compacted thickness is the minimum acceptable and tolerance shall be on the plus side. 

Payment may also be based on the unit linear meter of road excavation according to B.O.Q. where 

thickness of asphalt mix shall remain as 0.05m , and the Contractor shall follow all above mentioned 

specifications . 

113

TECHNICAL 

INFORMATION 1.3.1 

Multi-function panel (MFP) 

PC 2625-5 for glazing without transoms 

10 years material guarantee* 

PC 

MFP 

made of polycarbonate 

UV co-extrusion on the outside 

Product description 

Technical data 

PC 2625-5 

The new multi-function panel (MFP) is an 

on-going development of the well-known hollow Structural width 600 

Unit 

mm 

chamber panes, but it has a moulded on coupling Thickness 55/25 mm 

and does not need a transom system. Weight 3,40 approx. kg/qm 

Made of polycarbonate, the MFP offers U-value 1,55 W/qm K 

excellent weatherproof properties at 

high and low temperatures. E-module 2200 N/qmm 

These properties are safeguarded by the Expansion coefficient 0,065 mm/m °C 

co-extruded UV protection layer on both sides. Temperature resistance short 130 °C 

Also available with heat-reflecting constant 115 °C 

HEATBLOC surface. Transmission clear 62 approx. % 

In combination clear or opal anti-blind inside. opal anti-blind 44 approx. % 

HEATBLOC 

a.A 

Radius minimum 6000 mm 

Thanks to the moulded-on coupling, the UV transmittance 0 % 

panels can be clipped on safely and easily. Fire behaviour B 2 DIN 4102 

The proven accessories and frame system 

allows for versatile, safe and economical 

installation. An additional transom profile 

Permitted spans* 

can drastically increase the span width. Post-and-beam spacing in cm with reinforcement 

vertical Normal areas Edge Profile 2180 

Application areas 0 - 8 m 220 110 

Thanks to the good U-value from the 5-shell design 8 - 20 m 120 60 

together with the coupling on the outside, 

this panel is simply ideal for economic 

Coupling always outside! 

roof and facade glazing for 60 ° 200 100 

tennis and sports halls 45 - 60 ° 160 80 

cantilevered skylights without transoms (curved) 30 - 45 ° 150 60 

gable roof glazing 15 - 30 ° 140 60 

flat sloping roofs 5 - 15 ° 130 60 

warehouse units 

Skylight strip, curved 

agricultural and sales greenhouses Normal range span up to 400 cm 600 

Other permitted spans: please enquire 

Guarantee according to our guarantee declaration, 

*Values apply for closed buildings in normal area and edge 

see also TECHNICAL INFORMATION PC Subject to technical alterations 1.3.1.07.05 

These details refer to our current state of know-how and do not claim to be complete. 

Subject to technical alterations. Please check for yourself whether our products are suitable for your purpose.



Project Name: 


Phase 1 

Sports Center 


Volume VI 


B- Electrical Specification 

SPORT HALL 



Through: 

United Nations Development Programme 


Designed by 



2009 

1

DIVISION 1 

ELECTRICAL 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Section No. 

Title 

1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 

2 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS 

3 WIRES AND CABLES 

4 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 

5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 

6 WIRING DEVICES 

7 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTIONS 

8 SUPPORTING DEVICES 

9 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 

10 UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES 

11 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 

12 LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 

13 EARTHING SYSTEMS 

14 PANEL BOARDS 

15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 

16 MOTOR STARTERS 

17 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 

18 ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH 

19 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 

20 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 

21 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM 

22 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 

23 FIRE ALARM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 

24 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 

25 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 

26 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM 

27 UPS 

28 HAND DRAYERS 

29 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

SECTION 1 

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.01 GENERAL 

A. All general Provisions contained within this, or any other, section of the specification 

shall be fully applicable to each and every other section. 

B. All work carried out on the installation shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and 

workmanlike manner, to provide for proper operation, maintenance and repair. The work 

shall be in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, and shall fulfill their 

true intent and meaning. No deviations from these Specifications and/or Drawings shall 

be made without written approval of the Engineer. 

C. These Specifications and associated drawings form a composite set of documents, 

intended for the selection and installation of equipment having the general and specific 

characteristics as detailed. 

D. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete, tested and 

ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and co-ordinated with all other 

construction. 

E. The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Engineer that the materials, 

appliances, equipments or devices that he furnishes and installs under this contract, meet 

the requirements of NEC, BS, NFPA as regards fire and casualty hazards. 

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. The work under this division of the specifications shall include furnishing all labor, 

materials. equipment and services to furnish and install the complete electrical system, 

putting into operation, tested and commissioned as shown on the accompanied drawings 

and specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following principal 

systems and equipments: 

- Power Distribution Systems 

- Lighting Systems 

- Low Current Systems 

- Power requirements to all mechanical and special systems 

1.03 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 

A. The Medium Voltage electrical supply from Electrical CO shall be: 

3 phase, 11or 33 KV,Delta , 50 Hertz. 

B. The low Voltage electrical system shall be 3 phase, 4 wires, 400 volts, 50 Hertz earthed 

Royal Electromechanical Eng. 

Consultant Engineers 


SEC.1 - 1

neutral system. 

1.04 SUPPLIER OF LOW CURRENT & SPECIAL SYSTEMS 

A. The contractor shall assign a specialist supplier/designer for all low current and special 

systems. 

B. The suppliers of these systems shall check the design and submit their shop drawings and 

materials based on the requirements of the construction documents and the related 

international standards. 

C. The shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be stamped by the suppliers. 

D. The suppliers shall support their submittals with satisfactory calculations. 

E. The contractor shall bear the cost of any extra item found necessary to have a properly 

functional system. 

1.05 CO-ORDINATION 

A. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the proper co-ordination of all phases 

of the Work and timely delivery to the site of all equipment and materials for proper 

execution of the Work. 

It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to fully co-ordinate the Work with all or any 

other disciplines and to ensure proper phasing of the Work to ensure continuity of all 

works under this Contract. If it becomes necessary to remake any part of these Works or 

that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor or badly timed co-ordination, then 

all costs associated with remaking those Works will be borne by the Contractor. 

B. The contractor shall co-ordinate with all supply Undertakings and Authorities and shall 

include for attendance along with all costs involved in re-directing existing services. 

C. The Contractor shall take into consideration all statutory and local requirements issued by 

the Electricity Local Authority, Central Government, Broadcasting Authority, Telephone 

and Telecommunications Authorities, Civil Defence along with any other requirements to 

be considered for the correct and legal operation of the electrical and telecommunication 

installation or equipment connected to the installation as part of this Contract. 

D. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the coordination with all electrical and 

mechanical systems’ suppliers. He shall include in his cost all the electrical requirements 

(even if they were not mentioned in the BoQ or drawings) to have a fully functional 

system as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer and/or the international 

standard. 

1.06 CLIMATE CONDITIONS 

A. External to building and in non-air conditioned spaces, all apparatus shall be rated for an 




SEC.1 - 2

ambient temperature maximum of 55 o C, minimum of -0 o C and a maximum humidity of 

100% rh. 

B. In air conditioned buildings, all apparatus shall be rated for ambient temperature of 45°C 

maximum; minimum of 0° C and a maximum humidity of 85% rh 

C. When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from direct 

radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains. 

D. All apparatus shall be rated for continuous services twenty four hours a day, seven days a 

week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary routine maintenance. 

1.07 ACCESSIBILITY 

A. All work shall be so installed as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. 

Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no change shall be 

made without written approval from the Engineer. Access door/panels locations shall be 

approved by the Engineer before installation work is commenced. 

1.08 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

A. All material and equipment, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against corrosion, 

deterioration and ingress of foreign matter. All equipment shall be kept clear of the floor 

or ground by means of wooden bearers or other means, and shall be protected against the 

weather. 

1.09 PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION 

A. Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different 

manufacturer's equipment will have varying sound and vibration characteristics. The 

Contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that equipment installed does not 

transmit unnecessary noise or vibration. 

B. All equipment installed in plant rooms and outside areas shall not be audible in the 

occupied areas. 

C. Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other acoustic 

treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included in the rates for the 

equipment. 

D. The Contractor shall submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the Engineer 

before commencement of work. 

E. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the noise generation by the plant 

selected so that structural soundproofing measures can be evaluated. This means either 

data on the acoustic capacity level in relation to frequency, or the sound pressure level 

measured at 1 meter from the plant at octave median frequencies from 63 Hz to 4000Hz. 

Details of the spatial and operational conditions shall also be given. 




SEC.1 - 3

F. All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements, necessary if 

acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the Contractor. 

1.10 GUARDS 

A. All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately protect 

all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment. The guards shall be constructed 

in such a manner that the movement of drive belts and rotation of shafts may be readily 

observed without removal of the guard. 

B. All 'live' parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to adequately 

protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment from injury. 

C. Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the equipment manufacturer. 

All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be designed to be easily 

removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance. 

1.11 SIGNS AND NOTICES 

A. All signs and notices shall be provided for identification, warning, instructions, etc and as 

required by the local authorities both in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being 

above or to the right of the English version, and as directed by Engineer. 

B. A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be approved 

by the Engineer prior to manufacture. 

1.12 GOVERNING CONDITIONS 

A. The entire electrical installation shall in all respects comply with the requirements of the 

following. 

1- International Electro technical Commission (IEC). 

2- British Standards (BS). 

3- American Standards (NFPA/ANSI/NEMA/NEC) 

4- International Organization of Standardization (ISO). 

5- European Committee for Electrical Standardization (CENELEC). 

6- International Telegraph and Telephone Consultive committee (CCITT). 

7- Telecommunications and Electronic Industry Association (TIA/EIA). 

8- Requirements stated within this Specification. 




SEC.1 - 4

1.13 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 

A. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following shall be mounting heights of 

equipment centre lines above finished floor level; 

Panel Board/MCC 

Isolating Switch 

Equipment Connection Units 

Light Switch 

Dimmer Switch 

Push button station 

Wall mounted telephone 

Fire alarm manual call point 

Fire alarm sounder 

Fire alarm panels 

Power Socket outlet 

Telephone socket 

Data Outlet 

TV/Radio antenna socket 

Remote Control Panel 

Wall mounted video I/C unit 

Wall mounted speaker 

1800mm (Top of panel above FFL) 

1300mm 

1300mm 

1300mm (100mm from door frame) 

1300mm 

1300mm 

1300mm 

1500mm 

2200mm 

1800mm (Top of panel above FFL) 

600mm 

600mm 

600mm 

600mm 

1800mm 

1600mm 

1800mm 

Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and socket outlet) are 

shown in approximately the same location, their centre lines shall be aligned vertically. 

Any discrepancy found between these mounting heights and other disciplines e.g. 

architectural drawings, shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for final decision. 

1.14 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. Each item of the electrical installation including electrical switchgear, control gear etc. 

shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label clearly indicating its function, circuit number 

and phase. 

B. Each label shall be made of white plastic not less than 50mm x 12mm high suitably 

engraved with black 5mm high letters and fixed by means of two brass set screws, nuts, 

and shake proof washers. 

C. Warning labels made of red plastic with white letters at least 12mm high reading 

"DANGER 220 VOLTS" as appropriate shall be fixed to the lids, covers or doors of any 

equipment which contains terminals or conductors connected to more than one phase of a 

low voltage supply. The method of fixing shall be as detailed above. 

D. Prior to final testing the Contractor shall confirm that all labeling is intact over the whole 

site and that all cables have been fitted with circuit markers. 

E. All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to which they are 

connected. 




SEC.1 - 5

F. An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock shall be 

positioned in an approved position in each switch room. Manufacturer's or Contractor's 

names or trademarks shall not be exhibited anywhere through the installation without the 

prior approval and permission of the Engineer with exception that the Contractor's name 

and address may be fixed in an approved position on the main intake switchboard. 

G. All labels shall be in English and Arabic. 

1.15 VERMIN PROOFING 

A. All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed. 

B. Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through pipe ducts, they 

shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with vermin repellant and 

surrounded by mastic sealant. 

C. All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood plugs. 

D. Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written comments of the 

Engineer must be obtained prior to installation. 

1.16 FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 

A. The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to minimise the 

risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of fire. 

1.17 CLEANING DOWN 

A. The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the final cleaning down and painting of all 

scratched or damaged electrical apparatus, panel boards, cubicle panels, distribution 

boards and transformers. 

1.18 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. The Contractor shall submit samples and full relevant manufactures literature for all 

material proposed for the project, in accordance with the requirements of the relevant 

sections of this specification. 

B. No order shall be placed until the Contractor has obtained full written approval of the 

relevant material submittal from the Engineer. 

C. The Contractor shall submit a sample of the exact make, model and finish proposed for 

each material required. 

D. Manufacturer's performance data and certified factory drawings giving full information 

pertinent to the adequacy of the relevant equipment shall be submitted for approval. 

E. Submittal shall be made in a manner to ensure complete information regarding what is 




SEC.1 - 6

eing offered and in a manner that facilitates easy filing and ready access to all data. 

F. Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available until after 

orders have been placed, the Engineer may give provisional approval until all requested 

drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and approved by him. It is 

the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all necessary information is supplied to the 

Engineer in accordance with the progress of work. 

G. Should the Engineer give provision approval due to lack of complete information, and 

should the missing information not eventually meet with approval, the Engineer shall not 

be held responsible for any delay of additional expense incurred. For equipment where 

delivery from the manufacturer is likely to be prolonged, it is essential that the Contractor 

provided the material submittal at the earliest possible date, so as to ensure approval and 

orders in complete conformity with the progress of the works. 

1.19 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer detailed construction drawings 

before starting work. These drawings shall comply with and complement the Tender 

Documents in showing physical layout of all equipment, exact location of all equipment, 

lighting, columns, luminaries and cables routings including dimensioned locations of 

underground cables, construction and installation details, wiring diagrams, etc. No work 

shall be started on site until approval of the Drawings has been given in writing by the 

Engineer. The scale of the shop drawings shall be 1:100. 

1.20 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer 'As Built' drawings all in accordance with the 

requirements for 'Shop Drawings' updated to show the exact manner in which equipment 

is installed and shall be completely cross referenced to submittals and instruction 

manuals, so that they form an integrated reference to details of equipment, method of 

installation and maintenance. 

B. Upon completion of the installation, record drawings shall be submitted on each system 

before final acceptance of the work. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a set of 

record drawings including system diagrams for each system.The record drawings masters 

shall be on reproducible mylar film, uniformly sized as required for legibility and 

reproduction and on high density floppy or compact disks. 

1.21 DOCUMENTS 

A. Maintenance Literature: Prior to the final acceptance of the installation the Contractor 

shall submit to the Engineer manuals for all equipment supplied under the Contract. The 

manuals shall be A4 size bound in loose leaf binders or booklets suitably enclosed and 

including the following: 

1. Single line diagram of the complete network, 

2. Control, protection and circuit diagrams for all equipment, 

3. Setting up, commissioning and operating instructions, 




SEC.1 - 7

1.22 SPECIAL TOOLS 

4. Trouble shooting procedures, 

5. Maintenance instructions including schedules for preventative 

maintenance, 

6. Complete recommended spares list including manufacturers name and 

catalog number. 

7. Name of manufacturers' local authorized representatives and service agent. 

A. The Contractor shall supply as part of this contract all special tools required for equipment 

maintenance. 

END OF SECTION 1 




SEC.1 - 8

SECTION 2 

ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS 


1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this 

Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the 

Contract. 

1.02 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. The requirements of this section shall apply to all electrical raceways referred to on the 

drawings and elsewhere within this Specification. 

B. The types of electrical raceways required shall comprise the following:- 

1. Steel Conduits. 

2. Flexible Conduits. 

3. PVC Conduits. 

4. EMT Conduits. 

5. Cable Trays. 

6. Cable Trunkings (Metal). 

7. Cable Trunkings (PVC). 

8. Cable Ladders. 

9. Underground Ducts 

1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS 

A. The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical raceways of 

the type and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 

service for not less than 5 years. 

B. The raceways furnished under these specifications shall conform to all applicable 

standards of SASO and B.S. 

1.04 SUBMITTAL 

A. The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturer's data on all electrical raceway 

system materials, together with samples of the proposed materials. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 

A. The Contractor shall provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed threads of 

metal conduit, handle raceways carefully to prevent end-damage and avoid scoring the 

finishes. Where possible the raceways shall be stored indoors. If necessary to store 

outdoors, the raceways shall be elevated well above ground and enclosed with durable 



ELECTRICAL RACEWAY 

SEC .2 -1

waterproof wrapping. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.01 METAL CONDUITS 

A. All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded steel complying with BS 4568, not less 

than 20mm diameter and finished with hot dipped galvanising providing heavy protection 

(Class 4) both inside and outside. All conduit and fittings shall be free from rust or other 

defects. 

B. All conduit fittings shall be malleable iron manufacture complying with BS 4568. 

C. All fittings shall have a hot dipped galvanized finish. 

D. All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass bushes complete 

with serrated tempered shakeproof washers. All bends shall be cold set. All tees shall be 

made using circular tee conduit boxes. 

E. All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and of the same finish as that of the conduit 

which they are being used to secure. 

F. A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box. 

G. All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling of 

accessory. 

2.02 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS 

A. Flexible conduits, not less than 20 mm diameter, shall only to be used for final connection 

to items of fixed equipment subject to vibration. 

B. Flexible conduit and adaptors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 731 Part 1. 

C. Brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end of the flexible conduit and 

should be of the compression type. 

D. Flexible conduit shall be of the weather proof liquid-tight type having an overall PVC 

sheath. No length shorter than 500mm of flexible conduit shall be used unless specified 

elsewhere in this specification. 

2.03 PVC CONDUITS 

A. All PVC conduits shall be U.P.V.C. Rigid Conduits complying with BS 6099-2-2/614-2-2 

I.E.C. heavy gauge in all respects, and may be used where ambient temperatures do not 

exceed 75 o C. 

B. All conduit fittings shall confirm to BS 6099-2-2/IEC 614-2-2 standards and BS 4607 




SEC .2 -2

Part 5. 

C. No conduit shall be less than 20mm diameter. 

D. Conduit boxes shall be of the B.E.E.S.A. circular pattern with appropriate spout entries 

and 50.8mm accessory fixing centres. 

E. All connections and terminations shall be by means of a manufacturer's standard adaptor. 

F. All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or covers. 

However care must be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where 

excessive temperatures are likely to occur special insulated boxes shall be used, i.e. of a 

pattern specifically designed by the manufacturer to improve weight-loading 

characteristics at high temperatures. 

G. All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall be used 

where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large U.P.V.C. adaptable 

boxes for junctions. 

H. All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer as that of the 

conduit which they are being used to secure. 

I. A tapped earth terminal shall be provided in every conduit box. 

J. All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final 

levelling of accessories. 

K. In order to facilitates interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential 

manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC conduit and appropriate accessories 

covered by this specification shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. 

2.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) 

A. EMT conduits shall be made of galvanized steel. 

B. EMT conduits shall comply with ANSI/NEMA standards. 

C. EMT fittings and accessories shall be made of galvanized steel. 

D. Compression type connectors shall be used. 

2.05 CABLE TRAYS 

A. All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange. 

B. All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc coated steel to BS 2989 with a 

standard heavy duty galvanizing coating of 350g/m 2 and Z2 bending grade. 

C. All bends, tees, cross units and angles shall be of the same specification as that of the 




SEC .2 -3

cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer as the cable 

tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted. 

D. Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than: 

1.5mm up to 305mm width. 

2.0mm above 305mm width. 

E. All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing. 

F. Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint. 

G. Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed as shown in 

the typical drawing details. 

H. Where cable tray carries 13.8kV cable a tray lid shall be installed. 

2.06 CABLE TRUNKING (METAL) 

A. Metal cable trunking shall comply with BS 4678 Part 1: Class 3 and shall be 

manufactured from galvanized steel sheet to BS 2989. 

B. Only purposed made fittings, connectors, covers and accessories by the same 

manufacturer as the trunking shall be used and finished in hot dipped galvanized steel to 

BS 2989. Site fabrication shall not be permitted. 

C. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint. 

D. Covers shall be of the overlapping type and secured to the trunking by either an approved 

clip or screws. 

E. In areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, e.g. chlorine, all trunking shall be painted with 

chlorinated rubber paint. 

F. Cable trunking shall be used wherever possible to replace multiple conduit runs as shown 

on drawing and as approved by Engineer. 

2.07 CABLE TRUNKING (PVC) 

A. Heavy Duty U.P.V.C. trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used wherever 

possible to replace multiple conduit runs. Where applicable, trunking shall comply with 

the requirements contained in BS 4678 Part 4. Any non-standard trunking accessories 

shall be fabricated by the manufacturer, no site fabrication shall be allowed. 

B. In order to facilitate interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential 

manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC cable trunking and appropriate 

accessories covered by this specification shall be obtained from the same manufacturer. 




SEC .2 -4

2.08 CABLE LADDERS 

A. All cable ladders shall be heavy (2mm) gauge, manufactured from hot-dip galvanized 

sheet steel to BS 2989;G350 coating weight (350g/m 2 ) and Z2 bending grade. 

B. All couplers, bends, tees etc shall be by the same manufacturer as the ladder. 

C. Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's 

structural information to ensure undue stress or bending does not occur. 

D. In areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, eg. chlorine, the ladders shall have a PVC finish. 

E. Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint. 

2.09 UNDERGROUND DUCTS 

A. Underground duct banks shall be of individual UPVC rigid conduits complying with BS 

6099-2-2/614-2-2 I.E.C. heavy gauge. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 

3.01 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

A. Where conduits are to be cast in concrete, they shall be secured using crumpets, clips or 

saddles as approved by the Engineer. 

B. All ends of conduits shall be reamed to remove all traces of burrs. 

C. Conduit threads shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt together within 

couplers. 

D. Oil and grease shall be removed from all threads. 

E. Conduits shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 m in isolated positions or 1 m in accessible 

situations. 

F. Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed closer than 75 mm to pipes of other 

services. 

G. All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover plates which 

shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. 

H. 'Draw in' boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length. 'Draw in' boxes 

shall be at maximum 12 m spacing and readily accessible at all times. Adaptable junction 

boxes shall also be accessible at all times for inspection and maintenance. 

J. Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation. 




SEC .2 -5

K. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the conduit system. 

L. Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found not to be flush with the finished 

surface. 

M. Conduits and conduit accessories shall be protected from rust and mechanical damage. 

Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty areas shall be painted, using an oxide 

undercoat and aluminum paint, after being cleaned to bare metal. 

N. Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted with 

chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete. 

O. Under no circumstances shall metal conduit be used as a circuit protective conductor 

(CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own separate Cu/PVC CPC. 

P. Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with chapter 522-08 

of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. 

Q. EMT conduit shall be used above false ceiling installation. 

R. Rigid steel conduits shall be used for exposed installation. 

S. Under no circumstances, any conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets, 

bathrooms or any other wet area. 

3.02 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1m, in cases where a 

final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of equipment which is subject to 

vibration. 

B. Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L, L being the direct distance between connection unit 

and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1m. 

C. Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible conduit. 

D. A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all lengths of flexible 

conduits. 

E. Conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical strain, damage or 

excessive temperatures. 

3.03 PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

A. Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted with cover 

plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used. 




SEC .2 -6

B. Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the following appropriate components 

as supplied by the conduit manufacturer: 

1. Purposed made adaptors and accessories. 

2. Permanent adhesive - Solvent cement to produce a rigid watertight joint 

when used with standard couplers and accessories. 

3. Flexible adhesive - A non-hardening adhesive to be used where expansion 

facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction with expansion 

coupler. 

C. Conduits up to 25 mm diameter may be bent cold with the use of the appropriate bending 

spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For larger size conduits, it is necessary to 

use heat or appropriate manufacturer's standard ready made bends. 

D. Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the conduits 

under normal working temperature variations, as follows: 

1. Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit exceeding 

6 meters in length. 

2. Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles. 

3. Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only 

required to effect structural movement at building expansion joints. 

E. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of 1.5 meters in isolated positions or 1 meter in 

accessible situations. Where working temperatures tend to be high, this spacing shall be 

reduced accordingly. 

F. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for junctions, 

which shall be readily accessible at all times. 

G. Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where excessive 

temperature are likely to occur special heat resistant boxes shall be used, i.e. of a pattern 

specifically designed to improve weight loading characteristics. 

H. Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all conduit in accordance with chapter 522-08 of 

the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. 

J. Conduits shall not be installed closer than 75 mm to pipes of other services. 

K. "Draw-in" boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3 m in length at a 

maximum 12 m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times. 

L. Inspection elbows, bend or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation. 




SEC .2 -7

M. Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found to be not flush with the finished 

surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from entering the conduit 

system. 

N. PVC conduits shall be used for embedded installation only. 

O. Under no circumstances, any conduit shall be allowed to run in the floor screed of toilets, 

bathrooms or any other wet area. 

3.04 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION 

A. Where practical cable tray shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall be 

supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the building structure using mild steel 

brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using expanded bolts 

and washers or built into the building structure during construction. 

B. Where cable tray is suspended, 2 No. drop rods shall be used at each suspension point to 

an angle iron or channel support to which the cable tray is bolted. The spacing of 

suspension points shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural 

information such that undue stress or deflection does not occur. 

C. Where cable tray is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat and an 

aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC a top coat of liquid PVC solution shall be 

applied after the completion of the cable tray installation. 

D. Cable trays run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75mm to the wall. 

E. All cables shall be secured to the cable tray at distances in accordance with table 4A of the 

IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, using suitable clips. 

F. Bare copper cables shall not be run on cable tray. 

G. Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across 

each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints. 

3.05 CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION 

A. Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not exceeding 

1.5 m. 

B. Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3 m in length, pin racks shall be fitted by the 

Contractor. 

C. Spacing or fill factors shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with chapter 

522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. 

D. For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned 

copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for 




SEC .2 -8

expansion joints. 

E. Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an oxide 

undercoat and an aluminium top coat. 

F. Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, the complete 

trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber paint after the installation 

is complete. 

G. Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all PVC trunking runs in excess of 6 

metres in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and fixing holes shall be 

drilled oversize to give freedom of linear movement. Internal couplings shall be securely 

fixed at one end by use of thiscotrophic adhesive leaving the other end free for linear 

movement. 

H. Bare copper or aluminium cables shall not be run in metal trunking. 

3.06 CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION 

A. Where practical, cable ladders shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall be 

supported at distances not exceeding 1.5 m to the building structure using mild steel 

brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using expanded bolts 

and washers or built into the building structures during construction. 

B. Where cable ladder is suspended, 2 No. drop rods shall be used at each suspension point 

to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable ladder is bolted. The spacing of 

suspension points shall be determined in accordance with the manufacturer's structural 

information such that undue stress of defection does not occur. 

C. Where cable ladder is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat and an 

aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC, a top coat of liquid PVC solution shall be 

applied after the completion of the cable ladder installation. 

D. Cable ladders run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75 mm to the wall. 

E. All cables shall be secured to the cable ladder with suitable clips at distances in 

accordance with chapters 521-03 and 522-08 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, 

a maximum number of 4 cables may be secured by one clip. 

F. Bare copper cables shall not be run on cable ladder. 

G. Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted across 

each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints. 

3.07 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES 

A. Multiple conduit runs or banks shall be supported on preformed non-metallic separators. 

Spacing between separators shall be close enough to prevent sagging of conduits and 




SEC .2 -9

eaking of couplings and water tight seals. Separators shall be secured with cords where 

necessary and not tie wires. 

B. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downwards away from building. Trenches shall 

be excavated along straight lines so the elevation can be adjusted if necessary to avoid 

unseen obstructions. 

C. During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of 

debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of 

duct line is completed a test mandrel not less than 300 mm long with a diameter 6 mm 

less than the size of the conduit shall be drawn through each conduit, after which a brush 

with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear or all particles of earth, 

sand or gravel; conduit plugs shall then be immediately installed. 





SEC .2 -10

SECTION 3 

WIRES AND CABLES 




Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. 


A. The requirements of this section shall apply to all multicore and single core cables, 

referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this Specification. 

B. The types of cables shall have copper conductors and comprise the following:- 

1. Single core PVC insulated wires and cables. 

2. Flexible multi-core cables. 

3. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables or XLPE/PVC cables. 

1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS 

A. Cables shall only be purchased from manufactures specializing in the manufacture or the 

type of cable mentioned. 

B. Cables shall generally be manufacturer's standard construction and materials. Where this 

contradicts any part of this Specification, the contractor shall state so at the time of tender. 

C. Manufacturer's shall provide proof of supply of similar types of cables to known users for 

a period not less than 5 years. 

D. All equipment furnished under this specification shall conform to applicable standards of 

SASO and BS. 


A. The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of cable they are offering. 

B. For all cables the Contractor shall submit the following manufacturers’ details: 

Dimensions 

Weights 

Construction 

Current rating 

Manner of installation 




SEC.3 - 1

Maximum conductor operating temperature 

Volt drop/amp/metre 

Impedance: Separate resistance and reactance values of single and multicore 

cables 

Resistance of armouring in ohms/1000 metres length of cable 

Characteristic curves for short circuit rating 

Minimum bending radius 

1.05 DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF CABLES 

A. End of cables shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture. 

B. Where cables are transported on drums, these shall have adequate circumference for the 

cables. 

C. After winding on drums, the cables shall be protected by being completely enclosed. 

D. Care shall be taken during transit to avoid damage to cable and drums. Before acceptance 

on site, cable drums and cables shall be inspected for: 

1. Damage 

2. Compliance with specification 

3. Quantity 

E. Cable, wire and accessories shall be stored in factory installed coverings in a clean, dry 

indoor space which provides protection against the weather. 

F. Each distribution cable shall be supplied in one continuous length, no joints shall be 

permitted. 

G. Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the cable, to 

other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions available from the 

cable manufacturers concerning the installation of cables shall be taken into account; in 

particular co-axial cables shall not be bent in radius less than six times the overall 

diameter. Any damage shall be reported immediately to the Engineer. 

H. Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp and impact 

with the ground shall be avoided. They shall be supported on axles and axle stands while 

the cable is being pulled; twisting and abrasion of the cable serving or over sheath shall be 

avoided. 

I. Cables shall be pulled over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable being 

dragged over ground or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring or cable ducts 

and for all cables exceeding 10 m length, cable stockings shall be used for hauling. 

Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable cores as well as the 

sheath and excessive stain shall be avoided. 




SEC.3 - 2


2.01 SINGLE CORE PVC INSULATED CABLES 

A. Single core cables for lighting and small power shall be of high conductivity copper 

stranded wire insulated with PVC 85 0 C, minimum. 

B. Cables shall comply with BS 6004 and shall be of 450/750V grade. 

C. Cables shall be coloured in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 

16th Edition, and BS 3858. 

2.02 FLEXIBLE CABLES 

A. All flexible cables used for pendant lighting fittings or for final connections to fixed or 

portable equipment shall be of 300/500 volt grade and comply with BS 6500. 

B. Flexible cables shall be of annealed copper conductors insulated with heat resisting PVC, 

sheathed with heat resisting PVC and shall be of circular construction. 

C. Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring 

Regulations, 16th Edition, and BS 3858. 

2.03 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED UNARMOURED OR 

STEEL WIRE ARMORED AND PVC SHEATHED CABLES 

A. All low voltage multi-core distribution cables shall be 600/1000 volt grade cross-linked 

polyethylene (XLPE) insulated copper conductor, unarmoured or steel wire armoured and 

PVC sheathed cables complying with BS 5467. 

B. Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity copper wire insulated with cross-linked 

polyethylene. The armouring shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wire and the 

cable shall be sheathed overall with PVC. 

C. Steel wire cable armoring shall be securely bonded to earth at each termination by means 

of an adequately sized metallic bond which shall be as short and straight as it is 

practicable. 

D. Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 514 of the IEE Wiring 

Regulations, 16th Editions, and BS 3858. 

E. Joints shall not be allowed in any cable unless approved by the Engineer prior to 

execution. 

PART 3 EXECUTIONS 

3.01 INSPECTION 




SEC.3 - 3

A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to be 

installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely 

completion of the work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work until all 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 

3.02 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING - LIGHTING 

A. Lighting installation wiring will take the following forms: 

1). Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring. 

2). Multi-core XLPE/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for internal 

wiring. 

3). Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or direct buried for external 

wiring. 

B. The types of lighting luminaries required are detailed on the drawings, and the types of 

lighting installations and accessories are detailed elsewhere in this specification and on the 

drawings. 

C. No conductor smaller than 2.5 sq mm shall be used. 

D. All lighting circuit wiring shall be carried out using the "loop-in" system, where 

applicable. 

E. Each lighting circuit shall be wired as shown on the drawings and in accordance with this 

Specification. 

F. Each lighting circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to each 

light and switch point. 

G. Where a lighting circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any other 

circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor must be derated for grouping in 

accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. This will normally result in the 

need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the schedule. 

H. Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate 

compartments of metal trunking or on separate cable tray/ladder in accordance with IEE 

wiring regulations, 16 th edition. 

3.03 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING -SMALL POWER 

A. Small power installation wiring will take the following forms: 

1. Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring. 

2. Multi-core XLPE/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for internal 




SEC.3 - 4

wiring. 

3. Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or direct buried for external 

wiring. 

B. The types of small power installations and accessories required are detailed elsewhere in 

this Specification and on the drawings. 

C. The small power installations shall be wired using the radial system as described on the 

drawings. 

D. No conductor smaller than 4.0 sq mm shall be used. 

E. Each small power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to 

each outlet. 

F. Where a small power circuit it to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any 

other circuit(s), deviating from drawings, the circuit conductors must be derated for 

grouping in accordance with IEE Wiring Regulation, 16th Edition. This will normally 

result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown on the drawings. 

G. Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate 



3.04 MAIN-CIRCUIT WIRING - POWER (SINGLE AND 3 PHASE) 

A. Power installation wiring will take the form of one of the following: 

1. Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit. 

2. Multi-core or single core XLPE/PVC cables in cable tray, ladder or conduit for 

internal wiring. 

3. Multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct bank or direct buried for external 

wiring. 

B. The types of power installations required for this project are detailed elsewhere in this 

Specification and on the drawings. 

C. Power installations will generally be wired on a single circuit basis as described on the 

drawings and will serve fixed items of equipment. 

D. No conductor small than 4.0 sq. mm shall be used. 

E. Each power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor. 

F. When a power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any other 

circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductors must be derated for grouping in 




SEC.3 - 5

accordance with IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition. This will normally result in the 

need to increase the conductor sizes. 

G. Normal and emergency circuit wiring or cables shall run in separate conduits or in separate 



3.05 FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible cables shall not be concealed in any part of the installation. 

B. Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing a minimum 

of three cores. 

C. All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of three cores. 

D. Where portable appliances exceed 200 watt rating, the flexible cable shall not be smaller 

than 32/0.20 sq. mm. 

E. Flexible cables exceeding 1.8 m in length shall not be allowed, with pride approval of the 

Engineer hard wiring shall be taken to within 1.8 m of all equipment or apparatus to be 

supplied with prior approval of the Engineer. 

3.06 INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. Where cables enclosed in conduits are run vertically in excess of 5 m the cables shall be 

clamped after passing out of the conduit, so as to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable 

approved clamps. 

B. Where cables are run in trunking the cables of each circuit or groups of circuits shall be 

clipped together using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips. Vertical runs of 

trunking exceeding 5 m shall be supplied with pin racks to relieve the strain on cables. 

C. Suitable precautions shall be taken during multiple circuit wiring follows a common route 

then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits. 

D. To ease future maintenance and modifications, where multiple circuit wiring follows a 

common route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits. 

E. All cable runs shall be continuous, no joints will be permitted. 

F. Saddle and clips used for fixing cables shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable 

which they are being used to fix and shall be constructed of the same material as that of the 

cable sheath with an overall covering of PVC to the same colour as that of the PVC 

covering of the cable. All saddles and clips shall be secured using brass round head 

screws. Where cables are supported on cable tray or cable ladders they shall be fixed to the 

cable tray using suitable approved straps of clips. Ties shall be spaced at not grater than 

600 mm intervals along each cable, and within 100 mm of end bend or set. 




SEC.3 - 6

G. Cable shall not be run exposed to direct sunlight. Covers or other equivalent means shall 

be provided for protection. 

H. Bends in cables shall not be of a smaller radius recommended by manufacturer but not less 

than twice the overall diameter of the cable whichever is more. 

J. Each gland shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable on which it is used and shall 

be stamped describing the size and number of conductors. PVC shrouds shall be used to 

protect every gland. 

K. Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical technical rooms 

or prone to damage elsewhere on the project, they shall be mechanically protected by a 

cover to a height not less than 2 m from the finished floor level. 

L. When installing cables, care shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action does not take 

place between the cable and any other material. 

M. Power and lighting cables can be installed on one cable tray, and low current system cables 

can be installed on another cable tray with fire alarm cables separated by suitable 

mechanical separators if required. 

3.07 EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION 

A. No work shall commence until the contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily, and 

ascertained that the area is free drains or other underground services. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600 mm of existing services shall be by 

hand digging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be reported 

immediately to the Engineer; they shall be supported by slings or other suitable means and 

protected. Any damage to services, however minor, shall be reported immediately to the 

Engineer; no repairs or replacement shall be done unless the Engineer gives his approval. 

C. When cable trenches are opened all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible. The 

Engineer approval shall be obtained before a trench is backfill, generally backfilling shall 

be commenced within 24 hours of cable laying and the work completed speedily. 

D. Excavations shall be kept free of water and protected against damage or collapse. The 

safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads and services from 

damage shall be ensured. 

E. Before cables are laid the bottom of the trench shall be graded evenly, cleaned of loose 

stones and then covered for the full width of the trench with a 150 mm layer of earth 

which has passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12 mm or with sieved sand. 

Where the level of the trench bottom has to change the slope shall not be greater than 1 in 

12. 

F. After cables have been laid a further layer of earth or sieved sand shall be added over the 

full width of the trench and tamped to provide finally not less than 50 mm cover over the 

cables. The earth shall have passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12 mm. 




SEC.3 - 7

G. Trenches shall be backfield in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The first two layers 

shall be 100 mm deep and rammed by hand; the ramming may be used. Warning tapes and 

covers shall be provided. 

H. Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick. They 

shall be yellow in colour and bear the continuously repeated legend "CAUTION 

ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW" or similar in English and Arabic, in black letters not less 

than 30 mm high. 

J. Warning covers shall be provided, and comply with regulation and codes of practice, for 

M.V. cables. Covers shall be laid directly on tamped sieved earth or sand that covers the 

cables. 

K. Cables laid in trenches shall cross other cables only at junctions; clearances between the 

cables shall be maintained at cross overs. Cables shall not be laid one above the other 

except where indicated. 

L. If more than one cable is to be drawn in a duct, the cables shall be bunched together and 

pulled in one operation, wherever possible. 

M. Where cables run under roadways, concrete or paved areas, they shall be installed in PVC 

ducts, encased in concrete. The ducts shall extend for a minimum distance of 1 m on each 

side of each roadway, concrete or paved area wherever possible and at least one spare duct 

shall always be provided. 

N. Where cables enter ducts beneath ground to buildings, these ducts shall be sealed to 

prevent the ingress of water by means of sealing fittings which will be filled with sealing 

compound. At least one spare duct shall be installed at each building entry point. 

O. Details and routes of external cables are shown on the drawings. 

P. Cables shall be installed to the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition 

and all current amendments. 

Q. Cables shall only be terminated using the correct size and type of gland with earth tag and 

shroud from the same manufacturer as the cable. All gland shall be dustproof and for 

external applications the glands shall be fully weatherproof. 

R. Cable armouring shall be bonded to earth at each termination by means of a green/yellow 

Cu/PVC earth conductor, sized in accordance with chapter 54 of IEE Wiring Regulations 

16th Editions, connecting the cable gland earth tag to the local earth terminal. The 

apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to bare metal around the cable gland earth tag bolted 

connection to ensure a sound electrical connection. 

S. Where cables pass through walls or floors, they shall be protected by PVC or mild steel 

sleeves cast in to the building fabric. If the walls or floors are fire divisions, then the 

sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the Cables(s) to the same rating as the 

walls or floors through which they pass. 




SEC.3 - 8

T. Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armoured cable on the permanent works, 

he shall make a demonstration termination in the presence of the Engineers and obtain the 

approval of the Engineer. 

U. Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, the Contractor shall seal 

the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a suitable approved stopper after installation of 

cable. 

3.08 MARKING OF CABLE 

A. Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete slab and marker. The markers 

shall be 600 mm square by 100 mm thick with impressed character; they shall be made of 

grade 20 concrete, as defined in BS, with 10 mm aggregate. The impressed characters shall 

be in English and Arabic and worded "M.V. CABLE" or "L.V.CABLE" as appropriate 

together with circuit details as indicated; in addition the work "JOINT" shall be added 

where appropriate. 

B. Cables markers shall be located at every point where cable enters a building, sub-station, 

or distribution pillars, at each joint, change of direction, road and pathway crossing, and 

along the route of the cable at the interval not exceeding 45 m. 

C. Except where cables are buried, located in switchrooms, in ducts and spaces designated 

solely for electrical services, or have orange oversheaths, they shall be identified by 

adhesive bands coloured orange, complying with standards and codes of practice 

mentioned elsewhere in this specification. The bands shall be not less than 100 mm long, 

located at least once within each separate compartment through which cables pass and at 

intervals not exceeding 12 m. 

D. Except where cables are buried, or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting they shall be 

permanently identified by discs. The discs shall be of laminated plastic materials with 

black character on white; character shall be not less than 3 mm high. The inscription shall 

indicate the nominal voltage, the designation of the load, the number and cross sectional 

area of cores and the rated voltage of the cable. 

E. Cables identification discs shall be attached to the cables with ties. Disc shall be located 

within 500 mm of terminations and joints, at least once within each separate compartment 

through which the cable pass, and at intervals not exceeding 24 m, they shall coincide with 

the colour bands. 

3.09 JOINTING AND TERMINATING CABLES 

A. The Engineer shall be informed whenever cables are to be jointed. 

B. The Engineer shall be given evidence that the joint or termination manufacturer has stated 

that materials to be employed are suitable for the type of cable to be jointed or terminated. 

C. A cable shall not be cut until the jointing or terminating commences and the work shall 

proceed continuously until it is completed. All necessary precautions shall be taken to 




SEC.3 - 9

prevent damage and ingress of moisture and impurities, cables ends shall be free from 

moisture before jointing commences. Where circumstances prevent completion the cable 

ends shall be sealed. 

D. The Contractor shall employ for this work staff who are fully qualified and competent for 

the types of joints and terminations to be made. 

E. For joints in armored cables, bonding conductors shall be connected across the armouring. 

A split ferrule shall be place under the armouring to prevent deformation of the cable by 

the clamp. 

F. At terminations, armouring and metal sheaths shall be connected directly to the external 

earthing terminal of the equipment by a bonding conductor. For L.V. cables the bonding 

conductor shall have cross sectional area in accordance with regulations mentioned 

elsewhere in this specification and for M.V. cables it shall be as indicated. 

G. At terminations, cable tails shall be formed by separating and bringing out the cores. Each 

tail shall be long enough to be connected to the terminals of the equipment. 

H. Core identification at terminations shall be by coloured or numbered plastic stretch or 

shrink ferrules. 

J. Continuity of spare cores shall be maintained at joints, and at terminations the cores shall 

be connected to spare terminals. 

K. Compression connectors and associated dies for the compression tool shall be the correct 

type and size. The tool shall be so designed that the correct compression must be applied 

before it can be released. 

M. Tools for manipulation and termination of cables shall be of a design approved by the 

cable manufacturer. Corrugation of the metal sheath or damage to outer coverings will not 

be accepted. A wood block or wooden faced tool shall be used to finally dress the cable 

into position. 

N. Repairs to a cable sheath, regardless of the extent of the damage, will not be accepted, 

straight through joints only are permitted. 

P. Terminations and joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 

Only clean, dry plastic filling compound shall be used. 

Q. Marking of cables shall comply with relevant regulation and codes of practice mentioned 

elsewhere in this specification and requirements of the Section. 

R. All H.V. electrical cable 13.8 kv shall be terminated, spliced with pre-molded, 

manufactured apparatus elbows, splices, and they shall be installed in strict accordance 

with manufacturer's recommendation. All parts shall be of one manufacturer to assure 

inter-changeability. Taping or epoxy-formed terminations or other field applied methods 

shall not be permitted except with written approval. 




SEC.3 - 10

S. All pre-molded rubber parts shall be 100% production tested at the factory with industry 

standard applied potential and corona extinction tests. The factory shall certify in writing 

that these tests have been performed. No soldering shall be permitted on drain wires or 

shielding tapes except with written approval of the Engineer. 

T. All electrical cables entering the high voltage compartments of electrical equipment shall 

be terminated by means of "deadfront" equipment wherever possible. 

3.10 SLEEVES, TAPES AND SEALING COMPOUND 

A. Sleeves shall be of the shrink type, applied cold by a mechanical device or by the use of 

heat. They shall provide a sufficient thickness of insulation to suit the particular 

application. 

B. Insulation tape used in joints and terminations shall be compatible with, and have a 

temperature rating and insulating property not less than the cable insulation. They shall 

comply in general with the regulations and standards mentioned elsewhere. 

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

After completion of the installation of wires and cables including clamping, end 

preparation, jointing, etc., but before termination on either end, the insulation resistance 

test (meggar test) shall be carried out for all types of wires and cables with 500V or 1000V 

meggar as applicable according to the rated voltage of the cable insulation and as per the 

IEE Wiring Regulations, 16 th Edition. 





SEC.3 - 11

SECTION 4 

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 





B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this Section. 

Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract. 


A. Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated on drawings and schedules. 

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 

Outlet boxes 

Junction boxes 

Pull boxes 

Floor boxes (under floor and flush floor) 

Conduit bodies 

Bushings 

Locknuts 

Knockout closures. 

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of 

types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service 

for not less than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Qualification with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for project. 

C. I.E.E. Compliance: Comply with I.E.E. as applicable to construction and installation of 

electrical wiring boxes and fittings. 

D. British Standards Compliance: Comply with British Standards as applicable to sheet-steel 

outlet boxes, device boxes, and cover and box supports. 

1.04 SUBMITTALS 

A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings. 




SEC.4 - 1

B. Samples: The Contractor shall submit sample of each type of proposed boxes and fitting 


2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS 

A. Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat, rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring 

boxes, of types, shapes and sizes including box depths, to suit each respective location 

and installation, construct threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for 

securing box covers and wiring devices. Terminal with screw shall be provided inside the 

box for grounding connection of all metallic outlet boxes with appropriate earth mark. 

B. Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each 

installation, including mounted brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixtures 

studs, grounding connection, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, 

which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of 

individual wiring situations. 

C. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet 

wiring boxes, of types shapes and sizes including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit 

ends, terminal with screw for ground connection, cast metal face plates with springhinged 

waterproof caps suitable configures for each application, including face plate 

gaskets and corrosion resistant fasteners. 

D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provided galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull 

boxes or with screw on covers, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location 

and installation with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws 

and washers. 

E. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, or types, shapes and sizes 

to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded, corrosion-resistant 

screws. 

F. Bushings, knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel 

box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset 

connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. 


3.01 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with 

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirement of I.E.E. and BS's "Standard 

of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that 

products fulfill requirements. 

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fitting with wire/cable and raceway 

installation work. 




SEC.4 - 2

C. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or 

moisture or where shown on drawings. 

D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been 

removed. 

E. Install boxes and conduit bodies locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical 

wiring. 

F. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would 

result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on 

rounded surface. 

G. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrate or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly 

embedded electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. 

H. Provide electrical and earth connections for installed boxes. 





SEC.4 - 3


SECTION 5 

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT 



section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 

B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the Section. 



A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is as indicated by drawings and schedules. 

Electric connections are hereby defined to include, but not limited to, connections for 

providing electrical power without exception to all equipment which needs electrical 

power. 

B. Types of electrical power connections covered in this section shall include but not limited 

to the following: 

- To all A.H.U's control panels and BMS equipment/panels. 

- To all motor control centres (MCC). 

- To all socket outlets. 

- To all isolators. 

- To motors (if not specified elsewhere) 

- To motor starters (if not specified elsewhere) 

- To all heaters and A/C equipment (if not specified elsewhere) 

- From motor starters to motors (if not specified elsewhere) 

- To all lighting fixtures and switches. 

- To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, UPS and similar current 

adjustment features of equipment. 

- To master units of communication, signal, alarm, etc. and to all secondary units 

where required. 




SEC.5 - 1

- To earth all equipment. 

C. See Sections 16481 and 16482 for Motors Control Centers and Motor Starters furnished 

integrally with equipment, which is not work of this section. 

D. See Division - 15 sections for control systems wiring, which is not work of this section. 

E. See all the notes on electrical drawings for detail of scope of work included under this 

section. 

1.03 GUARANTEES 

A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND 

SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and warranties for work under this 

Contract. 

B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. 

However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities 

which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the 

Contract Documents. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of connectors and terminals, or 

types, and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical 

insulating tape, electrical flux, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory 

use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects 

with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. 

C. BS Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of BS as to type products used and 

installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, 

motor starters, and disconnect switches. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connectors, terminals and 

materials. 


2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of 

materials, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), 

electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable 

insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as 




SEC.5 - 2

needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated. 

B. Metal and Heavy Gauge PVC Conduit, Tubing and Fitting: Provide heavy gauge PVC 

and metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and fittings of types, sizes 

and weights (wall thickness), indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are 

not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring 

raceways. Provide products complying with Section 16110 ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS, 

and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings. 

- PVC external coated rigid steel conduit (external area and plant rooms). 

- Rigid metal conduit fittings 

- Electrical metallic tubing 

- Flexible metal conduit 

- Flexible metal conduit fittings 

- Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit 

- Liquid-tight flexible conduit fittings 

C. Wire, Cable and Connectors: Provide electrical connectors and terminals as recommended 

by connector and terminal manufacturer for intended applications. 

D. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable 

insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire nuts and cable ties as 

recommended for use by the accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. 


3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

A. Install electrical connection as indicated; in accordance with connector manufacturer's 

written instructions and with recognised industry practices, and complying with 

requirement of the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, "Standard of Installation" to 

ensure that products fulfill requirements. 

B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with 

equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, 

mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between 

electrical power supplies and installed equipment. 

C. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with installation work. 

D. Splices insulated by wound tape shall not be acceptable. Protective earthing conductors 

must be free of splices. 




SEC.5 - 3

E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting stripping covering armour, jacket, and insulation 

properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. 

F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection 

testing and maintenance. 

G. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly. 

H. Provide PVC-coated conduit and fittings where indicated for highly-corrosive atmosphere 

and outdoor installation. 

I. Provide flexible conduit for all motor connections, and for other electrical equipment 

connections where subject to one or more of the following: 

- Exterior location 

- Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate 

(showers, baths, toilet, etc.) 

- Corrosive atmosphere 

- Subjected to water spray 

- Subjected to dripping oil, grease or water. 

K. Provide heat - shrinkable termination for all cables having the size of 300 mm 2 and above. 

L. Refer to basic electrical requirements section for identification of electrical power supply 

conductor terminations with markers approved as to types, colors, letters and markers 

sizes, by Engineer. Affix markers to each point of termination as close as possible to each 

point of connection. 

M. Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting a bushing or grommet shall be provided to 

protect the wire from abrasion unless the design of the box or fitting is such as to afford 

equivalent protection. 





SEC.5 - 4

SECTION 6 

WIRING DEVICES 







1.02 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 

A. This Specification applies to wiring devices used as accessories for the electrical 

installations as indicated on the drawings or schedule and elsewhere within this 

specification. 

B. Types of electrical wiring devices required for the installation in this project include: 

1. Lighting switches. 

2. External lighting switches. 

3. 16A socket outlets (220V). 

4. Single phase isolators and switch fuses. 

5. Multi phase isolators and switch fuses 

6. Time switches 

7. Connections to fixed appliances. 

8. Industrial socket outlet 

9. Telephone, data and TV outlets. 


A. Standards 

The equipment and installation shall comply with the standards and codes of practice 

listed in Section 16010 or their approved equivalents. In the event of the discrepancy 

between this specification and any relevant standard or code of practice, the specification 

shall be followed and the Engineer informed. 




SEC.6 - 1

B. Manufacturers 

Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and ratings required, 

and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 

years. 

C. Source Quality Control 

Before installation, wiring devices shall be tested in accordance with standards mentioned 

elsewhere and have relevant listing or certificates of approval. 

D. Workmanship 

All work undertaken in part or whole shall be carried out and completed to the standards 

mentioned elsewhere and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring devices to the 

building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 


A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete and detailed manufacturer's data 

relating to the wiring devices offered. Refer Section 16010 

For approval submissions shall include the following: 

1. Name of the manufacturer. 

2. Country of origin. 

3. Method of obtaining spare parts for maintenance and list of spare parts 

sufficient for a 2 years period. 

4. Technical performance of the equipment selected. 

5. Dimensional details needed for installation and maintenance. 

6. Delivery time from the date of orders. 

7. Submit copies of test reports or certificates. 

8. Control schematic and wiring. 

B. The Contractor shall provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with the above 

submittal. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Box crate or otherwise completely enclose and protect all equipment from dirt, 




SEC.6 - 2

construction debris, traffic and operation. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of metal or plastic material 

as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 

B. Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards, as mentioned 

elsewhere. The finish and/or color shall be standard throughout the installation unless 

otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer. 

C. Switches shall comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification and be 

suitable for use on inductive and resistive loads. They shall be single pole, unless 

otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer, and where mounted adjacent one to 

another they shall be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common switch plate. 

D. Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. This lamp shall be a neon 

lamp with resistor and red colored lens unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Socket outlets for different systems and voltages shall have different configurations to 

avoid engagement of plugs dedicated for other system voltages. 

2.02 LIGHTING SWITCHES 

A. Lighting switches for interior use shall be one way or two way, single or multi gang, grid 

type. All suitable for 220 volts A.C., minimum 10A and mounted on adjustable grid 

enclosed in metal box. The switches shall be of the quick make, slow break type and shall 

comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 

B. Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover plates 

finished flush with the sides of the metal box. 

2.03 EXTERNAL LIGHTING SWITCHES 

A. All external lighting switches shall be one way, two way or multigang arrangements and 

be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dustproof enclosures. The switches 

shall also comply with standards and regulations mentioned elsewhere. 

B. A suitable drain hole must be provided. 

2.04 16 AMPERES SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS 

A. 16 Amperes, 220 volts, switch socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on drawings, 

and shall have two-pole and earthing pin to NEC standards. 

B. Switch socket outlets shall comply with NEC standards and other codes of practice 

mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 




SEC.6 - 3

C. Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push-on cap retaining ring without 

switch. 

D. All wall mounted switch socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in services or 

plant rooms shall be 3-pin shuttered pattern, flush mounting type with front plates as 

indicated elsewhere. Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal box. Where surface 

mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be of the flush pattern, mounted on 

suitable adaptor boxes. 

E. All 3PH surface mounted sockets shall be provided with a 16 to 32 A, breakable plug top 

complete with fuse. Each twin socket shall be counted as Two sockets. 

F. Plugs shall be provided with all socket-outlets, and handed over to the Employer/Client. 

G. Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or flush 

mounted as indicated elsewhere. 

2.05 16 AMPERES SOCKET OUTLETS 

A. Socket outlets must comply with NEC standards and other Codes of Practice and 

regulations mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 

B. All wall mounted socket outlets with exception of those mounted in services or plant 

rooms shall be 3 pin, flush mounting type with front plates as indicated elsewhere. Socket 

outlets shall be mounted in flush metal boxes complete with an earthing terminal and 

earth tag. Where surface mounted socket outlets are required, they shall be similar to that 

of the flush pattern, mounted on suitable adaptor boxes. 

C. Socket outlets provided in services or plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or 

flush mounted as indicated elsewhere. 

2.06 SINGLE PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES 

A. These shall be of the double pole single throw type, complying with regulations and 

standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 

B. Finishes shall be either of plastic for flush isolators or rust proof metal for surface 

isolators and switch fuses. 

C. All fuses shall be of HRC type as described elsewhere in this specification. These items 

are meant to be used for the isolation of single phase items of fixed equipment fed by an 

individual circuit. 

D. Types of equipment to be fed are described elsewhere in this specification and on 

drawings. 

2.07 MULTI-PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES 

A. Multiphase isolators and switch fuses shall be used for the isolation of multiphase items 




SEC.6 - 4

of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit. 

B. Switches shall be of multiple, single throw operation and must comply with standards 

mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 

C. Types of equipment to be fed are described elsewhere in this specification and on 

drawings. 

D. These items are to be manufactured from rust proofed, metal-clad material. 

E. All fuses shall be of HRC type, as described elsewhere in this specification. 

2.08 TIME SWITCHES 

A. Time switches shall be of the self-starting, self-winding, synchronous-motor driven type. 

B. The rated voltages and rated current shall be as indicated on the drawings. 

C. Time switches shall, unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer, 

incorporate the following: 

1. A 150 hours spring reserve to drive the mechanism during electricity supply 

interruptions. 

2. An easily replaceable cartridge fuse-link, complying with codes mentioned 

elsewhere, inserted in the motor circuit. 

3. An ON-OFF manual switch to enable the circuit to be controlled at will without 

affecting normal dial operation. 

2.09 CONNECTIONS TO FIXED APPLIANCES 

A. Final connections to fix of equipment shall be carried out by using either an insulated 

copper sheathed cable or a flexible metallic conduit with heat resisting cables run through 

the conduit. 

Supply and install a suitable isolator adjacent to each fixed appliance. Conduit for kitchen 

equipment shall not be run in the floor screed. 

B. Flexible Conduit 

Final connections made using flexible conduit are to comprise a metallic flexible conduit 

covered with continuous PVC sheath and shall comply with Section 16110 'Flexible 

Conduit and Fittings of this specification. 

Sufficient length shall be allowed for vibration and movement of the equipment. A 

separate circuit protective conductor wire must be run inside the conduit. 

2.10 INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS 




SEC.6 - 5

A. Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multi phase types and rating as indicated on 

drawings. 

B. Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67 integrated with switch or without 

it. 

C. Socket outlets shall be single phase with two poles and earthing pin or three phase with 

three poles, earthing pin with or without neutral pin. 

D. Socket outlet shall be integrated with 30 mA (RCD) residual current device as earth 

leakage protective. 

2.11 FOR LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS 

A. All outlet plates for low current systems such as telephone, data, TV, music, etc. shall be 

of similar style and finished to that specified for the associated lighting switches and 

socket outlets and shall be suitable for mounting recessed or flush. 

B. Refer to the low current specifications for details. 



A. The Contractor must examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be 

installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and timely 

completion of the work. He shall not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES 

A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions, applicable requirement of BS, IEE, and in accordance with recognized 

industry practices to ensure that products serve their intended function. 

B. Programmed installation of devices after wiring is completed and tested for satisfactory 

insulation resistance. 

C. Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building 

materials, debris, etc. 

D. In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other noncombustible material, boxes and fittings 

shall be so installed that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set back from the 

finished surface more than 5 mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of wood or other 

combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the finished surface or 

project therefrom. 




SEC.6 - 6

E. Plaster surfaces that are broken or incomplete shall be repaired so that there will be no 

gaps or open spaces at the edge of the box or fittings. 

F. In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed wiring, a 

box or an extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and electrically and 

mechanically secured to it. 

G. All wiring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing screws 

or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective coating of 

zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanised finish shall be used complying with 

relevant standards and codes of practice. 





SEC.6 - 7

SECTION 7 

CIRCUIT AND MOTORS DISCONNECTIONS 



A. Examine all other Sections and the Specifications for requirements which affect work of 

this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section. 

B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of this section. 



A. This Specification is for extent of motor and circuit disconnects switch work as indicated 

by drawings and schedules. 

B. Types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section include the following: 


Equipment disconnects. 

Appliance disconnects. 

Motor-circuit disconnects. 

Push buttons stations. 



Contract. 






A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor and circuit disconnect 

switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 

similar service for not less than 10 years. 






SEC.7 - 1

C. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to construction and installation of 

electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches. 

D. BS Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable requirements or of BS standard 

publications. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, schematic and 

dimensions drawings installation instructions and general recommendations for each type 

of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. 

1.06 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS 

A. Pack accessories for protection during transportation and storage. 

B. Store in a dry, clean location. 


2.01 FABRICATED SWITCHES 

A. General Duty Disconnect Isolator Switches: Provide surface mounted, general duty type, 

sheet steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes, and electric characteristics indicated, rated 

as specified on the drawings with required number of poles, incorporating spring assisted, 

quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible 

in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of 

enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is capable of being 

padlocked in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, 

with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and stamped enclosure knockouts. 

2.02 PUSH BUTTONS STATIONS 

A. All push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic materials, non-swelling and fitted to 

avoid any possibility of sticking. Non-retaining type shall generally be used except for 

emergency stop push buttons which shall stay down when operated and be fitted with 

mushroom type heads. 

B. The contacts of all push buttons shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when 

operated. 

C. All push buttons stations shall be provided with labels. 


3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES 




SEC.7 - 2

A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated, complying with 

manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of 

Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products 

fulfill requirements. 

B. Coordinate circuit and motor disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway 

and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. 

C. Install disconnects switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and 

controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. 





SEC.7 - 3

SECTION 8 

SUPPORTING DEVICES 



A. Conduit and equipment supports. 

B. Anchors and fasteners. 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. 

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 


A. Submit details under provisions of Section 01300. 

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems. 

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use 

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include 

instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and 

starting of Product. 

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. 

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for 

purpose specified and shown. 


2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. 

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of 

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. 

C. Anchors and Fasteners: 

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion 

anchors and preset inserts. 




SEC.8 - 1



2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps. 

3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 

4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts 

and hollow wall fasteners. 

5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 

6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 

7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NEC "Standard of 

Installation". 

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. 

D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 

E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. 

G. Do not drill or cut structural members. 

H. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use 

hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use 

spring lock washers under all nuts. 

I. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panel boards with minimum of four anchors. 

J. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panel boards 

one inch (25 mm) off wall. 

K. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panel boards 

recessed in hollow partitions. 





SEC.8 - 2

SECTION 9 

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 


1.01 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 

A. Nameplates and labels. 

B. Wire and cable markers. 

C. Conduit markers. 

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. - Painting. 

1.03 REFERENCES 

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 


A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. 

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use 

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include 

instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of 

Product. 


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. 

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for 

purpose specified and shown. 

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish under provisions . 

B. Provide two sets of each type of material. 


2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS 




SEC.9 - 1

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background in 

Arabic and English. 

B. Locations: 

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 

2. Communication cabinets. 

C. Letter Size: 

1. Use 3mm letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 

2. Use 6mm letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 

D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 5mm white letters on black background. Use only 

for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, and control device stations. 

2.02 WIRE MARKERS 

A. Description: Split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. 

B. Locations: Each conductor at panel board gutters , pull boxes , outlet and junction boxes, 

and each load connection. 

C. Legend: 

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on 

drawings. 

2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings. 

2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS 

A. Location: Furnish markers for each expressed conduit. 

B. Spacing: 6m on center. 


3.01 PREPARATION 

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 

3.02 APPLICATION 

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. 

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. 

C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished 

locations. 

E. Provide colored band on each exposed conduit. Different colors shall be used for each 

type of service (i.e. lighting, power, tel, data, fire alarm, etc.). 





SEC.9 - 2

SECTION 10 

UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICES 



A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work 

of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 


A. The requirements of this section shall apply to all underground electric services, 

referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this specification. 

B. The types of underground electric services comprise the following: 

1. Trenching and backfilling 

2. Duct banks 

3. Manholes, hand holes and earth rod pits. 



A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work 

of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 


A. The requirements of this section shall apply to all underground electric services, 

referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this specification. 

B. The types of underground electric services comprise the following: 

1. Trenching and backfilling 

2. Duct banks 

3. Manholes, hand holes and earth rod pits. 

4. Concrete pads and stub-ups. 

5. Cable warning signs and warning tape. 





SEC.10 - 1

A. Underground electric services shall generally be manufacturer's standard 

construction and materials. Where this contradicts any part of these specifications, 

the Contractor shall state so at the time of tender. 

B. Manufacturers shall provide proof of supply of similar types of underground 

electric services to known users for a period not less than 5 years. 


A. The Contractor shall submit samples of underground electric services they are 

offering. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. The underground raceway system for power, lighting, low voltage and control 

cables shall consist of manholes and hand holes interconnected via concrete 

encased PVC conduits, direct buried PVC conduits or cable trenching, all as 

shown on the drawings. 

2.02 DUCT BANKS 

A. PVC Conduit: 

Schedule 40 PVC conduits shall be used for encasing in concrete and underground 

duct systems, PVC conduits and fittings shall comply with the requirement of 

Section 2.00. 

The PVC conduit shall have a temperature range of 4C to 90C. The conduits 

within the duct bank shall be supported on plastic interlocking spacers, at intervals 

of approximately 2.4 meters. A 25mm separation, edge to edge, shall be 

maintained, both horizontally and vertically, between the ducts. 

All duct banks shall have a 75mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and bottom of 

the PVC ducts. Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place while pouring 

the concrete encasement. 

Where the duct bank enters a building underground the conduit shall terminate in 

an appropriate fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits entering manholes. 

A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends. 

Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the 

conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall not be less than one meter. 

Matching end bells and plugs shall be provided, constructed of high impact plastic. 




SEC.10 - 2

Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling. Couplings 

shall have a centre step to ensure proper seething. Joints shall be made with 

solvent cement. 

All duct banks shall have a 75mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and bottom of 

the PVC ducts. Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place while pouring 

the concrete encasement. 

Where the duct bank enters a building underground the conduit shall terminate in 

an appropriate fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits entering manholes. 

A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends. 

Bends in conduit shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the 

conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall not be less than one metre. 

Matching end bells and plugs shall be provided, constructed of high impact plastic. 

Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling. Couplings 

shall have a centre step to ensure proper seething. Joints shall be made with 

solvent cement. 

B. Concrete Encasement: 

Encasement shall be 20 MPa concrete with 13mm maximum size aggregate for all 

duct banks. For warning purposes, a red dye shall be trowelled into the top surface 

after pouring the concrete. 

C. Expansion and Construction Joints: 

An expansion joint of 55mm per 100 meters maximum shall be provided in the 

duct bank. Additionally, a construction joint shall be installed if pouring of 

concrete is commenced anytime after initial set of adjacent concrete. Neither 

expansion nor construction joints shall be installed under a roadway. 

D. Duct Bank Cleaning: 

Upon completing a duct run, a test mandrel and wire brush cleaner shall be pulled 

through each duct. The test mandrel shall be 6mm less in diameter than the 

nominal inside diameter of the duct while the wire brush shall be slightly larger 

than the duct. The testing and cleaning of a concrete encased duct bank should be 

done the day after the concrete has been poured to eliminate any concrete which 

may have seeped into the ducts. A nylon pull line shall be installed in each duct 

after cleaning and the conduit shall be capped. 

E. Foundation Requirements: 

For duct banks in stable soils, the soil below the duct bank shall be compacted to 




SEC.10 - 3

90 percent of maximum density to a minimum depth of 300mm. A dewatering 

system shall be used to lower the water table below the final excavation depth to 

eliminate disturbance of an in situ soil densities. 

2.03 STUB-UPS 

A. Stub-up shall consist of either 100mm or 150mm diameter rigid steel hot doubledipped 

galvanized conduits entirely encased in accordance. 

B. Stub-up bend shall be 90 degrees. Radius shall be 1200mm. 

C. Each steel conduit bend shall be provided with a PVC steel coupling on one end 

and a thread protector on the other end. 

2.04 MANHOLES 

A. A sump pit shall be built into the base slab directly beneath the manhole opening 

to collect and retain any water present in the manhole. Periodic maintenance may 

be required since sump pumps will not be permanently installed. 

B. The duct bank manhole interface shall include an expansion joint to take up 

longitudinal movement due to expansion and construction of the duct bank. This 

joint will also act as water stop to prevent water for seeping inside the manhole. 

C. The exterior of the manhole shall be waterproofed with a bituminous coating 

having a minimum dry film thickness of 0.30mm. 

D. Each manhole shall have two cable pulling irons opposite each duct bank entrance. 

E. Access to deep manholes will be through a chimney. Permanent ladders shall not 

be installed. 

F. Manholes shall be provided with earth-rods and cable supports as required. 

2.05 HANDHOLES 

Handholes may be formed either monolithically or built up to designed sizes by 

combining several concrete sections cast in various shapes and sizes. Handholes 

shall be provided with cast iron covers, sumps and ground-rods. Section joints 

shall be grouted. Handhole size shall be as shown on drawings. 

2.06 EARTH ROD PITS 

A. Earth rod pits shall be precast of either square or round section with cover. 

2.07 CONCRETE PADS 

A. Concrete pads shall be 150mm high, unless otherwise indicated completed with 

steel reinforcing and necessary bolts, anchors etc. 




SEC.10 - 4

2.08 CASTINGS 

A. All handhole and ground rod box frames and covers shall be heavy duty, cast iron, 

round with solid type gasket lids, and countersunk locking devices. Covers shall 

seal tightly and not rock. 

2.09 CABLE WARNING SIGNS 

A. Where cables are directly buries, warning signs shall be installed in an attempt to 

prevent damage into the cables by excavation. These signs shall be suitable for 

demounting on a riser pole, substation fence or separate stakes to suit the 

installations. 

B. Sign posts should be placed as close to the cable as practical, but no closer than 

900mm horizontally from the cable. 

2.10 CABLE WARNING TAPE 

Warning marker tape shall be laid at least 300mm above the buried cable. The tape 

shall be 300mm to 400mm wide, preferably with a metallic core. 


3.01 EXCAVATION 

A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever 

substances encountered, to the depths specified. During excavation, material 

suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner at sufficient distance 

from the bank of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. 

All excavated materials not required or suitable for back-filling shall be removed. 

Such grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from 

flowing into trenches or other excavation and any water accumulating therein shall 

be removed by pumping or by other approved methods. Such sheeting and shoring 

shall be done as may be necessary for the protection of the work of adjacent duct, 

pipework or structure and for the safety of personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, 

excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be 

tunneled if the cables or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can 

be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. Trenches shall be of necessary width 

for the proper laying of the cables and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as 

practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded. 

B. The trenches in which concrete encased duct work is to be placed shall, in general 

not be wider than necessary for proper shall, in general not be wider than necessary 

for proper placing of such work. However, the banks of such trenches need not be 

kept vertical but may be sloped or widened to such limits as will not interfere with 

other utilities. Over excavating and backfilling with suitable selected material 




SEC.10 - 5

where rock is encountered will not be required except for a gradual cushioning 

towards point of abrupt drop-off of the rock to levels considerably below the grade 

of the duct. 

3.02 BACKFILLING 

A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed, checked, 

accepted and approved in writing. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with 

the excavated materials approved for backfilling. The selected material shall be 

free from large clods of earth or stones larger than 5mm in any dimension. Any 

trenches improperly backfilled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to 

the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled, graded and compacted 

mounted over and smoothed off. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to 

be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of 

trench shall be backfilled in 150mm layers, thoroughly tamped and compacted. 

Minimum degree of compaction shall be 90% density at optimum moisture so that 

paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along 

all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable 

uniformity and the surface over the trenches left in a uniform and neat conditions. 

3.03 CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES 

A. Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of precast or cast-in situ concrete to 

sizes shown on the Contract Drawings. Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors 

shall have a smooth steel trowel finish. Frames and covers shall be watertight and 

covers shall fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron shall be formed to 

shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings shall be free from warp and 

blow holes that may impair their strength of appearance. Exposed metal shall have 

a smooth finish of appearance. Exposed metal shall have a smooth finish and 

sharp lines and arises. Provide all necessary lugs, and brackets. Set pulling-in 

irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF DUCT BANKS 

A. General: Duct banks shall consist of individual conduits encased or unencased in 

concrete as shown on drawings. Top of duct banks shall be installed 600mm 

minimum below finished grade and shall connect manholes and handholes as 

shown on the Contract Drawings. Where a duct bank connects to a building, the 

Contractor shall adapt the duct bank, at one meter beyond the building exterior 

wall, to the building conduit with the required couplings. 

B. Encasement: The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be 

rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 75mm 

beyond any surface of the conduit. Interlocking spacers shall be used to secure a 

uniform spacing between conduits of not less than 75mm. 

C. Installation: Trenches and duct banks shall be graded so that conduits will have a 

fall of at least 75mm per 30m towards the lower manholes or from the high point 

of the section towards the manholes or from the building towards a manhole. 




SEC.10 - 6

Changes in direction of runs shall be accomplished by using special couplings 

limited to 5 degrees and/or 45 degrees bends having a 1m radius sweep with 

straight sections of ducts between changes of direction and `S' sweep sections 

having a minimum of 500m offset. 

1. Where the system enters building construction the underground conduit shall be 

heavy-wall PVC and shall be terminated in appropriate fittings. 

2. Where duct lines enter manholes, the conduits shall terminate in end bells. 

Clean-conduit thoroughly before laying. During construction and after the duct 

line is completed, plug ends of conduits to prevent water washing mud into the 

conduits. Take particular care to keep the conduits clean of concrete or any other 

substance during the course of construction. 

3. Ducts shall be securely anchored and braced with intermediate and base plastic 

spacers to prevent movement during the pavement of concrete. 

4. After the duct line has been completed, a mandrel not less than 300mm long, 

having a cross-section of approximately 6mm less than the inside cross-section 

of the conduit shall be pulled through each conduit, after which a brush with stiff 

bristles shall be pulled through to make certain than no particles of earth, sand or 

gravel have been left in the line. 

5. Install a nylon rope in each conduit. 

6. All duct banks shall enter manholes through rectangular openings of suitable 

dimensions provided in walls. Such holes shall be sized to properly receive the 

duct, but shall not be too large for proper caulking. The space between duct 

banks and manhole walls shall be caulked tight with lead wool. 

3.05 EARTHING 

A. Provide a 1.5M earth rod external to each manhole and handhole. 

B. Provide a earth cable in each manhole and handhole affixed to the wall above the 

duct bank box-outs. Connect to earth rod using 35mm²; bare copper conductor. 

C. Bond earth conductors associated with each power conductor at each manhole. 

D. Test earth system in accordance with Section 16350 

3.06 CABLE SIGNS 

A. Warning signs shall mark all direct buried splices and shall be placed at intervals 

not exceeding 30 metres along the cable route. 

B. The direct buried cable shall be installed with market tape laid 300mm directly 

above cable throughout the entire cable route. 

3.07 CABLE INSTALLATION 




SEC.10 - 7

A. Install power cables in duct banks in accordance with Section 16150 





SEC.10 - 8

SECTION 11 

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 


1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect 

work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this 

section. 

B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the 

Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work 

under the Contract. 


A. This Specification is for extent of power distribution boards including all types 

of main or sub-main distribution boards and load centers referred to the 

drawings, schedules and elsewhere within this Specification. These will also be 

applicable to main switchboards where shown/designated on the drawings. 


A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND 

CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees and 

warranties for work under this Contract. 

B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this 

section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all 

other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by 

other provisions of the Contract Documents. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of distribution boards 

and enclosure, of types and sizes and rating required, whose products have been 

in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project. 

C. Special Use-Markings: Provide distribution boards constructed for special use, 

with British Standards marks indicating that special type usage. 

D. Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to distribution board and 

accessories, and enclosures. 




SEC.11 - 1

E. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of power 

distribution board, cabinets, and cutout boxes. 

F. BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical 

Equipment. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including schematic drawings, layout 

of enclosure and distribution of protective devices, technical specification, 

installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of 

distribution board required. Include data and sizes substantiating that units 

comply with requirements. 


A. Handle distribution boards carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the 

finish. Store distribution boards inside and protect from weather. When 

necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above ground and enclose durable, 

waterproof wrapping. 

PART 2 PRODUCT 

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 

A. Cubicle pattern main or sub-main power distribution boards shall be supplied by 

the approved manufacturer and shall comply with Part 1 (IEC 439). 

B. The power distribution board enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated 

from sheet steel having a minimum thickness of 1.7 mm. The steel shall be 

electro zinc plated, (Zintec) and shall have a minimum of priming coat, 

undercoat and finishing coat of paint. The undercoat and finished coat shall be 

stove enamelled. 

C. The power distribution board shall house the main circuit breaker, feeder circuit 

breakers, instrumentation service entrance of incoming cables or bus-duct and 

manual transfer switch. 

D. The power distribution board shall be dead front type, completely enclosed, self 

supporting structure approximately 2.25 meter high, independent of wall 

supports. 

E. The power distribution board construction shall be of the universal frame type 

using die-formed members bolted and braced. The sides, top and rear shall be 

covered with removable screw-on plates having formed edges all around. 

F. The power distribution board shall consist of the required number of vertical 

sections bolted together to form one rigid distribution board incorporating 

switching and protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in 




SEC.11 - 2

or shown on the drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation 

and control wiring. 

G. The power distribution board shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard 

drawn high conductivity copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size 

required. In all cases the bus-bars shall be rated at not more than 1 ampere per 

square mm or a minimum 50% of the full rated estimate total of MCCBs 

connected to them. All bus-bar shall be supported on porcelain insulators, or on 

laminated bakelite carriers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short 

circuit conditions when directly connected to a power source having the 

indicated available short circuit current. 

H. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the distribution 

board shall be furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the 

distribution board shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable 

numbering strips. 

I. An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical 

section structure and shall extend the entire length of the distribution board. 

J. The distribution board shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall 

be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly 

to the floor without the used of floor sills. 

K. The distribution board shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the 

board to allow easy terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect 

cable trays etc. 

L. The Construction shall allow easy access to all terminations, main device 

connections, current transformers, other devices and all main bus bolted 

connections for installation and maintenance of cables and the power 

distribution boards without requiring access from rear. 

2.02 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER 

A. The main circuit breaker shall be a fixed mounted front removable or 

withdrawable air type as indicated on the drawings and specified in section 

12.00 Protective Devices. 

2.03 FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

A. The feeder protective devices shall be moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as 

shown on the drawings and described in Section 16130 Protective Devices and 

as shown on drawings. 

B. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and 

protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with 

each other. Large, permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each 

breaker in a uniform position and equip each breaker with a circuit card holder 




SEC.11 - 3

and neatly printed card identifying the circuit. Tripped indication shall be 

clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. 

Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors 

will be required to add breakers. 

C. The feeder or branch devices shall be removable from the front and shall be 

individually mounted with the necessary device line and load connections front 

accessible. 

2.04 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION 

A. All power distribution boards shall be provided with the following digital 

instruments: 

1. Three current transformers 

2. One volt meter 0 - 250 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector 

switch. 

3. Three ammeters, 1% accuracy 

4. One power factor meter 

5. One kWh meter (only for main distribution boards). 

The current transformers and the ammeter shall be rated for the distribution 

board capacity. 



A. Install power distribution boards, including electrical connections, in accordance 

with the Manufacturer's written instruction, applicable with recognized industry 

practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. 

B. Co-ordinate installation of power distribution boards with cable and raceway 

installation work. 

C. Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public 

health services. 

D. Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are 

permanently mechanically secured. 

E. Check ratings of all circuit protection devices. 

F. Provide electrical connection within enclosures. 

G. Fill out power distribution boards directory card upon completion of installation 

work. 





SEC.11 - 4

A. Prior to energisation of circuitry, check all accessible connections to 

manufacturer's torque specifications. 

B. Prior to energisation of power distribution boards, check phase-to-phase and 

phase-to-neutral/ earth insulation resistance levels to ensure the minimum 

requirements are fulfilled. 

C. Prior to energisation, check power distribution boards for electrical continuity of 

circuits, and for short circuits. 

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise power distribution boards and 

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. 





SEC.11 - 5

SECTION 12 

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 







C. All MCCB and MCB's shall be of the same manufacturer. 


A. Extent of protective device work is indicated on drawings and schedules. 

B. Types of protective devices in this section include the following:- 

1. Air circuit breakers 

2. Moulded case circuit breakers 

3. Miniature circuit breakers 

4. Residual current circuit breaker 

5. Cartridge fuses 




Contractor. 

B. Manufactures shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. 





A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of protective devices of types, 

sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service 






SEC.12 - 1


C. IEE Compliance: Comply IEE requirements as applicable to construction and installation 

of protective devices. 

D. BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of the BS Standards publications 

for moulded case miniature and power type circuit breakers. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on protective devices, including catalogue cuts, 

time current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. 

B. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, 

amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one unit of each. 


2.01 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 

A. The air circuit breakers shall comply with BS 4752 (IEC 157.1) for ratings 1600 A and 

above. 

B. The air circuit breaker shall be front removable or withdrawable type with current monitor 

and solid state sensor for phase and earth sensing protection. The static sensor shall have 

adjustable settings for each of the following tripping characteristics:- 

1. Long - delay pick up point 

2. Long - delay tripping time 

3. Short - delay pick up point (Instantaneous protection) 

4. Earth point pick up 

5. Earth tripping time 

C. Extra facilities may be required such as shunt trips, undervoltage release, auxiliary 

switches, self and remote indications monitor, motorized for remote control, load 

monitoring, measurement of phase currents, maximum current and fault currents. 

2.02 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

A. Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB's) shall comply with BS 3871: Part 2 for ratings up 

to 100A and BS 4752 (IEC 157.1) for ratings above 100A. They shall be of the quickmake, 

quick-break, trip-free, thermal magnetic adjustable releases or with solid state trip 

units complete with De-ion arc grids, alloys contacts and inter-pole contacts. All units 

shall incorporate a visual indication of open or closed contacts. 

B. Extra facilities may be required, such as shunt trips, under-voltage release, auxiliary 

switches, remote indications or tripping, residual current protection or special calibrations. 

Such extra facilities shall be specified elsewhere in this specification or on the drawings. 




SEC.12 - 2

C. The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare MCCB of every current rating and type used on 

the Project. These spare MCCB's shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and signed 

for upon practical completion of the works. 

2.03 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) 

A. Miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be plastic moulded units incorporating thermal 

magnetic protection against overloads and short circuits, and shall comply with BS 3871 

Part 1. The tripping mechanism shall be designed to provide delays operation on overload 

and instantaneous operation under fault condition. Breakers shall have positive ON/OFF 

indication, be "trip free" and shall trip to the full off position under overload and/or short 

circuits. Triple pole units shall be used for three phase circuits. All multiple breakers shall 

have an integral common trip bar as standard. 

B. The circuit breakers shall be grouped and mounted on removable cradles. Each group 

shall be connected to a common bus bar of the appropriate phase. 

C. Where the fault level of the system is such that the use of MCBs is not acceptable, then 

moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) as specified elsewhere shall be utilised. 

D. 5 Nos. BMCs of each type and rating. 

E. The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare RCCB of every current rating, sensitivity and type 

used on the project. These spare RCCB shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and 

signed for, upon practical completion of the works. 

2.04 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKER 

A. Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) shall comply with BS 4293 and BS 3871 - Part 1 

and shall generally comprise a solid state sensing device, trip coil/mechanism, contact 

system/switching mechanism. 

B. The sensitivity of the breaker shall be 300, 30, 10 or 5 mA maximum tripping time of 30 

ms. 

C. Each breaker shall incorporate a test circuit with a test button to simulate fault conditions. 

D. The combined units shall be compatible with other MCBs installed within distribution 

boards. 

E. The Contractor shall supply 1 no. spare RCCB of every current rating, sensitivity and type 

used on the project. These spare RCCB shall be handed over to the Employer/Client, and 

signed for, upon practical completion of the works. 

2.05 CARTRIDGE FUSE 

A. Cartridge fuse links shall be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type and shall comply 

with BS 88 Part 2 (IEC 269 - 2). 




SEC.12 - 3

B. Each HRC fuse link shall be ASTA certified for its claimed breaking capacity and shall be 

so mounted that the current rating on each fuse link is clearly visible. 

C. The Contractor shall supply 5 No. spare HRC cartridge fuse links of every current rating 

and type used on the project. These spare fuses shall be handed over to the 

Employer/Client, and signed for, upon practical completion of the works. 



A. Install protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions and with recognised industry practices to ensure compliance with IEE and BS 

Standards for installation of protective devices. 

B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work as necessary to interface 

installation of protective devices with other work. 

C. Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being 

exerted by clamps, supports or cable. 

D. Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to installation 

of devices. 

E. Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers. 

F. Inspect circuit-breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, 

adjust units for free mechanical movement. 


A. Prior to energisation of over current protective devices, test devices for continuity of 

circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate 

compliance with requirements. 





SEC.12 - 4

SECTION 13 

EARTHING SYSTEM 





B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. 



A. The extent of the earthing system is indicated on the Drawings and by the requirements of 

this section. 

B. The earthing system shall take the form of TN-S. 


A. Attention is directed to provisions of the GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS and 


Contract. 


However guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which 

manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract 

documents. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing equipments, 

whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 15 years. 

B. Standards: All equipment furnished under these specifications shall conform to IEE and 

BS. 


A. Manufacturers data, illustrated leaflets of products, dimensions, fixing details, description 

of products. 

B. Submit Master Equipment List in compliance with General Terms and Conditions and 

Special Conditions. 




SEC.13 - 1


A. All products shall be carefully packed to avoid damage during transit. 


2.01 MATERIALS 

A. All earthing materials required shall be furnished new and undamaged in accordance with 

the following requirements. 

B. Earth rods shall be of a diameter as shown on drawings and to BS standard. 

C. Earth rods of copper alloy or the 'copper weld' (copper clad rods constructed with a thick 

copper exterior sleeve inseparably and permanently molten-welded to a central high 

tensile steel core for rigidity) type shall be used to provide a reliable earthing system with 

good corrosion resistance and high electrical conductivity with soft drawn bare stranded 

copper wire earth cable used to form the earth grids or mats. PVC insulated copper 

conductors shall be used for final connections from earth grids/mats to structures, 

equipment etc. All copper to copper underground connections, splices, taps etc. should be 

made by the exothermic weld process and the joint epoxy resin encapsulated before 

burial. 

D. Cable shall be as follows: 

1. Bare: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding. 

2. Insulated: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranding with green/yellow coloured 

polyvinyl chloride insulation. 

E. Connections shall be made by exothermic welding process or equivalent. The earth 

conductor in the conduit run shall be continued through the conduit run and bushing earth 

connection and terminated on the panel board earthing. 

F. An earth electrode shall have an interconnected resistance to earth of not more than 5 

ohms. Where this value is exceeded it shall be augmented by additional electrodes 

connected in parallel spaced at approximately 4 metres apart until this value is reached. 

G. 1. Generator and generator equipment and emergency power distribution boards 

shall be connected to mian earthing system. 

2. The Neutral of the Low Voltage winding of the transformer shall be connected to 

earth bar in sub-station. 

3. Earthing bar of the main power distribution boards and L.V. cable armour shall be 

connected to the main earth bar. 

4. The Low Voltage neutral shall be earthed at the source substation. 




SEC.13 - 2

H. 1. The steel conduit systems, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic lighting 

fixtures, cable trays, all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical systems, and 

any other equipment or system components required by the latest BS code and 

IEE regulations shall be earthed and the connection shall be made at the panel 

boards bus and shall be extended to earth electrodes as hereinafter specified. 

2. The conduit system shall not be considered as continuous for earthing purposes. A 

separate earth conductor shall be installed in the same conduit with the phase and 

neutral conductors. The separate earth conductors shall be sized according to the 

BS Code and IEE requirements. No earthing conductors shall be smaller than 2.5 

mm 2 unless this is part of a multicore cable. Where flexible connections are made 

to equipment, earthing jumpers shall be provided. All connections of heavy gauge 

steel conduit system shall be checked for good electrical continuity. 

I. 1. All electrical equipment shall be connected to the earth grid with copper earth 

conductor. The term "electrical equipment" shall include all metal enclosures 

containing electrical connections or bare conductors excepts that individual 

devices such as solenoids, pressure switches, and limit switches shall be exempt 

from this requirement unless the device requires earthing for proper operation. 

Large equipment such as power distribution board or motor control centers shall 

be furnished with an earthing bus which the Contractor shall connect to the earth 

grid. All earth connection surfaces shall be cleaned immediately prior to 

connection. The Contractor shall provide all earthing material required but not 

furnished with the equipment. 

2. Where earth grid extension conductors are indicated on the Drawings to be 

provided for connection to electrical equipment, the Contractor shall connect the 

bare earthing conductor to the equipment, earth bus, pad or lug. In addition to the 

earth grid extension conductors, an earth cable to each end of the earth bus in each 

assembly of power distribution board or panel boards. Where an earth conductor 

is included with the phase conductors of power circuits, the earth conductor shall 

be connected to the equipment earthing facilities and to the source earth bus. 

Where an earth conductor is not included with the phase conductors, the 

equipment shall be earthed by connecting a separate earth cable to the equipment 

earthing facilities and to the tray earthing cable or source earth bus. Except where 

otherwise indicated on the Drawings, integral parts of a cable assembly shall be 

sized in accordance with the requirements of the IEE. All earth conductors 

installed in conduit shall be insulated. 

J. Earthing bars shall be high conductivity, soft copper, cross section not less than 3 mm 

thick by 25 mm wide. 

K. Exothermic welds shall comprise moulds, cartridges, materials, and accessories as 

recommended by the manufacturer of the moulds for the items to be welded. 

L. Clamps, connectors, bolts, washers, nuts and other hardware used with the earthing 

system shall be of copper. 





SEC.13 - 3


A. The Contractor shall examine the area and conditions under which the earthing systems is 

to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the timely and 

proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until the conditions are 

satisfactory in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 


A. Earth Rods: Where the ground conditions make it possible, earth rods shall be the 

preferred earth. All earth rods shall be located in suitable locations and installed to the 

depth requires to achieve stated resistance. Where the required earth rod length exceeds 

2.5 metres, standard sections shall be welded together to provide an extended rod with 

open true center line and a minimum of joint resistance. During welding, the earth rod 

sections that have been welded shall be supported by a guide. 

B. CONDUCTORS: 

1. Exposed conductors shall be installed inconspicuously in vertical or horizontal 

positions on supporting structures in close coordination with architectural layouts. 

In all aesthetically important locations, the earthing conductor shall be covered, if 

required with prior approval of the Engineer and as permissible by the standards. 

When located on irregular supporting surfaces or equipment, the conductors shall 

run parallel to or normal to the dominant surface. 

2. Conductors routed over concrete, steel or equipment surfaces shall be kept in 

close contact with those surfaces by using fasteners located at intervals not 

exceeding 1 meter. 

3. Standard sizes of stranded copper conductor used for earth continuity shall be 

according to IEE wiring regulations. 

4. Suitable earthing facilities, acceptable to the Engineer, shall be furnished on 

electrical equipment consist of compression type terminal connectors bolted to the 

equipment frame or enclosure and providing a minimum of joint resistance. 

C. All earth rods shall have inspection pits as shown on drawings. The pit shall be 

constructed from precast concrete. All connections to the earth rod shall exposed when 

the cover is raised. Attach a "DANGER - ELECTRICITY" sign to the wall of the 

inspection pit. Use English and Arabic white letters on red background. Inspection pit 

cover shall be constructed from cast iron. 

D. Earthing conductors shall be installed in 50 mm PVC duct at entry points into building. 

Duct route shall be from 1 m outside the building to concrete cable trench within building. 

Conductors shall be clipped to side or base of trench. 

E. All connections between rods and earthing tape or cables shall be made by the exothermic 

process which produces a fused joint. Bolted connections may be used for connection to 




SEC.13 - 4

emovable items of equipment only. 

Joints in copper tape shall be made by either welding or brazing. 

Earth rods shall be driven with a cap driving stud. Earth conductors shall be buried to a 

minimum depth of 800mm below finished grade. 

Exposed earthing tape and conductors shall be securely fastened to the mounting surface 

using copper or brass straps. 

3.03 EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE 

A. The completed earthing system shall have sufficiently low impedance to limit the voltage 

to earth and to facilitate the operation of the current protective devices in the circuit in 

accordance with BS/IEE Wiring Regulation. 

3.04 EARTH RESISTANCE 

A. Prior to connection of earth rods to the earthing system, the Contractor shall measure 

earth resistance of individual earth rods, witnessed by the Engineer. 

B. After connection of earth rods to the earthing system, the Contractor shall measure earth 

resistance from the earthing test point witnessed by the Engineer. 

C. The earth resistance measurement from the earthing system electrodes shall be done in the 

hot season (end of August) or as acceptable to the Engineer. The earth resistance shall be 

less than 1 Ohm. 

3.05 COMMUNICATION & DATA EARTHING 

A. Low current system shall have an independent earthing system, adequate to ensure 

satisfactory functioning of each system in accordance with the standards and equipment 

manufacturers. 

B. The main earthing for low current systems shall be connected to a suitable size earth bar 

to which all the low current systems shall be connected. 

C. 1. PABXs shall have an independent earthing system also meeting STC 

requirements. Earthing cable inside building shall be 50 sq mm wire with 

moisture and heat resistance PVC insulation to earth bus in telephone equipment 

room. 

2. Provide one 35 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant PVC insulation to 

telephone service conduit. 

3. Provide one 4 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant PVC insulation to 

conduits termination at backboard/telephone terminal cabinets. 

B. Fire Alarm and Detection: Provide one 10 sq.mm wire with moisture and heat resistant 




SEC.13 - 5

PVC insulation in 1/2 in conduit to nearest earth bus. 

C. Public Address, Sound and Call Systems: Provide one 10 sq.mm with moisture and heat 

resistant PVC insulation in 20 mm conduit to nearest earth lug in equipment rack. 

3.06 SUB-STATION EARTHING 

A. All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of all the installations shall be effectively 

earthed in accordance with the "Regulations". The earthing of the distribution system shall 

be made at the neutral point of the transformers at the sub-stations. The earthing of 

substation shall be in accordance with electrical authority requirements. 

3.07 SUPPLEMENTARY AND EQUI-POTENTIAL BONDING 

A. In accordance with chapter 547 of the IEE Regulations bonding conductors shall be 

installed in appropriate locations to ensure all simultaneously accessible exposed or 

extraneous conductive parts are at equal potential. The Contractor shall undertake such 

tests and install such supplementary bonding conductors that are necessary to ensure 

compliance with these requirements. 

B. Supplementary bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of chapter 547-03 

of the IEE Regulations and shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.5 sq.mm 

where mechanically protected and 4 sq.mm where not so protected. 

C. Main equi-potential bonding conductors shall conform to the requirements of Section 

547-2 of the IEE Regulations and shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 sq.mm. 

3.08 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

A. For lightning protection system earthing requirements see section 22.00. 


A. Earth resistance tests shall be carried out after installation of the individual earthing 

systems in accordance with the specification. The earth resistance tests shall be carried out 

in accordance with chapter 713 of the IEE Regulations 16th Edition and readings obtained 

officially recorded by all witnessing parties. 





SEC.13 - 6

SECTION 14 

PANEL BOARDS 








A. This Specification is for extent of all types of lighting and power panel boards including 

cabinets cut out boxes, as indicated by drawings, schedules and elsewhere within the 

Specifications. 




Contract. 

B. Manufacturers shall provide their guarantees for work under this section. However, such 

guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which 

manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract 

Documents. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards and enclosure, of 

types and sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in 



with electrical installation work similar to that requirement for the project. 

C. Special Use-Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with British 

Standards marks indicating that special type usage. 

D. Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to panelboard and accessories, and 

enclosures. 

E. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, 

and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to installation of wiring and 



PANEL BOARDS 

SEC.14 - 1

equipment in hazardous locations. 

F. BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including and schematic drawings layout 

enclosure and all accessories inside panelboards specifications, installation instruction and 

general recommendations for each type of panelboard required. Include data 

substantiating that units comply with requirements. 

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLE OF MATERIALS 

A. Handle panelboards and enclosure carefully to prevent breakage, denting or scoring the 

finish. Store panelboards and enclosure inside and protect from weather. When necessary 

to store outdoors, elevate well above ground enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 


2.01 PANELBOARD CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide galvanised sheet cabinet type enclosures, in sizes and types as required. Construct 

with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim 

clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with 

concealed door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit-directory 

frame and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked grey enamel finish over a rust 

inhibitor. Design enclosure for recessed or surface mounting as required by drawings. 

Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which mate 

properly with panelboards to be enclosed. 

B. Bus bar connections for single-phase, three-wire panelboards bussing shall be such that 

any two adjacent single pole breakers are connected to opposite polarities in such a 

manner that two-pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire 

bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually 

connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole 

breakers can be installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly 

shall be high drawn conductivity copper. 

C. Provide an insulated neutral bus for each panel for connection of both feeder and branch 

circuit neutral wires. The neutral bus shall be of the proper size to accommodate the 

number of circuits to be connected thereto. 

D. The components for the panelboards shall conform to the relevant details described in 

other sections of these specifications. 





PANEL BOARDS 

SEC.14 - 2

A. Install panelboards and enclosures, including electrical connections, in accordance with 

the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the IEE Wiring 

Regulations 16th Edition and in accordance with recognised industry practices to ensure 

that products serve the intended function. 

B. Co-ordinate installation of panelboards and enclosure with cable and raceway installation 

work. 

C. Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health 

services. 

D. Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are 

permanently mechanically secured. 


F. Provide electrical connections within enclosures. 

G. Fill out panelboard's directory card upon completion installation works. 


A. Prior to energisation of circuiting, check all accessible connections to manufacturers 

torque Specifications. 

B. Prior to energisation of panelboard, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral/earth 

insulation resistance levels to ensure the minimum requirements are fulfilled. 

C. Prior to energisation, check panelboard for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short 

circuits. 

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise panelboards and demonstrate 

functioning in accordance with requirements. 




PANEL BOARDS 

SEC.14 - 3

SECTION 15 

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 


1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS 






A. This Specification is for extent of motor control center including all types referred to the 

drawings, schedules and elsewhere within this Specification. For controls and 

instrumentation of HVAC equipment refer to Division 15 of this specification. 




Contract. 






A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor control centers, of types 

and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 



with electrical, and mechanical installation work similar to that required for the project. 

C. Special Use-Markings: Provide motor control center constructed for special use, with 

British Standards marks indicating that special type usage. 

D. Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to motor control center and 

starters, and enclosures. 

E. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of motor control center, 



MOTOR CONTROL CENTER 

SEC.15 - 1

cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to installation of wiring 

and equipment in hazardous locations. 

F. BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including schematic drawings, layout of 

enclosure and distribution of protective devices, and starters specification, installation 

instructions and general recommendations for each type of motor control center required. 

Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements. 


A. Handle motor control center carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the finish. 

Store motor control center inside and protect from weather. When necessary to store 

outdoors, elevate will above ground and enclose durable, waterproof wrapping. 


2.01 CUBICLE CONSTRUCTION 

A. Cubicle pattern motor control centers (MCC) shall be supplied by the approval of 

manufacturer and shall comply with BS 5486: Part 1 (IEC 439). 

B. The MCC enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated from sheet steel having a 

minimum thickness of 1.7 mm. The steel shall be electro zinc plated, (Zintec) and shall 

have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and finishing coat of paint. The undercoat 

and finished coat shall be stove enamelled. 

C. The MCC shall house the main circuit breaker or switch, instrumentation and control 

equipments, motor starter and protective devices. 

D. The MCC shall be multi cubicle type assembly self supporting structure approximately 

2.25 meter high, independent of wall supports. 

E. The MCC construction shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed members 

bolted and braced. The sides, top and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on 

plates having formed edges all around. 

F. The MCC shall consist of the required number of vertical and horizontal sections bolted 

together to form one rigid MCC incorporating switching, motor starters, control elements, 

and protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in or shown on the 

drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation and control wiring. 

G. The MCC shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard drawn high conductivity 

copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size required. In all cases the bus-bars shall be 




SEC.15 - 2

noted at not more than 1 ampere per square mm of a minimum 50% of the full rated 

estimate total of MCCBs connected to them. All bus-bar shall be supported on porcelain 

insulators, or on laminated bakelite carriers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during 

short circuit conditions when directly connected to a power source having the indicated 

available short circuit current. 

H. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the MCC shall be 

furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the motor control center 

shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. 

I. An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical section 

structure and shall extend the entire length of the motor control center. 

J. The MCC shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being 

rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the used 

of floor sills. 

K. The MCC shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the board to allow easy 

terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect cable trays etc. 

2.02 MAIN INCOMING 

A. The main incoming shall be a fixed mounted front removable or withdrawable type of air 

moulded case type circuit breaker as indicated on the drawings. 

2.03 MOTOR STARTERS AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES 

A. The motor starter shall be a fixed mounted on supporting structure. The units shall be as 

described in section 16482 and as shown on drawings. 

B. The protective devices shall be of moulded case circuit breaker with short circuit 

protective or cartridge fuse as described in section 16426 with special peculiarities to take 

the in rush current and frequency starting. 

2.04 RELAY AND CONTROL COMPARTMENT 

A. The relay and control compartment shall be of one or more module of the motor control 

center. It should equip all the automatic or servo devices include electromagnetic, logic 

and static relays, and programmable controllers as described elsewhere in this 


2.05 METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION 

A. All MCCs shall be provided with the following instruments for monitoring of main 

incoming supply: 

1. Three current transformers 




SEC.15 - 3

2. One volt meter 0 - 250 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector switch. 

3. Three ammeters, 1% accuracy 

4. One power factor meter 

The current transformers and the ammeter shall be rated for the MCC capacity. 

B. All outgoing feeders of the MCCs shall be provided with indication lamps, push buttons, 

selector switches, hour counter meters, ammeters, relays, starters and other meters and 

instruments as described is section 15171 and elsewhere in this specifications. 



A. Install MCC, including electrical connections, in accordance with the Manufacturer's 

written instruction, applicable with recognized industry practices to ensure that products 

serve the intended function. 

B. Co-ordinate installation of MCC with cable, raceway installation work and mechanical 

works. 

C. Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health 

services. 

D. Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently 

mechanically secured. 


F. Provide electrical connection within enclosures. 

G. Fill out MCC directory card upon completion of installation work. 


A. Prior to energisation of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's 

torque specifications. 

B. Prior to energisation of MCC, check phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral/earth insulation 

resistance levels to ensure the minimum requirements are fulfilled. 

C. Prior to energisation, check MCC for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short 

circuits. 

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energise MCC and demonstrate functioning and 

complete operations in accordance with requirements up to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 





SEC.15 - 4

SECTION 16 

MOTOR STARTERS 



A. Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements which affect work of 

this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section. 




A. This specification is for extent of motor starter work as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Types of motor starters in this section include the following: 

1. Direct-on-line (below 7.5 HP) 

2. Wye-Delta (7.5 HP and over) 

3. Auto Transformer (if specified by manufacturer) 




Contract. 



which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the Contract 

Documents. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture motor starters, of types, ratings 

and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 




C. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to construction and installation of motor 

starters. 




SEC.16 - 1


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately 

scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated motors, and connections to 

electrical power panels and feeds. 

C. Maintenance Stock, Fuses and Circuit Breakers: For types and ratings required, furnish 

additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5 

units of each. 


2.01 STARTERS 

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components 

which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in 

accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. 

B. AC Fractional HP Manual Starters: Provide manual single-phase fractional HP motor 

starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equipped with thermal 

overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10% variation of nominal 

overload rating, for protection of 220V motors of less than 1/2 HP. Provide starters with 

quick-make quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, selector switches 

for local lo remote control, start-stop push buttons, a manual reset push button; and with 

toggle operated handle with handle lock-off. 

C. Direct-on-Line Starters: Direct-on-line starters to be used on motors below (7.5) 

horsepower. All in accordance with BS requirements and having voltage ratings as 

required and/or indicated on drawings/schedules. 

D. Star-Delta Starters: Provide Star-delta starters, of types, sizes, ratings, electrical 

characteristics and BS sizes indicated. Construct starters with resistor-type closed-circuit 

transition wiring, including three 3-pole contactors, adjustable electronic timer, and 3-pole 

overload protection relay. Equip with START-STOP push button for control. Voltage 

220V phase to phase as indicated on drawings. 


3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS 

A. Install motor starters as indicated in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, 

applicable requirements for IEE standards, and BS "Standard of Installation", and in 

accordance with recognised industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 

B. Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to 

interface installation of motor starters with other work. 




SEC.16 - 2

C. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. 

D. Adjust the overload thermal relays and other adjustable components in MCC or motor 

starter to match installed motor characteristics and other equipment. 

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and where necessary, adjust units for 

free mechanical movement. 

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surface to match original finish. 


A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energise motor starters and demonstrate functioning 

and complete operations of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary 

correct malfunctioning units. 





SEC.16 - 3

SECTION 17 

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 








A. This specification is for extent of enclosed contactors as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Types of enclosed contactors in this section include the following: 

1. General purpose contactors. 

2. Lighting contactors. 


A. Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and 







A. Manufacturers” Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor starter, of types, ratings 





C. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and 

installation of enclosed contactors. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on enclosed contactors. 




SEC17 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of enclosed contactors showing 

accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated panels and 

feeds. 

C. Maintenance Stock, Enclosed Contactors: For types and ratings required, furnish 

additional conactors, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5 

units of each. 


2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS 

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. 

B. Coil Voltage: As indicated. 

C. Poles: As indicated. 

2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS 

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. 

B. Configuration: Mechanically & Electrically held. 

C. Coil Voltage: As indicated. 

D. Poles: As indicated. 

E. Contact Rating: As indicated. 

2.03 ACCESSORIES 

A. Pushbuttons and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, general duty type. 

B. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2, push-to-test type. 

C. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300. 



A. Install enclosed contactors as indicated in compliance with manufacturer’s written 

instructions, applicable requirements for IEE standards, and BS “Standard of Installation” 

and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 

B. Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary to 




SEC17 - 2

interface installation of enclosed contactors with other work. 


A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energise enclosed contactors and demonstrate 

functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct 

malfunctioning units. 





SEC17 - 3

SECTION 18 

ENCLOSED TRANSFER SWITCH 








A. This specification is for extent of enclosed transfer switches as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Types of enclosed transfer switches in this section include the following: 

1. Automatic transfer switch 









A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture motor starters, of types, ratings 





C. IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and 

installation of motor starters. 


A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of 

switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings, 

dimensions, and enclosure details. 




SEC.18 - 1

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of 

use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 

Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, 

installation, and starting of Product. 

1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Operation Data: Include instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for 

operating equipment under emergency conditions (when engine generator is running). 

B. Maintenance Data: Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. 

List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts. 


A. The enclosed transfer switches shall comply with the application standards of UL, CSA, 

ANSI, NFPA, IEEE, NEMA and IEC 947-6-1. 

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy 

canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and 

traffic. 

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs 

provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, 

enclosure and finish. 

1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switch for one year from Date of Substantial 

Completion. 

1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 

A. Provide two of each special tool required for maintenance. 


2.01 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 

A. Description: NEMA / 3R, automatic transfer switch (suitable for use as service 

equipment). 




SEC.18 - 2

B. Configuration: Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch. 

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS 

A. Service Conditions: NEMA 3R. 

B. Temperature: 50°C 

C. Altitude: 600m 

2.03 RATINGS 

A. Voltage: 220 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hz. 

B. Switched Poles: 4 

C. Load Inrush Rating: Resistive load. 

D. Continuous Rating: As required. 

E. Interrupting Capacity: 150 percent of continuous rating. 

F. Withstand Current Rating: As required. 

2.04 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES 

A. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE 

AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH POSITION. 

B. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source. 

C. Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from 

alternate to normal source. 

D. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: normally open, normally closed. 

E. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and frequency; 

initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 

percent from rated nominal value. 

F. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternative source voltage and frequency; inhibit 

transfer when voltage is below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 percent from 

rated nominal value. 

G. In-Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within 15 electrical degrees. 

H. Switched Neutral: Overlapping contacts. 

2.05 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 




SEC.18 - 3

A. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by 

normal source monitor. 

B. Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engineer Generator: 0 to 6 seconds, adjustable. 

C. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor and 

permission by alternate source monitor. 

D. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: 0 to 6 seconds, adjustable. 

E. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source monitor. 

F. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source 

monitor. 

G. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded 

operation. 

H. Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 7 days; run for 30 minutes before shutting down. 

Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period. 

I. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercising 

period. 

2.06 ENCLOSURE 

A. Enclosure: NEMA 3R. 

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey enamel. 


3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Verify that surface is suitable for transfer switch installation. 


B. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 9.00. 

3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

A. Prepare and start systems. 

3.04 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Provide systems demonstration. 




SEC.18 - 4

B. Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in bypass, normal and emergency modes. 





SEC.18 - 5

SECTION 19 

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 








A. This specification is for extent of interior and exterior lighting fixture work as indicated 

by drawings and schedules. 

B. Types of interior and exterior lighting fixtures in this section include the following: 

1. Incandescent & Spotlights 

2. Fluorescent & Compact Fluorescent luminaires 

3. Discharge Lamp Luminaires 




Contract. 






A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of types and 

ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not 

less than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation and experience on 

projects with interior lighting fixtures similar to that required for this project. 

C. IEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements as applicable to construction of 

interior building for this project. 




SEC.19 -1

D. BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of BS standard publication 

pertaining to lighting equipment. 

E. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballast which comply with Certified Ballast 

Manufacturers Association Standards and carry the CBM Label. 


A. Product Data 

1. Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior lighting fixtures. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting fixture installations, including but not 

necessary limited to, layout, relation to associated panelboards, and connections to 

panelboards. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for 

each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed 

fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. 


A. Luminaries, lamps, and accessories shall be delivered to the job site wrapped in protective 

covering and stored in a dry location free from dust or water, and in such a manner to 

permit easy access for inspection and handling. Luminaries, lamps, and accessories shall 

be handled carefully to prevent damage. Damaged items shall be replaced at no additional 

cost. 


2.01 INCANDESCENT AND SPOTLIGHTS 

A. All lighting fittings shall be furnished complete with internal wiring, lamps and lamp 

holders, leads, trim, rings, frames, hangers and reflectors. 

B. Lighting fittings shall be of sizes, types and ratings as indicated on drawings and 

schedules. 

C. All wiring within the lighting fittings shall be suitable for the voltage, current and 

temperature to which insulation will be subjected. 

2.02 FLUORESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES 

A. All luminaire control gear components and wiring shall be enclosed in a steel canopy, 

protected from corrosion. 

B. Recessed, surface and suspended mounted luminaries shall be designed for use with 

control gear having maximum case temperatures, installed in ambient temperatures and 




SEC.19 -2

conditions stated in BS standard. 

C. All luminaries shall be labelled where visible with the voltage, frequency, current rating to 

include control gear and lamp(s), manufacturer's name and fixture type. 

D. All ballasts shall be of the electronic, quickstart dry type for the offices and switch start 

ballasts (Deos starter) for other areas. 

E. Where reflector and white louvre assembly is specified, the reflector shall be constructed 

from highly polished aluminum. 

F. All wiring within the luminaires shall be suitable for the voltage, current and temperature 

to which insulation will be subjected. 

G. All luminaires shall be fitted with dry type high power factor capacitors correcting to 0.9 

lagging and low noise features; type 1 class P; sound rated A, and with internal thermal 

protection. 

H. The metal canopy shall be finished with a white high gloss stove enamelled paint. 

I. All luminaires shall be fitted with radio interference suppression. 

2.03 DISCHARGE LAMP LUMINAIRE 

A. Discharge lamp luminaires shall be of a type as specified on the Drawings and schedule. 

B. They shall generally be of a type suitable for use with mercury vapour, sodium vapour or 

metal halide type lamps and shall have integral control gear unless otherwise specified. 

C. Where control gear is to be separately mounted, it shall be completely enclosed in a metal 

clad type enclosure complete with conduit entry facilities and fixing accessories. 

D. Power factor correction capacitors shall be supplied of adequate rating to provide an 

overall circuit power factor not less than 0.85 lagging. 

E. Luminaire enclosures for internal use shall be fabricated from sheet steel,finished in a 

corrosion and abrasion resistant paint finish or shall be of cast alloy similarly resistant to 

corrosion or abrasion. All enclosures shall be complete with conduit or glanded cable 

entry and all necessary support and fixing accessories. 

F. High Bay type luminaires shall be complete with a visor and/or wire guard to prevent a 

displaced or fractured lamp falling to the surface below. Such visors and protective guards 

together with the luminaire enclosure shall be provided with a safety chain in addition to 

the normal suspension or fixing. 

G. Luminaires to be flush mounted in suspended ceilings shall be suitable for the ceiling 

module. 

H. All wiring within the luminaires shall be suitable for the voltage, current, temperature to 




SEC.19 -3

which insulation will be subjected. 

2.04 PROTECTION CLASSIFICATION 

A. All lighting fixtures enclosures shall be classified in accordance with BS 5490 using the 

IP systems and two digit number code. 

B. All lighting fixtures for outdoor use shall be dustproof and weatherproof as classification 

IP 54 minimum. 

C. All lighting fixtures used in wet areas shall be of classification IP44 minimum. 

D 

All lighting fixtures for use in hazardous areas shall conform to the requirements of BS 

5345 and BS 5501 and be appropriate to the classification of the hazard. 

2.05 LAMPS 

A. Every incandescent lighting point shall be complete with the number and size of lamps 

required and each lamp shall be suitable for the mains voltage. 

Unless otherwise indicted lamps shall be coiled coil, pearl finish of British Manufacture 

to BS 161, BS 555 and BS 1853 Parts 1 & 2. Up to and including 150 watts, lamps shall 

have bayonet caps, larger sizes shall be fitted with the appropriate ES cap for general 

service. 

Special purpose high output lamps shall consist of a tungsten filament housed in a 

halogen filled quartz tube giving a light output of 17-22 lumens/watt and a life expectancy 

of 2000 hours. 

B. Tubular fluorescent lamps shall conform to the requirements of BS 1853 and shall be of 

the bi-pin type. They shall be of 26mm diameter T8 - tri-phosphor krypton filled type 

according to the design of luminaire in which they are to be mounted. 

The standard colour shall be as selected by the Architect/Engineer. 

C. High pressure mercury vapour discharge lamps shall generally conform to BS 3677 and 

shall be MBF style in ratings 50W to 125W to MBFI style in ratings 250W to 1000W. 

The lamps shall be suitable for operation in cap position as denoted in the luminaire in 

which they are intended to be used. 

D. High pressure sodium vapour discharge lamps shall be of high pressure type (SON). 

Lamps shall be suitable for operation in the cap position required in the luminaire in 


E. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be of the types as indicated on drawings. 

Lamps shall be suitable for operation in the cap position as denoted in the luminaire in 




SEC.19 -4


F. Metal halide discharge lamps shall be suitable for operation in cap position as denoted in 

the luminaire in which they are intended to be used. 



A. The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be 

installed and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory conditions 

before installation commences. 

3.02 GENERAL 

A. Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture manufacturer's 

written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of Installation", 

and with recognised industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. 

B. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the various types of ceiling finishes e.g., 

exposed tee, concealed spline, plaster, etc. Perusal of the ceiling finish schedule is 

mandatory. 

C. All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Permanent lighting fixtures shall be 

installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for 

lighting purposes during construction. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting as 

herein before specified. 

D. Mounting heights of fixture are, in most cases, indicated on the drawings. Where job 

conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid 

equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as 

directed by the Engineer. 

E. Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured in 

accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings. 

F. The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall examine 

the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself with the 

structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter 

the location or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location. 

This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork 

necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on 

the bottom of such ductwork. 

G. All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will be 

subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear from 

the surface if the temperature can reach 90°C. 




SEC.19 -5

3.03 INTERNAL LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION 

A. Luminaires shall be arranged for surface, recess or pendant mounting as required by the 

general structure and decor of the building. Where a suspended ceiling is provided, recess 

mounted luminaires shall be fitted unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. 

3.04 SURFACE MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION 

A. All surface mounted luminaires shall be fixed to a surface or flush mounted metal conduit 

box. Direct surface mounted luminaires shall be spaced a distance of 12mm from the 

mounting surface by using extension rings. 

B. The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using heat 

resistant flexible sheathed cable as per BS6141. The cable shall be connected using a 

porcelain or heat resistant connector block housed in the conduit box. 

3.05 RECESS MOUNTED LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION 

A. All recess mounted luminaires shall preferably be suspended independently of the ceiling 

in which they are fitted. Where such an arrangement is not possible or practical, the 

luminaires shall be fitted in and supported by the ceiling. The Contractor shall ensure that 

the suspended ceiling is suitably strengthened to carry the additional weight. 

B. The connection between the permanent wiring and the luminaire shall be made using a 

heat resistant flexible cable inside flexible metal conduit. 

C. The flexible cable shall be three core type, one core being used as the circuit protective 

and earth bonding conductor. Where the cable forms the connection to a tungsten lamp 

luminaire it shall be heat resistant flexible sheathed cable as per BS6141. 

3.06 PENDANT MOUNTED INSTALLATION 

A. Tube pendants shall be mounted from a ball and socket type swivel dome cover plate 

fitted to a ceiling mounted metal conduit box and metal conduit of minimum diameter 

20mm. The conduit entry to the luminaire shall be fitted with a lock nut and a flexible 

copper bond shall be provided from the fixed conduit installation to the pendant tube. 

B. Proprietary type pendant luminaires, whether single or multi-lamp units shall be bonded 

and provided with suitable terminations to ensure reliable earth continuity throughout all 

exposed metalwork. 

C. Plain pendants shall consist of a multi-terminal ceiling rose conforming to BS 67, a 

flexible cord of heat resistant cable and a heat resistant lampholder. 

D. Luminaires shall not be suspended by means of flexible cables with the exception of 

certain lightweight domestic and commercial types of luminaires, which shall be agreed 

with the Engineer. 

E. Suspended luminaires shall be supported by means of purpose manufactured metal 




SEC.19 -6

supports. 

F. White break joint rings shall be provided between the fittings and conduit box to mask the 

joints as deemed necessary by the Engineer. 


A. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. 

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 


A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been 

energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with 

requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to 

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with 

retesting. 

B. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are 

observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested. 

C. All luminaires shall be functionally tested to prove that they operate satisfactorily. 

D. Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements. 

3.09 EARTHING 

A. Provide equipment earthing connections for all lighting fixtures. 

B. Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel board. Minimum 

size 2.5mm 2 . 





SEC.19 -7

SECTION 20 

EMERGENCY LIGHTING 



A. Examine all other section of the specifications for requirements which affect work of this 




C. Comply with the requirements of NFPA standards and life safety codes for the location of 

emergency and exit lights. 


A. This section applied to exit lighting units will be provided to facilitate orientation within, 

and escape from, the building upon failure of the normal lighting system. Dependent on 

their location within the building the units will be powered from standby generator set and 

by individual self-contained batteries as indicated in the drawings. 




Contract. 





1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCES 

A. Equipment shall be purchased only from manufacturers specializing in the equipment 

described herein. 


A. Manufacturer's illustrated leaflets, drawings, technical data covering the equipment 

required. 

B. Submit Equipment and spare parts lists. 

C. Operation and Maintenance: Comply with the relevant section for the provision of 

Operation and Maintenance manuals. 




SEC.20 - 1


A. Pack equipment for protection during transportation and storage. 

B. Store in dry, clean location. 

1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Self-contained Emergency Lighting Fittings shall be installed along corridors, staircases, 

etc. leading to exits from the buildings. 

B. In the event of main and essential power failures to the areas served by the emergency 

lighting, emergency lighting shall switch on automatically and independently of the on/off 

mode of the normal light switch. 

C. Selected lighting fittings designated emergency lighting fittings shall be complete with 

batteries, charging units and inverter unit as appropriate or standby generator system as 

shown on Drawings. 

D. On restoration of the normal supply, the fitting shall return to operating mode prior to the 

power interruption. 


2.01 EQUIPMENT 

A. All equipment shall be standard supplied by a single manufacturer. 

B. The battery shall be a self-contained sealed nickel cadmium pack of 12 volt 4 Ah capacity 

or for (3) hours continuous operation of the lamp without any deration, whichever is 

more. 

C. The charger/inverter module shall be capable of the following from a completely 

discharged condition: 

1. Full capacity charge in 24 hours or less 

2. 60% capacity charge in 12 hours or less 

3. 30% capacity charge in 6 hours or less 

D. LED to indicate power 'supply' on. 

E. Provide fuses in the unswitched power supply and in the battery supply. 

F. The changeover voltage from normal power supply to emergency shall be between 60% - 

85% of nominal normal voltage. 

G. A 3 position test key shall provide the following facilities: 




SEC.20 - 2

1. Normal: Operation as described earlier 

Key removable 

2. Test: Isolates unswitched normal supply, energizing fluorescent tube 

from battery supply circuit. 

Key trapped. 

3. Isolate: Isolates normal switched and unswitched power supply. The 

fluorescent will be energised from the battery/inverter. 

Key trapped. 

H. The batteries/inverter and all circuit accessories shall be enclosed in a steel box. 

2.02 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS - SELF CONTAINED 

A. Unless otherwise specified in the particular specifications, all self contained emergency 

light fittings shall be of the maintained type. Lamps shall be fluorescent and shall operate 

in the emergency mode for a period not less than 3 hours. 

B. Each unit shall contain within its enclosure the lamp, emergency batteries, constant 

voltage charging units, automatic changeover and an LED to show that the charging 

circuit and the DC system are in good order. 

C. All units shall have fire resisting diffusers, complying with the relevant standards and 

Codes of Practice mentioned elsewhere in this specification. 

D. Type of emergency lighting to be used is specified either in this specification or indicated 

on the drawings. 

E. Every unit shall be connected to a permanently live supply of the LOCAL lighting circuit. 

A switch shall be installed in the permanent live supply so that regular testing can be 

carried out. 

F. Where required for exit and emergency escape routes, lights shall be provided with sign 

plate as approved by Engineer. 



A. The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will be 

installed and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory conditions 

before installation commences. 


A. Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture manufacturer's 

written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS "Standard of Installation", 




SEC.20 - 3

and with recognised industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. 

B. All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Emergency lighting fixtures shall be 

installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not be used for 

lighting purpose during construction. 

C. Mounting heights of fixture are, in most cases, indicated on the drawings. Where job 

conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid 

equipment or structural features, etc., such changes in mounting heights shall be as 

directed by the Engineer. 

D. Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be secured in 

accordance with manufacturer's directions and approved shop drawings. 

E. The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall examine 

the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself with the 

structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc., which would alter 

the locations or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as to the proper location. 

This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper reinforcement of any ductwork 

necessary to carry the added weight of lighting fixtures where same must be mounted on 

the bottom of such ductwork. 

F. All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will be 

subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear from 

the surface of the temperature can reach 90°C. 


A. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. 

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 


A. Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting fixtures, and after building 

circuitry has been energised, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and 

compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then 

retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and 

proceed with retesting. 

B. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are 

observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractor's use and tested. 

C. All emergency lights shall be functionally tested to prove that they operate satisfactorily 

for the purpose and give required illumination level as per standards at the end of 3 hours 

continuous operation. 

D. Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements. 




SEC.20 - 4

3.05 EARTHING 

A. Provide equipment earthing connections for all emergency lights. 

B. Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel board. Minimum 

size 2.5mm 2 . 





SEC.20 - 5



SECTION 21 

EMERGENCY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM 

A. Examine all other sections of the specifications for requirements which affect work of this 





A. The work under section covers the requirements for the design, testing, fabrication and 

furnishing of complete and operated diesel electric generating system including all 

devices and equipment shown on the drawings and specified herein or as required for the 

satisfactory operation and service. 

1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 

A. Standards: 

All electrical work shall comply with all government rules and regulations and shall be 

carried out in accordance with the relevant standards and specifications issued by the 

appropriate authority, and in addition to the British & American Standards. 

B. Regulations: 

All electrical installations shall be designed in accordance with the following regulations: 

1. I.E.E. Regulations for Electrical Installations 16th Edition, as published by the 

Institution of Electrical Engineers, London. 

2. NFPA requirements. 

3. International Electro technical Commission (IEC). 

1.04 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: 

The Emergency Power Diesel Generators shall be skid mounted and located in an 

acoustically treated space to reduce noise level and annoyance to residents within the 

locations. 




SEC.21 - 1

B. Design Criteria: 

The diesel generator shall incorporate the following basic design criteria: 

Output power rating - As shown on the drawings. The generator shall 

have this standby power rating of standard module 

size for continuous duty after taking into account 

all relevant derating factors and power consumed in 

auxiliaries. 

Nominal Output Voltage - As shown on the drawings. 

Frequency - 50 Hertz 

Speed - 1500 or 1800 r.p.m. 

Automatic Voltage Regulation - ± 1.5% (from no-load to 100% load and from 0.8 

p.f. lagging to unity p.f.) 

Total Harmonic Distortion - Less than 4% at full load 

AC Waveform 

Overload Capability - 10% for 1 hour in 12 hours 

Noise Criteria - 80 dbA at 7.5 m in any direction 

Maximum Starting Time - 10 seconds 

In addition full account shall be taken of the nature of the loads particularly motor loads 

such as air conditioning, fans, pumps, etc. that are likely to be connected to the generator. 






which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the Contract 

Documents. 


A. Accept engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify damage. 

B. Protect equipment form dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic. 





SEC.21 - 2

A. Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection 

point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and 

combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including schematic and 

interconnection diagrams. 

B. Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings interconnection points, and 

internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery 

charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, fuel tank, sound attenuation, sand filter, 

radiator, and remote enunciator. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions inside container. 

D. Submit operation and maintenance data include instructions for normal operation, routine 

maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and fuel tank, oil sampling and 

analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. 

1.08 SPARE PARTS 

A. The Contractor shall furnish the spare parts normally provided with engine generator set 

for a period of two years as recommended by the manufacturer, plus the following: 

1. One set of spark plugs, ignition points and condenser as applicable. 

2. Two filters for all services (fuel, oil and air) 

3. Two spare injectors or equivalent 

4. One fuel injection pump complete 

5. Three fuses for each rating. 

B. Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels clearly 

designating the contents and the piece of equipment for which they are intended. 

C. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator set. 

Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of standby generating set and ancillary 

equipment including fuel day tanks, fuel transfer equipment, interconnecting cabling and 

pipe work necessary for the proper functioning of the installation, both mechanically and 

electrically, to meet the following requirements listed below. 

2.02 RATING 




SEC.21 - 3

A. The set shall be continuously rated taking into consideration the site conditions (altitude, 

temperature, etc.). The rating of the generator shown on the drawings is minimum and 

subject to the submission and approval of the final load calculations considering the 

approved electrical and mechanical equipment fed from the emergency supply to justify 

the rating of the generator. 20% spare capacity shall be allowed for future expansion. 

2.03 MECHANICAL DETAILS 

A. Lifting eyes are required on all items of equipment over 25kg in weight which may need 

removal. 

B. No critical speed of the complete shaft assembly shall be within 15% of rated speed. All 

moving live parts are to be adequately guarded to prevent injury to personnel. 

2.04 ALTERNATOR 

A. The alternator shall be to BS 4999 and BS 5000, Class `F' insulation, screen protected, 

drip proof, rotating field, brushless type, driven through a solid half coupling and bolted 

direct to the engine flywheel or driving motor as applicable. 

B. The AC exciter and rotating rectifier unit shall be overhung on the non-driven end of the 

alternator. 

C. The alternator shall be capable of giving a continuous output at 0.80 power factor lagging 

at the system rated voltage specified earlier. 

D. Steady state voltage shall be maintained to ± 2.5% under any condition from cold start to 

maximum working temperature, from zero load to 10% overload, and from unity p.f. to 

0.8 p.f. lagging. 

E. After a load change from 0 to 35% rated load the voltage shall not change by more than ± 

15% and shall recover to 94% of rated value within 15 seconds. 

F. Harmonics distortion shall not exceed 5%. 

G. The windings shall be connected in "star". The ends of the windings and neutral shall be 

brought out to a suitable terminal box. 

H. The machine shall be of the two bearing type, generously rated, grease lubricated and 

efficiently sealed. 

I. The automatic voltage regulator shall be provided with an adjustment for setting the level 

of the controlled voltage to within ± 5% of the normal voltage and shall be capable of 

maintaining its adjustment for long periods without attention once the set is running. 

J. The alternator shall be capable of withstanding a short circuit current of 300% F.L.C. for 

3 seconds. 




SEC.21 - 4

K. The alternator shall be capable of carrying a 50 percent overload current, with the field set 

for normal excitation, for one minute and a 10 percent over load for one hour at rated 

power factor without being subject to damage. 

L. The alternator shall have a main circuit breaker with all required accessories, furnished as 

an integral part of the unit and installed as close as possible to the main terminals of the 

alternator. 

2.05 ENGINE 

A. Engine may be naturally aspirated or turbo charged but must be capable of accepting full 

load within the required time limitation of 15 seconds. 

B. The operating speed shall not exceed 1800 r.p.m. 

C. Governing shall be in accordance with B.S. 5514 to Class A2 except that speed drop shall 

be limited to ± 2%. 

D. Manual adjustment shall be provided for ± 5% rated speed. 

E. Steady load speed band shall not exceed 1% of rated speed. 

F. Engine shall be 4 stroke, direct injection, radiator cooled and with forced lubrication from 

wet sump with automatic oil make-up system. Full flow oil filters shall be supplied with 

differential pressure alarm and gauge. 

G. Sufficient reserve shall be allowed in the lubrication system to allow 36 hours running 

without replenishment. Oil cooling shall be by heat exchanger. Simple oil drainage 

facilities shall be provided. 

H. Thermostatically controlled jacket water heaters shall be provided. The nominal 

temperature setting shall be 45 o C but the control should be adjustable between 30 o C and 

50 o C. Vee type engines shall be provided with a heater in each bank to ensure uniform 

heating. 

Valve seats shall be replaceable. 

I. Fuel available conforms to B.S. 2869 Class A2. 

Five micron dual fuel filters shall be supplied in the fuel line complete with on line 

changeover facilities. 

Induction shall be via heavy duty oil bath air filters or suitably rated disposable paper 

element type. 

J. A fail-safe mechanical overspeed trip facility shall be provided, set at 115% rated speed. 




SEC.21 - 5

Suitable means shall be provided for turning the crankshaft and the associated generator 

by hand. 

K. The following dial or digital type engine instruments shall be provided:- 

1. Engine speed indicating tachometer, reading rev/min 

2. Lubricating oil pressure, reading k Pa 

3. Cooling water temperature, reading degrees C 

4. Service Hours counter 

5. Fuel pressure, reading k Pa 

These instruments shall be mounted on a suitable panel fixed to the engine. 

2.06 FLYWHEEL 

The flywheel shall be dynamically balanced and shall be capable of being rotated at 125% 

and 95% of rated speed during normal running. 

2.07 GOVERNOR 

A. The engine shall incorporate an adjustable isochronous electronic or hydraulic governor. 

B. The governor shall be controlled manually at the engine control panel, from the associated 

generator switchgear equipment by the governor control switch or automatically. 

C. The governor shall provide adjustable speed settings from 58 to 62 Hz, adjustable speed 

regulation from zero to 5% , adjustable load limit from zero to 125% of unit rating. 

D. The governor shall permit parallel operation of any and all other generating units 

furnished under this contract and with an infinite bus. 

E. The governor shall be cable of maintaining the frequency constant within plus or minus 

0.25% for any constant load between 25% and 100% generator rating. After any sudden 

load change of not more than 25 percent of rated load, the governor shall re-establish 

stable operating conditions in not less than 4 seconds. Surging period shall not exceed 3.6 

Hz. 

2.08 EXCITER 

A. The exciter shall be a brushless type using a rotating, fused rectifier bridge circuit. The 

three phase, full wave, rectifying unit shall be mounted on the generator motor shaft. the 

exciter shall be capable of supplying the field excitation current requirements for the 

generator and delivering 150 percent of its rated current for one minute without being 

subject to damage. The complete exciter shall be enclosed and protected by a removable 




SEC.21 - 6

cover. 

B. A diode failure detector shall form part of the exciter circuit. 

2.09 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR 

A. The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall be of completely solid state design. 

B. A maximum voltage drop of 3 percent of rated voltage will be allowed for 0 to 110 

percent of rated load, but shall be a minimum consistent with the requirements for 

satisfactory parallel operation. The voltage at any constant load from 0 to 100 percent 

load shall be within a band of 1 percent of rated voltage. 

C. Transient voltage dip after a sudden 25 percent load stop-change increase and transient 

voltage rise after a sudden 25 percent load decrease shall not exceed 5 percent of nominal 

voltage. For this requirement, the initial load shall be taken to be within the range of 50 to 

85 percent of actual operating capacity under conditions of any generating set or any 

combination of generating sets, applicable, operating on the bus. 

D. The voltage shall recover to within 1 percent steady-state band specified above, within 1/2 

second after initiation of the load changes specified above. 

E. The AVR shall be equipped with cross-current compensation and an adjustable droop 

range from 0 to 5 percent for parallel operation. 

F. The exciter shall be complete with all components necessary to provide the excitation, 

and shall be designed without the use of electronic tubes or electrolytic capacitors. 

G. The exciter shall utilize a multiphase, amplifier controlled silicon rectifier and a three 

phase exciter power transformer for receiving the power from the generator output. 

H. Provision shall be made for relay-operated pilot excitation or field flashing that receives 

its power from the storage battery, or from permanent magnets. 

I. Special provision shall be made to ensure that the silicon rectifiers are not subject to peak 

inverse voltages in excess of their rating under any condition of system operations, 

including transient conditions. 

J. The system shall be designed to sustain 300 percent of rated current for 3 seconds when a 

symmetrical short circuit is applied at the generator terminals. 

K. The AVR shall have a plus or minus 10 percent voltage adjustment range capable of 

being controlled automatically or by remotely mounted adjusting devices. 

L. The AVR shall be equipped with a variable control for setting the degree of stability of 

reactive current during parallel operation. The maximum difference in reactive kVA of 

one generating unit and that of the average of the units shall not exceed 5 percent of the 

continuous kVA rating of any one unit. The requirements shall apply under any load 




SEC.21 - 7

condition from 20 to 125 percent of combined rating at rated frequency and at any power 

factor between 0.8 lagging and unity. 

M. The AVR shall be equipped with a switch selectable (or link) rheostat for field current 

limiting with an adjustable setting. A time delay shall be included in the circuit so that 

there is no interference with normal field forcing. 

N. The prevent over fluxing of the machine at low speeds, a frequency fall of circuit shall be 

included in the AVR to progressively reduce the generator when the frequency falls below 

90 percent of the nominal. This facility shall be selected by a link on the AVR. 

O. An electronic manual voltage regulator. with potentiometer control on the main control 

panel, shall be provided. A manual/automatic selector switch shall be provided on the 

main control panel. 

2.10 STARTING SYSTEM 

A. Electric starting shall be provided to all machines and shall comprise 24 volt equipment 

including starter motor, alternator and rectifier, lead acid batteries of ample capacity and 

mains powered constant voltage charging equipment and all connecting wiring. 

B. Batteries are to be mounted on each set and capable of withstanding the following starting 

load:- five 20 second starts in succession in any four hour period. 

C. A battery charging panel for each starter battery shall be provided and shall be capable of 

recharging the battery from discharged state in 6 hours and maintaining it in a charged 

state when the set is standing idle. The battery of each generator set shall be charged from 

the own set mounted alternator/rectifier when that particular set is running. 

D. The batteries shall be used to supply auxiliary relays as required whose operation must 

not be affected whilst supplying starting current. Auxiliary circuits are to be protected by 

fuses. 

2.11 EXHAUST SYSTEM 

A. The exhaust system shall be manufactured in heavy quality steel tubing to BS 1387, fitted 

with suitable robust gas-tight flexible sections close to the engine to allow engine 

movement and to reduce the transmission of engine vibrations to the remainder of the 

exhaust system and the surroundings. Bends shall have a minimum radius of three times 

the diameter of the tube. As far as possible, flexible sections shall be vertical, free from 

bends and have sufficient length or slack to allow free movement without damage. 

B. Silencers shall be of the heavy duty baffle and absorption, residential type, so designed 

and installed as to reduce noise to the minimum level as allowed by the local and 

international standards, without appreciably impairing the working efficiency of the 

engine. 

C. Vibration isolating equipment shall be provided with each silencer for use where they are 




SEC.21 - 8

mounted on structural steelwork. 

D. The silencers and exhaust pipework shall be properly and adequately supported clear of 

fuel and feed pipes and shall be provided with suitable insulation to protect personnel, 

plant and buildings from excessive heat. Design of exhaust system shall be suitable for 

site conditions and routing, where shown on layout. 

E. The pipework shall drain away from the exhaust manifold and drain pipes shall be fitted 

in the low points of the system to avoid accumulation of condensate. 

F. The system shall be so constructed as to enable it to be readily dismantled for 

maintenance. Provision shall be made to prevent rain water entering the exhaust pipe at its 

outlet to the atmosphere. 

G. All exhaust connections shall be to BS 4504. 

H. All necessary brackets, supports, insulation and protection shall be provided, together 

with all fixing bolts. Bolts, washers and nuts shall be greased with graphite grease or other 

suitable heat resisting lubricant during assembly. 

I. The finish of all exhaust silencers exposed to the open air shall be sprayed metallic 

aluminium by a process complying with BS2569, Part 2, Process A. 

2.12 COOLING SYSTEM 

A. Engine cooling shall be by a water jacket, with water circulating pump and heavy duty 

tropical radiator with an electric driven pusher fan. 

B. The radiator shall be fitted with drawings legs and sited as shown on the drawings. 

C. The fan shall be rated for tropical conditions. 

D. The cooling equipment complete with feed and expansion tank and pumps as necessary. 

E. Where necessary to limit the oil temperature, a water cooled lubricating oil temperature 

stabiliser, complying with BS3274, shall be incorporated in the engine cooling system. 

Sufficient corrosion inhibitor shall be added to the cooling water to protect the cooling 

system from internal corrosion. Thermostatic control shall be incorporated. 

2.13 FUEL SYSTEM 

A. The fuel system shall comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 37. 

B. The engine shall be operated on Df-2 fuel. 

C. The fuel system shall be complete and shall consist of an external fuel storage tank 

suitable for 72 hours continuous operation at 100% load, a dual filtering system, an 

engine day tank suitable for 8 hours continuous operation at 100% full load, two 




SEC.21 - 9

electrically driven fuel transfer pumps and one hand pump for emergency situations. 

D. The fuel storage tank shall be a standard size tank with accessories as specified in section 

15175. 

E. One full flow strainer and one duplex filter shall be provided between the day tank and 

the engine. The strainer shall be of the metal edge or screen type with a maximum 

spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mech). The filter case shall be compatible with the filter 

element. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible locations without 

disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when changing the strainer and filter 

element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across 

the strainer and filter. 

F. The engine fuel pump shall be a positive displacement, engine-driven type, and shall be 

capable of supply an adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions of operation. A relief 

valve shall be provided to prevent the build-up of excessive pressure if the discharge line 

becomes blocked. 

G. Provide rigid fuel pipework and fittings in accordance with manufacturers 

recommendations. Flexible connections shall be provided at the interface between the 

engine and the fixed pipework. 

H. Provide high and low level switches in the bulk fuel storage tank and high and low level 

switches in the day tank with overflow acoustic alarm. 

I. Provide an electrically operated valve on the engine mounted day tank to dump the fuel 

oil and shut-down the engine when a signal is received from an external fire alarm panel. 

J. Provide control logic to shut-down fuel transfer pump when a signal is received from an 

external fire alarm panel. This control circuit shall be independent from the day tank 

drain valve control circuit. 

2.14 LUBRICATION SYSTEM 

A. The engine lubricating system shall conform to NFPA 30 & 37 and operate under a 

predetermined and constant pressure. 

B. The primary lubricating oil pump shall be an engine driven, positive displacement pump. 

C. An electric DC motor driven prestart lubricating oil pump shall be installed as an integral 

part of the genset. The control logic shall be designed to stop the electric lubricating oil 

pumps when the genset attains sufficient speed to maintain adequate oil pressure through 

the engine driven mechanical pump. 

D. A sump pump, relief valves and by pass valves shall be installed if required for proper 

operation. 

E. One tube type oil cooler arranged for utilizing engine cooling water as the cooling 




SEC.21 - 10

medium shall be furnished for each engine. The cooler may be separately mounted or 

mounted on the engine. The capacity and construction shall be as recommended by the 

engine manufacturer. 

F. One full flow strainer and one full flow strainer and duplex filter shall be provided in the 

lube oil line on the discharge side of the lube oil pumps. The strainer shall be of the metal 

edge or screen type with a maximum spacing of 0.007 inch (80 mesh). The filter shall be 

of the multiple cleaning and replaceable element type and the filter case shall be 

compatible with the filter element. A pressure relief valve shall be provided to relieve 

becomes clogged. An alarm condition shall be annunciated when the relief valve is in the 

open position. The strainer and filter shall be mounted in accessible locations without 

disconnecting the piping or other engine equipment when changing the strainer and filter 

element. Indicating pressure gauges shall be provided to measure the pressure drop across 

the strainer and filter. 

2.15 SAFETY SYSTEM 

A. The generator set shall be equipped with automatic safety devices which shut down the 

generator set and open the generator circuit breaker in the event of low lubricating oil 

pressure, high coolant temperature, engine overspeed, high lubricating oil temperature, 

over load and as specified elsewhere. The stop switch on the engine instrument board 

may be connected in the circuit if so recommended by the manufacturer. 

B. The safety system shall be equipped with visual and audible devices that become 

operational before engine shutdown. 

C. Lube oil pressure and cooling water temperature and pre-alarms to be inter connected to 

the building management system. 

D. Simultaneous activation of the audible signal, activation of the visual signal, stopping the 

engine, and opening the generator field and main circuit breakers shall be accomplished. 

E. For startup of the engine-generator set, time-delay devices shall be installed bypassing the 

low lubricating oil pressure alarm during cranking, and the coolant-fluid outlet 

temperature alarm. The lube-oil time-delay device shall return its alarm to normal status 

after the engine starts. The coolant time-delay device shall return its alarm to normal 

status 5 minutes after the engine starts. 

2.16 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND ALARMS 

A. An engine instrument panel shall be provided that displays gauges and indicators for 

proper engine control, surveillance and maintenance. The panel shall be mounted on a 

bracket welded to the skid. All connections to the engine shall be flexible types providing 

anti-vibration isolation. All instruments and gauges to be analogue and in metric units, 

where applicable. 

B. The engine instrument and alarm panel shall contain all the switches, indications, meters, 

push buttons, displays, etc. for the proper monitoring and control of the operations of 




SEC.21 - 11

emergency power generator system described of following items shall be provided: 

1. Coolant-fluid inlet temperature display. 

2. Lubricating-oil pressure indicator. 

3. Lubricating-oil inlet temperatures display. 

4. Red emergency stop (push-button or switch) 

5. Run-time meter. 

6. Fuel meter display. 

7. Fuel-header-pressure display. 

8. Tachometer display. 

9. Engine start-stop switch. 

10. Start-attempt light indicator. 

11. Lubricating-oil prelubricating pump start-stop switch. 

12. Pyrometer display with selector switch. 

13. Alarms 

C. All alarms and instrumentation shall be provided and arranged to stop the engine 

automatically. In the event of an emergency the operation of this safeguard shall at the 

same time give individual warning of the failure by illumination of an appropriate visual 

indicator and the sound of a distinctive audible alarm. A self-resetting audible alarm 

muting switch shall be provided. 

The safe guards shall operate when any of the following conditions occur irrespective of 

whether the set is on automatic or manual control: 

1. Engine over-speed. 

2. High cooling water temperature. 

3. Low cooling water level. 

4. Low lubricating oil pressure. 

5. High lubricating oil temperature. 

6. Low fuel level (to operate at 10% capacity of fuel tank). 




SEC.21 - 12

7. Control circuit fault. 

8. Fail-to-Start. 

9. Generator failure (Set running). 

2.17 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL 

A. The control panel shall be totally enclosed metal clad cubicle type and shall contain the 

following equipment together with any other items which are required to ensure a 

complete and safe installation. 

B. The generator control panel shall provide controls, gauges, metres, etc. to include: 

1. Main circuit breaker (MCCB) 

2. Four position selector switch with Off-Auto-Man-Test 

3. A hand operated switch to raise or lower the speed of the engine together with a 

hand operated voltage trimming rheostat. 

4. All engine controls, relays, indicator lamps, fuses, wiring etc. 

5. Voltmeter with seven position selector switch 

6. Three Ammeters 

7. Kilowatt-hour meter 

8. Power factor meter 

9. Frequency meter dial type with a range of 90 to 110 percent of rated frequency. 

The instruments shall be manufactured to BS 89, and shall be 100 mm square, flush 

mounted, 90 o scale moving iron type with chromium plated bezel. The kilowatt-hour 

meter shall be of the digital read-out type, flush mounted. The instruments mentioned 

above are additional to the instruments specified elsewhere in this specification. 

C. Indications 

1. Flush type coloured indicators illuminated by low voltage lamps for the 

following:- 

Green lamps : Main supply available 

Red lamps : All alarm conditions listed above in "2.16 (C)" 




SEC.21 - 13

2. The indicators shall be clearly labelled as to their duty. The "mains supply 

available" indicator shall be operated from the mains supply. 

D. An audible device with reset shall also be provided. 

E. Suitable robust protected type spring return pushbuttons on the front of the control panel 

for the following duties:- 

1. Start engine (for testing, servicing etc. with control selector switch in `Manual 

position) 

2. Stop engine. 

F. Test buttons for verifying the operation of the alarm conditions listed above in "2.16(C)" 

G. Clean contacts to provide remote indications for any purpose such as BMS or for any 

other location of the following conditions:- 

1. Mains supply normal. 

2. Mains failure, standby running. 

3. Generator set under manual control. 

4. Fault in control circuit. 

5. Low fuel level. 

6. Low oil pressure . 

7. High water temperature. 

8. Fail to start. 

H. Provision for connection to a dummy load by means of lugs with butterfly nuts for 

commissioning purpose. 

2.18 CONTROL OPERATION 

A. The manufacturer shall provide the following switch selectable operational modes on the 

diesel electric generator control system. 

1. Manual Control (manual start and stop) 

2. Semi-Automatic Control (Auto-start manual return) 

3. Full-Auto control (Auto-start with auto stop when commercial supply returns). 




SEC.21 - 14

B. In the automatic mode, the installation shall operate as follows :- 

Mains failure shall cause a changeover relay to de-energise. This relay shall have an 

adjustable 0-10 seconds delay before contacts re-set when it is de-energised so that if 

power is restored within that period no changeover shall take place. If the power is not 

restored, the changeover relay contacts shall re-set and operate as follows :- 

1. The mains contactor control circuit shall be opened. This contactor will already 

have opened owing to loss of supply 

2. The engine run relay shall be energised and the standby set run up. 

3. The standby contactor control circuit shall be prepared and complete when the 

generator voltage and frequency monitors show that the set is up to speed, and 

the contactor shall close. The generator is required to take over full load within 

10 seconds of start up. 

4. When mains power is again available it shall be detected by a reset timer with an 

adjustable time delay of 0-30 minutes before operation when energised. When the 

timer operates it shall energise the changeover relay. Energizing the changeover 

relay shall: 

a. Open the standby contactor control circuit, dropping out the contactor. 

b. Close the mains contactor control circuit so that the contactor closes. 

c. De-energise the engine run relay. 

The relay shall have a time delay adjustable up to 15 minutes before the contacts 

re-set to allow the engine to continue to run on no load before shutting down. 

5. Refer to section No. 16496 for details of enclosed transfer switch. 

2.19 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL ITEMS 

A. Wiring 

All cabling and small wiring shall be securely cleated in systematic runs; small wiring 

shall be multi-strand copper not smaller than 1.0 Sq.mm flexible cord. 

Power and small wiring cables interconnecting major components shall be heat and oil 

resisting. 

All cabling and small wiring shall be coded and terminated with lugs or letters of the 

terminals to which they are connected. Terminals shall be numbered or lettered, easily 

accessible and fitted with individual insulating barriers or adequately spaced. 

Barriers shall be fitted to separate control terminals from power wiring terminals. 




SEC.21 - 15

B. Earthing 

1. All metalwork housing electrical equipment shall be provided with earthing 

terminals for bonding to the building earthing system. 

C. Contactors 

1. Contactors shall have magnetic circuits designed for AC or DC operation and 

shall be suitably rated. Four pole contactors shall be fitted for three phase 

equipment and two pole contactors for single phase equipment. Main and 

auxiliary contacts shall be silver faced. 

D. Relays 

1. Switching and control devices shall be solid state where possible. Electromechanical 

relays shall be of robust and rugged construction with rolling or 

wiping contacts. They shall be mounted on individual sub-bases and wired so that 

easy access is obtained to soldered connections. Unsealed relays shall be enclosed 

in individual or common dust protecting cases. 

2. Time delays, if of the pneumatic type, shall operate on filtered air. The thermal 

type of time delay relay will not be accepted. 

E. Fuses 

1. A spare fuse cartridge for each pole shall be mounted inside each equipment. 

F. Rectifiers and Capacitors 

1. Rectifiers and Capacitors shall be suitable for any transient voltages likely to be 

encountered during the operation of the equipment and for the internal operating 

temperature of the enclosures at the specified maximum external ambient 

temperature. 

G. Winding Heaters 

1. Suitably rated heaters for operation on the appropriate voltage shall be provided 

for every alternator, motor and electrical panel. A separate terminal block shall be 

provided for the heater supply in each relevant panel. 

H. Trunking and Accessories 

1. Trunking runs and connections between trunking and boxes shall be flanged, 

spigotted and/or provided with coupling pieces with earth bonding continuity 

straps. 




SEC.21 - 16

2. All accessories and fittings shall be manufacturers proprietary items as far as 

practical with site fabrication maintained to a minimum. Any site fabrication shall 

be approved by the Engineer. 

2.20 LABELLING AND SAFETY 

A. Each major component of the unit shall have the manufacturer’s name, address, style, type 

or catalog number on a place securely attached to the component of the units. 

B. The function or duty of each meter, instrument, indicator, switch, or push buttons or other 

device for external control, shall be clearly defined with labels in accordance with section 

16010. 

C. Any instructions for the proper and safe working of the plant shall be fixed in a position 

close to where the operation is carried out, in accordance with section 16010. 

D. The engine/generator unit shall have a notice fixed in a conspicuous position, with titles at 

least 25mm high and remainder 12mm high, both in Arabic and English and in red color 

stating:- 

DANGER - KEEP CLEAR 

THIS SET IS REMOTELY / AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND 

MAY START AT ANY TIME. WRITTEN AUTHORITY MUST BE 

OBTAINED AND APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TAKEN 

BEFORE ANY WORK IS UNDERTAKEN ON THE SET OR 

ASSOCIATED CONTROL EQUIPMENT. 

E. Exposed parts that are subject to high operating temperatures or are energised electrically 

and moving parts which are of such nature or so located as to be a hazard to operating 

personnel, shall be insulated, fully enclosed, or guarded. Guarding shall be arranged in a 

manner that will not impair the proper function of these parts. 

2.21 PAINTING 

A. Painting shall be in accordance with the appropriate requirements of section - Painting. 

EXECUTION PART 3 


A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receiver work and field dimensions are as shown on 

drawings. 

B. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use. 

C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 




SEC.21 - 17


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and standards. 

3.03 SHOP AND FIELD TESTS 

A. Shop and Field testing will be performed under provisions of section 16350. 

B. Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank, if required, for four hours minimum. 

During test, record the following at 20 minutes intervals: 

1. Kilowatts 

2. Amperes 

3. Voltage 

4. Coolant temperature 

5. Inside container or room temperature 

6. Frequency 

7. Oil pressure 

C. Test alarm and shut down circuits by simulating conditions. 

D. Test system in case of automatic mode as described in this specification. 

E. The engine-generator unit shall demonstrate its adequacy to operate as specified in all 

aspects any failure to demonstrate adequacy in any respect shall be corrected to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer. 

3.04 TRAINING 

A. The installation contractor shall furnish training for the operation and maintenance of the 

emergency power generator system for a minimum of four employees of the Owner. The 

total training course shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative for a 

minimum duration of 24 hours, conducted on three days as per the schedule to be agreed 

by the Owner. 

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME 

A. The manufacturer shall provide four copies of a comprehensive operation and 

maintenance manual for each diesel generator unit. Two copies shall be in the English 

language and two in the Arabic language. in addition to operation and maintenance 




SEC.21 - 18

instructions, the manual shall include an illustrated parts list, detailed system description, 

and appropriate diagrams and drawings. The programme shall include an inspection and 

maintenance schedule and details of tasks to be performed. The manuals shall be 

submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to their acceptance by the Client. 





SEC.21 - 19

SECTION 22 

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 



A. Examine all other Sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of this 





A. The work under this section consists of furnishing, installation and testing of complete 

lightning protection system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 

1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS 

A. All electrical work shall comply with all government rules and regulations and shall be 

carried out in accordance with the relevant standards and specifications issued by the 

appropriate authority, and in addition to the following: 

1. British Standards Specifications (BSS) as published by the British Standards 

Institution. 

2. International Electro technical Commission (IEC). 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. The lightning protection system shall consist of air termination networks, down 

conductors, test clamps, earth network, tapes, cables, etc., necessary to form a complete 

system in accordance with the required "Standards". 

2.02 AIR TERMINATION NETWORK 

A. Air termination network shall be provided on roof and consist of air terminals and/or roof 

conductors as shown on the drawings. No part of the roof within the air termination 

network should be more than 5 meter from a roof conductor. 

B. Air terminals shall be solid copper. The roof conductor shall also be solid copper, bare or 

insulated, circular or tape as shown on the drawings. 

2.03 DOWN CONDUCTORS 




SEC.22 -1

A. The down conductors shall provide a low impedance path from the air termination 

network to the earth. Any one type or a combination of circular or tape conductors, 

dedicated reinforcing bars, structural steel stanchions, etc. shall be used as down 

conductors as shown on the drawings. Down conductors shall, where possible, take the 

most direct route from the air termination network to the earth. 

2.04 TEST CLAMPS 

A. Test clamps shall be plate type, manufactured from cast leaded gun metal to BS:1400, 

Grade LG1-C or LG2-C for copper. 

B. Tape shall pass through clamps and protrude 25 mm approximately. Tape shall be tinned 

on contact surfaces. Only resin based flux shall be used. 

2.05 EARTH NETWORK 

A. Earth network shall comprise any one type or a combination of earth rods, radial electrode 

(perimeter loop), earth plates, underground pipes, foundation reinforcement bars, etc. as 

shown on the drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 

B. Earth rods shall be copper clad steel with concrete inspection pits. 

2.06 CONDUCTORS AND TAPES 

A. Conductors used for lightning protection shall either be bare or PVC insulated high 

conductivity plain stranded annealed copper to BS:6360. 

B. Tapes shall be either bare or PVC insulated high conductivity annealed copper 

confirming to BS:2870. 

C. Size of conductors and tapes shall be as shown on the drawings. 


3.01 GENERAL 

A. The installation shall be carried out in accordance with BS:6651. The position of all 

conductors, test clamps, ground rods and earth terminals shall be approved by the 

Engineer prior to commencing the work. 

B. The building structural steel work shall be utilised for the lightning protection down 

conductors in the locations shown on the drawings. In reinforcement lapping areas the 

continuity of the down conductors shall be ensured by mechanical bonding between the 

reinforcement bars with a 70mm² copper cable or as recommended by the manufacturer. 

All steelwork members of building structure shall be bonded to the lighting protection 

system as directed in BS:6651. 




SEC.22 -2

C. Ground rods shall be driven into ground to a required depth and shall be provided at the 

position of each down conductor. 

A concrete inspection pit shall be fitted at each rod to tape joint position. Rods shall be 

located as close as possible to the building. 

D. Fittings shall be of similar material to the tape system unless otherwise approved. Vertical 

tapes shall be fixed at intervals not exceeding 900 mm and horizontal tapes shall be fixed 

at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm. 

E. All connections and joints between rods, tapes and conductors shall be made using 

"Exothermic" process which produces a fused joint. Bolted connections shall not be used 

except at the connection to the ground rods which shall be disconnectable for testing 

purposes and to ensure electrical continuity between reinforcement steelwork. 

3.02 TESTING 

A. The electrical and mechanical continuity of all conductors, bonds and joints shall be 

verified. 

The resistance to earth of the whole installation and each earth termination shall be 

measured and shall be in accordance with BS:6651. 

B. The testing shall be in accordance with BS:6651. The overall resistance of the installation 

to the general mass of earth shall not exceed 5 ohms. The resistance of each test joint 

shall satisfy BS:6651. Additional earth terminations shall be added, if required, under the 

directions of the Engineer. 





SEC.22 -3

SECTION 23 

FIRE ALARM / LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 


1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. This specification provides the functional requirements for the installation, 

programming, configuration, warranty and maintenance of a complete Addressable 

Intelligent Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Network. The system shall include, but not 

be limited to: 

1. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s), and Network Node Panels. 

2. Automatic and Manually Activated Voice Evacuation Alarm Subsystem 

3. Firefighter’s Telephone Communications System/Subsystem 

4. Automatic and Manually activated Alarm Initiating and Monitoring Devices 

5. Notification Peripheral and Appliances 

6. Standby Power Supplies 

7. Programming, Commissioning and Training of Operators, and 

8. Conduit, wire and accessories required to furnish a complete and Operational Life 

Safety System. 

1.02 EQUIPMENT REFERENCES 

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in fire protective signaling systems shall list 

the system and all components. The UL Label shall be considered as evidence of 

compliance with this requirement. The equipment shall be listed by UL under the 

following standards as applicable: 

UL 864/UOJZ, APOU Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

UL 1076/APOU 

Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. 

UL 268 

Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling 

UL 268A 

Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications Systems. 

UL 217 

Smoke Detectors Single Station. 

UL 521 

Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

UL 228 

Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

UL 464 

Audible Signaling Appliances. 

UL 1638 

Visual Signaling Appliances. 

UL 38 

Manually Activated Signaling Boxes. 



FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM 

SEC.23 - 1

UL 346 

Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

UL 1971 

Visual Signaling Appliances. 

UL 1481 

Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

UL 1711 

Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

Any equipment not bearing a UL Label shall be removed and replaced with UL 

labeled equipment at the contractors’ expense. 

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 

In the case of any discrepancy between these specifications, the project drawings, and 

any applicable local codes, the installed Fire Alarm / Life Safety System shall comply 

with the most stringent requirement. 

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR 

The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the layout and the 

installation of automatic computer-based Fire Alarm Systems. Prior to the bid date, the contractor 

must be able to show evidence that he has successfully completed projects of similar size and 

scope in the last 12 months. 


No equipment shall be purchased by the contractor for the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System 

specified herein until the Professional Supervising Engineer has approved the Project Submittals 

in their entirety and has returned them to the contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to 

meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved 

submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be 

construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications. 

The contractor shall submit (3) complete sets of Project Submittal documentation in order to be 

considered for this project. This Project Submittal documentation shall include: 

A) Product Data: Complete data sheets bearing the printed logo or trademark of the Fire 

Alarm Control Network manufacturer for the following pieces of equipment: 

• System Control Panel(s) 

• System Power Supply(s) 

• Standby Power Supply(s) 

• Each type of intelligent automatic Smoke and Heat Detector to be 

connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Network. 




SEC.23 - 2

1.05 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 

A) The Manufacturer shall supply a 3-year warranty from date of manufacture for all 

Control System and Field Devices and appliances. The contractor shall warrant the 

installed fire alarm system to be free from any defects of material and installation for a 

period of 2 years from acceptance by the professional engineer. Any deficiencies shall 

be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall 

maintain a service organization with adequate spare parts stock within 150 miles of 

the installation. Any defects that render the system inoperative shall be repaired within 

24 hours of the owner notifying the contractor. Other defects shall be repaired within 

48 hours of the owner notifying the contractor. 

B) The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System supplied shall include a store of spare system subassemblies 

and field devices for use as emergency service stock. As a minimum, the 

spares stock shall include 2% of each different type of field connected device and 1 

each (minimum) of each internal system component assembly. 


This Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety 

to ensure that the installed and programmed Life Safety System will function as 

designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations required by 

the building owner. All specified operational features will be met without exception. 

2.01 MANUFACTURERS 

Equipment and materials shall be provided by EST- Regional Office/Agent who will ensure 

proper Specification Adherence, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and 

service. 

Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped 

service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours, 24 hours a day, 7 days 

a week to service the system. 




SEC.23 - 3

The Regional Office/Agent who distributes and does the application engineering and 

programming of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of 

their certificate of successful completion of an authorized Training Course given by the 

Manufacturer of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment. 

The manufacturer of the Fire Alarm system components shall conform to the International 

Standards Organization (ISO) standards, as listed below, and provide suitable proof of ISO 

certification to these standards: 

ISO-9000 

ISO-9001, in the disciplines of: 

Design Engineering 

Manufacturing 

Technical Support 

Documentation 

Training 

Marketing 

Equipment by other manufacturers will be considered only if a written request accompanied by 

supporting documentation establishing equivalent levels of performance is submitted to the 

Supervising Engineer. By submitting of equipment by an alternate manufacturer for 

consideration, the submitter accedes that the final decision of the Supervising Engineer, as to 

whether the alternate equipment is of equivalent performance, will be final and binding on all 

parties. 

SYSTEM TROUBLE DETECTION 

When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following 

functions shall immediately occur: 

A) The System Trouble indicator shall flash. 

B) A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated. 

C) The control panel display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the 

trouble condition and its location 

D) Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if 

Such an alarm must also be displayed, the trouble message will not be displayed until 

the operator has acknowledged all alarm messages. 




SEC.23 - 4

E) The appropriate trouble message shall be displayed on all printers so programmed. 

SYSTEM RESET SWITCH 

Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all initiating devices, notification appliance 

circuits ,and associated output devices to return to the normal condition. If alarm conditions exist 

in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then repeat the alarm 

sequence. 

LAMP TEST FUNCTION 

Activation of the Lamp Test function shall turn on all LED indicators, system graphic 

display, and then return all indicators to the previous condition. 

* AUTOMATIC DETECTOR TEST 

The system shall include a Resident Automatic Detector Sensitivity Test, which 

satisfies the NFPA and UL requirements for detector sensitivity test. No additional 

calibrated tests shall be required if the system indicates the smoke detectors are with in 

the normal sensitivity range. 

2.02. A PANEL MOUNTED SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

2.02.A.1 Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Operators’ Interface 

The System Display 

The graphical display shall provide the means to inform the System Operator with detailed 

information about the off-normal status of the installed Fire Alarm/Life Safety System. The 

graphical display shall automatically respond to the status of the system, and shall display that 

status in 168-character front panel display. 

A) Automatic Functions 

The following status functions shall be annunciated by the Graphical Display: 

When the Fire Alarm / Life Safety System is in the “Normal” Mode, the panel displays: 

• The current Date and Time. 

• A Custom System Title (minimum 2 lines X 21 characters). 




SEC.23 - 5

• A summary total of system events. 

With the Fire Alarm Life Safety System in the “Alarm” Mode, the display shall automatically 

reconfigure into four logical windows 

3.04.A Delivery of System Documentation Package 

The Fire Alarm contractor shall deliver two sets of the System Documentation Package to the 

Building Owners Representative and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Final payment of 

the contractor will not be authorized until the complete documentation specified herein is 

delivered to the professional engineer. The System Documentation Package shall consist of the 

following documents, to be provided after the has been completely installed and tested: 

1) Operations and Maintenance Manuals which detail the operation and maintenance of 

the installed Life Safety System. 

2) An As-Built copy of the scaled plan of each building showing the actual installed 

location of each piece of fire alarm equipment as well as the installed raceway sizes 

and routing, conductor sizes and quantities in each raceway, and the exact location of 

each junction box. 

3) Point to Point diagrams of the entire Life Safety System as installed and tested. Point to Point Diagrams shall include all connected 

Smoke and Heat Detectors and addressable Field Modules. In addition, “As-Built” 

riser and wiring diagrams reflecting all T-Taps, each programmed device characteristic 

including detector type, base type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire 

configurations will be provided to the Supervising Engineer, based on the information 

gathered during the system final testing process. 

4) The application program (database) listing for the system as installed at the time of 

acceptance by the building owner (Disk and Hard copy printout). 

5) A Time and Date stamped report which lists every Fire Alarm / Life Safety System 




SEC.23 - 6

Cabinet within the system. This report shall include date regarding each cabinet in the 

system, the hardware modules mounted in each cabinet, and the physical mounting 

location of each module. 

6) A Time and Date stamped report, which lists every detector, module, switch and 

output circuit within the system. This report shall include addressing, custom labeling, 

device type, and physical location for each device. 

7) A letter certifying that the installation is in strict compliance with all applicable codes 

and in strict compliance with the requirements of these specifications. The letter shall 

also clearly explain any discrepancies between the originally submitted system 

drawings and the as-built system drawings. 

8) Two originals of the NFPA document titled “Fire Alarm System Certification and 

Description” completely filled-in and signed as required. 

9) Name, address and telephone of the authorized factory representative. 

10) Written certification by the fire alarm contractor that no power supply audio amplifier 

or circuit on the system has an electrical load greater than 80% of its rated capacity. 

11) A copy of the manufacturers’ warranty on the installed system. 

System Startup: 

A Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor shall perform system Startup. 

A contractor under the direction of the Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems 

Distributor may perform certain functions of the Systems Startup Procedure. 

3.05 Instruction of Owner 

The Fire Alarm Contractor shall schedule and execute an instruction class for the Building owner, 

which details the proper operation of the installed fire alarm system. 

The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide operations manuals or any other curricula that may 

enhance the instruction of the Building Owners or Local Municipal Fire Department in the 

operation and maintenance of the system. 





SEC.23 - 7

SECTION 24 


TELEPHONE SYSTEM 

1.01 DESCRIPTION 

A. All Interconnecting Wiring 

B. Outside Plant (cable, splices, cross connection and distribution pedestals) 

1.02 RELATED WORK 

A. Section 16120: Wiring 

B. Section 16161: Grounding and Bonding 

1.03 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the associated 

drawings and the standards listed hereunder or other standards approved by the 

Supervising Engineer. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all purchased materials and 

manufacturer items and shall develop and submit where applicable proposals for shop 

inspection and testing. 

C. The following is a summary of International standards. The latest issues of applicable 

publications shall be observed. Alternative international standards may be used 

provided they give equivalent guidance and are submitted for Supervising Engineer's 

review and approval in advance of their use. 

- International Electro technical Commission (IEC) 

- British Standards (BS) 

- International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT). 

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

A. The equipment shall be suitable for the environment in that the working conditions are 

up to 50 degrees C. and 98% humidity. While the equipment will normally operate 

within a controlled environment, it shall be capable of operating for a minimum of 

two busy hours within the following limits: 

1. 0 degrees to 46 degrees C. 

2. 10% to 70% humidity 




SEC.24 -1

B. The equipment shall be capable of being stored or transported in a switched off 

condition in the range of -10 degrees C to +50 degrees C with 70% humidity without 

damage. 


A. Before commencement of manufacture, the Contractor shall submit the following to 

the Supervising Engineer for review: 

1. Performance data including mean time between failures (MTBF) and mean time to 

epair (MTTR) figures. 

2. Manuals's covering the following: 

a. Start-up procedures 

b. 3 copies of catalogues of all equipment to be furnished. 

3. A list of special tools required for installation and maintenance. 

4. A list of test equipment required for installation and maintenance. 

5. Proposed list of spare parts required for two years maintenance. 

6. Typical floor layout 

7. A list of all subscriber and system features provided with details of operation. 

8. Proof of compliance with National and/or International standards. 

1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 

A. Installation subject to approval, inspection and test of local utility company. 

B. Provide equipment compatible with utility company telephone system. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 


The Contractor shall provide and install all indoor and outdoor plant as shown on the Drawings 

for the complete telephone system from the site boundary interface with the PTT incoming trunk 

lines to each individual subscriber telephone set. 

The Contractor shall provide any additional items of hardware that may be recommended by the 

EPABX manufacturer and approved by the Supervising Engineer. The Contractor shall provide 

any additional hardware required to satisfy the requirements of the MOPTT specifications even if 




SEC.24 -2

this hardware is not specifically shown on the drawings. 

2.02 EQUIPMENT ITEMS 

The items detailed in the attached Specification technical Data Sheets shall be 

provided. 



A. All cables shall be harnessed and properly dressed. 

B. All exposed surfaces and access openings shall be free from sharp edges, open V slots 

or pointed ends. 

C. Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical system and 

electrical equipment shall inform to the latest issue of the international codes. 

D. An earth or ground shall be provided and be extended to the termination box and 

connected to each station protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded 

in accordance with Section 16161. 





SEC.24 -3

SECTION 25 

Public Address System 


1.01 Description Of Work 

A. This section applies to the public address system. 

B. The quantity and location of apparatus comprising a complete system as shown 

on drawings. 

1.02 System Description 

A. Equipment shall be shown with microphones and loudspeaker units positioned 

where indicated on the drawings to provide the maximum flexibility and coverage for 

broadcasting. 

1.03 Quality Assurance 

A. Equipment shall be purchased only from single manufacturer established and 

specializing in these types of products. 

1.04 Submittals 

A. Manufacturers shall submit drawings and illustrated leaflets of the various types 

of apparatus offered. 

B. For speakers submit the following: 

1. Characteristic curves for defined methods of mounting on ceilings. 

2. Suitability for continuous full output power handling. 

3. Types recommendations by manufacturer with application and environment 

considerations. Suitable cabinets for internal loudspeakers to be flushed to 

ceilings. 

1.05 Delivery and Handling 

A. Pack to protect all apparatus during transportation and storage. 

B. Store in dry location. 

C. Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during 

construction. 


2.01 Equipment 

A. To provide high quality reproduction and natural sounding speech/music from a 




SEC.25 -1

good amplitude modulated amplifier. 

B. Supply: 

1. Central rack including all necessary equipment such as Amplifiers, power 

supply, Radio tuner AM/FM, double deck cassette recorder, CD player, Zone 

selections,...etc. as shown on drawings and B.O.Q. 

2. Microphone call stations 

3. Column loudspeakers indoor type wall mounted type each complete with tap 

transformer . 

4. Horn type loudspeaker indoor and outdoor type shall be as shown on the 

drawings. 

5. 6W round type recessed ceiling mounted loudspeakers with tap transformers. 

6. Selector switches. 

C. Level of Sound Output: 

The system shall be designed so that it is capable of providing without the undue 

distortion the maximum loudness likely to be required taking into account such factors 

as audience absorption and the maximum ambient noise level. 

D. For internal output a mean sound intensity level of 60dB relative to 5 - 8W/cm2) 

shall be provided and 20 dB below maximum available from the amplifier and 

speakers and not after allowance for the loudest passages so as not to create 

distortion in output quality. The rated power of the amplifier shall not be less 

than 12.5 m per 13000 m3. 

2.02 Microphones 

A. Suitable for omni directional response. Smooth response over range of 

frequencies for the system. Move coil, ribbon or piezo electric as most suitable 

for the amplifier. 

2.03 Amplifiers 

A. To operate continuously on the environmental conditions stated earlier. 




SEC.25 -2

B. Low voltage to speakers not in excess of 100V. Inputs to the amplifier shall be 

high enough to produce full power output stated earlier. 

C. Frequency response: With filter inoperative, tone control set for desired response 

the frequency response shall not vary more than 2 dB over: 

100 Hz to 20 KHz at rated output 

2.04 Distortion 

A. With same conditions of frequency response the total harmonic content at rated 

power should not exceed: 

2% (-34 dB) at 100 Hz 

2.05 Loudspeakers 

A. Loudspeakers shall provide close frequency response. Loss of higher frequencies 

shall not exceed 10 dB at the highest frequency. 

B. Line transformers shall also be fitted to loudspeakers where individual outputs 

require to be adjusted. 

2.06 Radio Tuner 

A rack mounted tuner shall be provided. The tuner shall provide for-set selection 

of 16 FM stations to program individually in the frequency range of 87.5 108.0 

MHz. Automatically and manual station searching mode. LCD and LED 

display. 

The tuner shall provide the following minimum performance: 

Input Sensitivity : 1.5 

THD : 0.5% 

If Bandwidth: 250 Khz 

Antenna Input : 75 

Output Signal : 0 - 500 mV adjustable 

Poser Supply : 24 VDC 

2.07 Cassette Player 




SEC.25 -3

Rack mounted cassette player units of the industrial quality shall be provided for 

replay of background music. 

Each player shall beef fully controlled electronically by press of a button, and shall 

accept standard compact cassettes sand shall provide at least 3 hours continuous 

replay with out repeat. 

The Cassette Player shall provide the following minimum performance: 

WOW and Flutter : 52 dB (DIN) 

Frequency response : 60 …. 18000 Hz 

Output voltage (mono) : Max. 0 dB, adjustable 

Output Voltage (Stereo) : 2 x 400mV 

Mechanical Features 

Tape Speed : 

4.75 cm/sec 

Rewind time : 120 seconds for C 60 Cassettes 

Motor : 

2+1 motors with revolving sound. 

head and no slip clutches 

Tape monitoring : Electronic with air cushioned 

compartment and auto - reverse function. 

Material : 

sendust sound head 

Cassette Head Cleaner: 

An non - abrasive cassette unit head cleaning cassette shall be obtained within the 

system manual. 

2.08 Compact Disk Player 

A rack mounted compact disc (CD) player shall be provided. 

The CD Player shall provide the following minimum performance: 

1. One control Load and Play 

2. Continuous repeat of a pre-programmed track selection. 

3. Latching pause control. 

4. Visible display of track number and of total playing time in the inserted disc. 

The CD player shall include a cartridge for pre-loading of 5 or 6 compact discs, with 

random track selection facilities. 

The CD player shall provide the following minim performance: 

1. Frequency response 40 Hz - 20 kHz ± 0.5 dB. 




SEC.25 -4

2. Signal - to - noise ration (S/N) > 100 dB (A). 

3. Channel separation > 85 dB 

4. Harmonic distortion < 0.01 % @ 1 KHz 

2.09 Test Input 

An industry standard socket with gain control (female XLR-3 or standard ¼” jack) 

shall be obtained for the rack for the insertion of external test sources. 

A latching switch shall be provided on the rack for continues broadcast of test message 

2.10 Loudspeakers 

1. Distribution Cone Loudspeakers 

Distribution ceiling mounted cone loudspeaker shall be provided in all areas within 

the suspended ceiling. Loudspeakers shall be round, white with metal grid. 

Distribution loudspeaker shall be high quality core unit sand shall be fitted wit 

bayonet in the mounting ring for rapped and easy fitting. 

Ceiling loudspeaker shall be fitted with suitable acoustic enclosure and shall have a 

built in matching transformer with taps for 100 V @ 6, 3, 1.5 and 0.75 watts. 

Distributed cone loudspeaker shall provide the following minim performance: 

1. Power : 6/9 watts 

2. Frequency range (-3dB): 80 …18000 Hz 

3. Sound pressure (1w/1m): 90 dB 

4. Impedance : 4 

2. Horn Loudspeakers 

Re-Entrant horn loudspeakers shall be provided in plant and high noise level areas. 

The loudspeaker horn and river unit shall be of rugged, impact resistant construction 

and shall meet the following minimum performance: 

1. Handling power: 15 watts 

2. frequency range) -3db): 250 …. 18000 Hz 

3. Acoustic pressure (1w/1m): 118 dB 

4. Basic impedance 8 

5. Matching transformer $@ 100 V : 15, 7.5, and 3.8 watts 

The horn loudspeakers shall be provided with rugged brackets which shall permit a 

Minimum of + - 45 o c (horizontal), site adjustment in one plane only shall not be 




SEC.25 -5

Acceptable. 

Miniature re-entrant horn loudspeakers installed within diecast or plastic rectangular 

assemblies, shall be installed in quiet plant areas (> 75dB (A)) and in service corridors. 

The assemblies shall be temperature rated (aluminum range - 10 o C to + 65 o C). 

Loudspeakers horn shall be suitable for the environment in which they are installed. 

2.11 Column Loudspeakers 

The column loudspeaker shall be a rugged design in metal of indoor and outdoor 

rain protected mounting, with expanded metal fron cover. 

Simple installation shall be accomplished with supplied mounting brackets. 

The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction 

quality for music and speech. 

The column loudspeaker shall be for professional application with high reproduction 

quality for music and a speech. 

The column loudspeaker shall meet the following minimum performance: 

1 . Handling power : 20 watts 

2 . Frequency range : 140 …. 18000 Hz 

3. Acoustic pressure (1w/1m) : 95 dB 

4. Matching transformer @ 50 / 100 V : 20,12.5, .6.2 and 3 watts 

2.12 Cabling 

A. All cables for the sound system are to be twisted 3 core white PVC sheathed - 

PVC insulated copper cables, not less than 2.5mm2. 

B. Microphone cables shall be twisted pairs screened with tinned copper closely 

lapped or braided. The screening shall be sheathed overall with PVC insulation. 

C. Flexible cables shall be hard service cord high temperature thermoplastic 

insulated. 


3.01 Inspection 

A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the system is 

to be installed and function. 

B. Correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely 

completion of the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a 




SEC.25 -6

manner acceptable to the Supervising Engineer. 

3.02 Installation 

A. Power supply to be provided adjacent to the amplifier. 

B. All equipment metal enclosures to be grounded. 

C. A separate un insulated grounding system for connection to cable screens. 

D. Room where amplifier is installed shall be adequately ventilated. 

E. Public address system cable shall not be placed in any raceway or cable trays 

with conductors for lighting or power cables or cable carrying voltages higher 

than 100V. 

F. Power supply shall be durably marked to indicate the class of supply. 

G. All non-current carrying metal parts of equipment shall be grounded. 

H. All fixed cabling shall be carried out as a fixed wiring system. 

I. Joints shall not be permitted. 

J. Boxes shall be fitted in dry locations where possible. Boxes fitted in damp 

locations shall be waterproof pattern. 

K. Wires forming a pair shall not be split. Distribution boxes shall provide separate 

Terminals for all incoming and outgoing wires with cross connection facilities. 

L. One terminal shall contain one wire only. Spare wires shall be left long enough to 

reach any terminal. 

M. A schedule shall be fixed to the inside face of the box cover showing all 

connections and giving details of the wiring. 

N. Cables shall not be run externally. 

O. Adequate protection shall be provided for all accidental damage or unauthorized 

interference. 

P. P/A System shall be connected and interfaced with other sound systems in the 

project. 

3.03 Field Quality Control 

A. The completed installation shall be inspected to ensure the work has been carried 

out in a satisfactory manner and that the methods, materials and components shall 

comply with the specification, drawings and manufacturer's recommendation. 

B. A functional test of the installation shall be made to ensure the installation will 

give satisfactory service under all conditions likely to be experienced. 

C. Earthing connections shall be checked and tested. 




SEC.25 -7

PART 4 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS 

1. Optimus Spain. 

2. Sony Japan. 

3. Seimens Germany. 

END OF SECITON 25 




SEC.25 -8

1- GENERAL 

SECTION 26 

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM 

A. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are 

regularly manufactured and used in the manufacturer’s system. 

B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in 

actual use. 

C. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of 24-hour 

technical assistance program (TAP) from the manufacturer. The TAP shall 

allow for immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the 

end user at no charge. 

D. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-day turn around 

repair express and 24-hour parts replacement. The repair and parts express 

shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer on warranty and nonwarranty items. 

2- DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER 

A. The digital video recorder (DVR) shall provide a high-quality recorder 

capable of storage and playback of images from 1 to 16 camera inputs at a 

simultaneous refreshing recording rate of up to 480 images per second 

(NTSC) at CIF resolution with a CD-RW as standard equipment. Refer to 

paragraph B.8. for total frame rates at 2 CIF and 4 CIF resolutions. The DVR 

shall possess a watchdog system, triplex operation, Windows ® 2000 operating 

system with Service Pack 4 with the latest security updates from Microsoft, 

watermarking of each frame, inputs for external alarms, video motion 

detection, and scheduled event recording. Remote software shall be provided 

for operation via PC, web, and Pocket PC handheld devices. 

B. The DVR shall meet or exceed the following design and performance 

specifications: 

3- PROCESSOR: 

Processing Unit: 

Pentium® 4, 2.5 GHz processor with 2 GB of RAM 

Recording Modes: Continuous, motion detection, alarm activation, or scheduled 

recording 

Storage: Hard drive with 80, 250, 500, 750, or 1,000 GB of storage 




SEC.26 -1

Operating Software: Windows 2000, Service Pack 4 

Signal Format: NTSC/PAL 

Resolution: 

a. NTSC 320 x 240, 640 x 240, 640 x 480, 720 x 240, 

or 720 x 480 pixels, depending on model 

b. PAL 352 x 288, 704 x 288, 704 x 576, 720 x 288, 

or 720 x 576 pixels, depending on model 

Frame Rate: NTSC PAL 

c. CIF 480 ips 400 ips 

d. 2CIF 112 ips 96 ips 

e. 4CIF 80 ips 64 ips 

Functions: Operate as a recorder and a full-duplex multiplexer 

PTZ Control: Pan, tilt, and zoom functions via RS-422 communications 

(D, P, and Coaxitron® protocols) 

Viewing/Recording: Configurations of full screen, 4, 9, 12, or 16 

cameras, or custom-designed display views 

Full-Triplex Operation: Simultaneous playback and live viewing while 

recording live images 

Programmable Schedules: 24 individual schedules 

Program Modes: Motion event, alarm input, or continuous recording 

Hardware Watchdog System: A hardware device to monitor the system 

clock for Windows lockup; upon lockup of the system the recorder shall 

automatically reboot without losing any of the programmed settings 

Password Protection: Four user levels of protection for setup functions, 

operation, and system exiting 

Motion Detection: Built-in motion detection for each camera to start recording 

or to increase the recording rate of the system 

Motion Areas: Selectable detection area and sensitivity for each camera 

Languages: English 

Alarm/Motion Activation: Alarm input will start the unit recording, or 

if already recording, increase the recording rate and image quality 

Pre-Alarm or 

Pre-Motion Recording: Record images for up to 60 seconds before 

the alarm sensor has been activated 

Bandwidth Throttling: Network throttling of transmitted video 

Alarm History Log: Available through a query 

Alarm Outputs: Sixteen dry contact alarm outputs to activate external 

devices 

Motion Activation: When a unit is in scheduled time recording and a 

camera detects motion or an alarm is activated, the system shall begin 

recording the event 

Remote Control: Full remote control operation of pan, tilt, and zoom 

functions via TCP/IP protocol and RS-422 interface 




SEC.26 -2

LAN/WAN Connection: Software and hardware provided for viewing and 

controlling DVR over the network 

Video Quality: High-quality video recording of at least VHS grade 

compared to the original video; supports NTSC or PAL video 

Color Palettes: Minimum of 16 million color palettes 

Gray Scale: 256 shades 

Backup: A backup management system is to be provided to back up data to 

external devices (CD or other storage devices) without interrupting hard disk 

recording 

Hard Disk Drives: From 80 GB up to 1TB 

Programming: On-screen programming and operation through a PC 

keyboard or PS/2 mouse. 

Digital Zoom: Digital zoom of the image on the screen during playback 

modes 

Authentication: Software provided for image verification of each image 

recorded 

4- MECHANICAL: 

Mounting: Capable of being mounted in an EIA-standard 19-inch rack or 

placed on a shelf or desktop 

Connectors: a. Depending on model, eight or sixteen BNC video 

inputs plus eight or sixteen looping video outputs with automatic termination 

b. Two 9-pin, D-type connectors for COM 

1 and COM 2 ports (disabled) 

c. Two 6-pin, mini-DIN connectors for a 

PS/2 mouse and keyboard 

d. One 15-pin, D-type port for a PC 

monitor connection 

e. One 25-pin D-type port for Printer 

connection 

f. One S-video jack for analog monitor 

output (disabled) 

g. Two multiplexed analog video outputs 

(optional) 

h. One RJ-45 connector for network 

connection 

i. Four RJ-45 ports for RS485/RS422 

support 

j. Depending on model, eight or sixteen 

push-in connectors for alarm inputs and 

eight or sixteen push-in connectors for 

relay outputs 

k. Six high-speed USB 2.0 ports 




SEC.26 -3

3. Dimensions: a. Desk Mount 

7.0 (H) x 17 (W) x 19.9 (D) inches 

(17.78 x 43.18 x 50.55 cm) 

b. Rack Mount 

7.0 (H) x 19.0 (W) x 22.0 (D) inches 

(17.78 x 48.26 x 55.88 cm) 

4. Operating Temperature: 50°F to 95°F (10° to 35°C) 

5. Relative Humidity: Maximum 80% noncondensing 

6. Optical Drive: CD-RW 

ELECTRICAL: 

Input Voltage 

100-240 VAC, 50/60Hz, autoranging 

5- REMOTE CLIENT REQUIREMENTS: 

Recommended PC Requirements 

1. Processor: BRAND NAME CORE 2 DUE with 1.8 

MHz minimum processor speed 

2. Memory: 1 GB of RAM 

3. Video Card: AGP VGA with minimum of 256 MB of 

video RAM 

4. Resolution: 1024 x 768 display, 32-bit color, and 

DirectX® 8.1 application programming 

interface 

5. Monitor: SVGA or XVGA with minimum of 1024 x 

768 resolution 

6. Operating System: Windows 2000 (SP4) and Windows XP, 

DirectX 8.1 or better 

7. Internet Explorer: 5.5 or later 

8. Disk Space: 500 MB of free space 

CERTIFICATIONS: 

1. UL 

2. FCC: Class B (Class A if audio option is installed) 

6- DIGITAL CCD DAY/NIGHT COLOR/B-W CAMERA 

A. The DSP color/black-white CCTV camera shall consist of a 1/3-inch format 

CCD imaging chip. 




SEC.26 -4

B. The DSP color/black-white camera shall be a high resolution color camera 

that switches to black and white mode, depending upon available light 

utilizing a removable infrared cut filter in color mode and an optical low-pass 

filter in black and white for optimal image quality. 

C. The DSP color/black-white CCTV camera shall meet or exceed the following 

design and performance specifications: 

COLOR/B-W CCD CAMERA SPECIFICATION 

A. Day/Night Operation: Infrared cut filter with optical low-pass filter 

B. Imaging Device: 1/3-inch interline transfer CCD 

D. Scanning System 

a. NTSC: 525 lines, 2:1 interlace 

b. PAL: 625 lines, 2:1 interlace 

E. Picture Elements 

a. NTSC: 768 (H) x 494 (V) 

b. PAL: 752 (H) x 582 (V) 

E. Sensing Area: 6 mm diagonal 

F. Horizontal Resolution: Color: 480 TV lines 

B-W: 530 TV lines 

G. Auto White Balance: On/off switchable 

H. Auto White Balance Range: 2,500° to 9,500°K 

I. Electronic Shutter Range 

a. NTSC: 1/60 to 1/100,000 second 

b. PAL: 1/50 to 1/100,000 second 

J. Iris Control: Selectable on/off 

K. Auto Iris Lens Type: DC/video drive (autosensing) 

L. Automatic Gain Control: On/off switchable 

M. Electronic Shutter Control: On/off switchable 

N. Backlight Compensation: On/off switchable 

O. Flickerless Mode: On/off switchable 

P. Internal Sync: On/off switchable 

Q. D/N Dusk Dark On/off switchable 

R. Signal Processing: Digital signal processing (DSP) 

S. Gamma Correction: 0.45 

T. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 

U. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: >50 dB 

V. Vertical Phase: Adjustable ±120° 

W. Minimum Illumination 

a. Color Mode: 0.7 lux, F1.2, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% reflectance 

b. B-W Mode: 0.09 lux, F1.2, 40 IRE, AGC on,75% reflectance 




SEC.26 -5

X. Synchronization System: V-Sync/AC line lock/internal 

7- ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Input Voltage 

12-36 VDC +/-10% or 24-28 VAC +/-10% 

B. Power Consumption:

A. The integrated camera and lens shall consist of a high resolution camera and 

varifocal lens 2.7-15mm module that is prepackaged for shipment and which 

shall allow the installation of the enclosure to precede installation of the 

camera and lens. 

B. The integrated camera system shall provide multiple methods of installation, 

including the following: surface mounting onto ceiling or wall, recessed 

mounting in ceiling or wall, and pendant mounting with an optional parapet 

mount. 

C. The DSP color CCTV camera shall meet or exceed the following design and 

performance specifications: 

COLOR CCD CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Interline Transfer Imager: 1/4-inch interline CCD chip 

B. Scanning System: 525 lines, 2:1 interlacing 

C. Horizontal Resolution: 480 TV lines, NTSC or PAL 

D. White Balance: Automatic 

E. White Balance Range: 2500 – 9500K 

F. Iris Control Range: 1/60 to 1/100,000 second 

G. Iris Control Electronic/passive 

H. Gain Control: Selectable by DIP switch (0-20 dB) 

I. Minimum Illumination:

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Construction: ABS plastic back box and surface mount ring 

B. Dome: Polycarbonate, smoked or clear, with a discrete liner 

B. Finish: White or black 

C. Dimensions: Recessed: 5.30 inches (13.46 mm) maximum diameter, 

4.04 inches (10.26 mm) total height, 1.65 inches (4.19 mm) 

recessed in ceiling, 2.39 inches (6.07 mm) exposed below 

ceiling, 3.90 inches (9.91 mm) bubble diameter 

Surface Mount: 5.72 inches (14.53 mm) diameter, 4.04 

inches (10.26 mm) height, 3.90 inches (9.91 mm) bubble 

diameter 

D. Weight: 0.52 lb (0.24 kg) 

MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Camera Mount: 3-axis gimbals mount allowing for 360° of pan, 140° of tilt, 

and 360° of rotation; once view is set, mount will not move 

B. Video Service Connector: On-board service connector port 

C. UTP Output: Available 

D. 4S Box Adapter Plate: Standard for mounting in 4S back box 

CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS 

A. CE Compliant: Class B 

B. UL Listed: Standard 2044 

C. FCC: Class B 

D. cUL: Listed to Canadian safety standards 

WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer’s: 3 years, parts and labor 





SEC.26 -8


SECTION 27 

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNIT (U.P.S.) 

This specification describes a continuous duty, solid state, un-interruptible power 

supply system, hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall operate in 

conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide high 

quality power for computer controller. The system shall consist of an inverter, 

rectifier/battery charger, storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch, 

synchronizing circuitry and an internal maintenance bypass switch. Cooling fan, inlet 

dust filter, and shall have a radio frequency interference suppression filter at the input 

and output. The UPS capacity shall be as shown on the drawings. 

PART 2 MATERIAL 

A. All material and parts comprising the UPS shall be new of current 

manufacture and shall not have been in prior service. 

B. The UPS should be by a reputed manufacturer who is in the 

industry for a minimum period of 20 years. The equipment must be ISO 9000 

certified and manufactured to International standards such as EW/IEC/UTE/VDE, 

The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line reserve transfer system, and 

shall consist of a rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static bypass transfer 

switch, synchronizing equipment, protective devices, internal bypass switch and 

accessories as specified herein that will automatically provide continuity of electric 

power without interruption, upon failure or deterioration of the normal powr supply. 

Continuity of electric power to the load shall be maintained for an emergency period 

with the inverter supplied by the batteries, up to the specifeid maximum time or until 

restoration of the normal power supply. The operation and control for the UPS shall 

be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled logic. The system shall 

provide an alarm indication 10 minutes before the reserve power failure and shal 

provide automatic shutdown of the non essential equipment at the end of a 

programmable time. 

PART 3 MODES OF OPERATION 

The UPS shall be designed to operate in the following modes: 

3.01 Normal 

The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The rectifier/battery 

charger shall derive power from the utility A/C source and supply DC power to the 

inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery. 




SEC.27 - 1

3.02 Emergency 

Upon failure of the utility A/C source the critical load shallbe supplied by the inverter, 

which without any swithcing, obtains its power from the storage battery. There shall 

be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration for the utility A/C 

sources. 

3.03 Recharge 

Upon restoration of the utility A/C source, the rectifier/battery charger powers the 

inverter and simultaneoulsy recharges the battery. This shall be on automatic 

function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load. 

3.04 Bypass Mode 

A. If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal failures 

or in cases of heavy output overload, "the static bypass transfer switch" transfers the 

load to the alternate source without an interruption. Retransfer to the load shall be 

accomplished after the UPS inverter automatically synchronizes to the alternative 

bypass source. 

B. Once the source is synchronized, the static bypass transfer switch shall transfer the 

load from the by-pass source to the UPS inverter to ramp into the load and then 

disconnecting the bypass input source. 

3.05 Maintenance Bypass/Test Mode 

Internal switches shall be provided to isolate the UPS inverter output and static 

bypass transfer switch output from the A/C bypass input source and the load. The 

switches shall enable the UPS inverter and static bypass transfer switch to be tested 

without effecting load operation. 

3.06 Downgrade 

If the battery only is to be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be 

disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of a circuit 

breaker. The UPS shall continue to function as specified. 

3.07 UPS System Rating 

The UPS system shall be as shown on drawings at rated voltage, for a minimum 

autonomy of 10 minutes for the computer equipment. 

The UPS shall be able to supply 125% rated load for at least 10 minutes. 

3.08 Electrical Characteristics: 

Input Rectifier a. Voltage : 3Ph + N400 / 230V 

b. Tolerance ± 20% 




SEC.27 - 2

c. Frequency : 50Hz ± 10% 

3.09 Output Inverter 

a. Voltage : 3Ph + N400 / 230V 

b. Tolerance stable condition ± 1.5% 

c. Overall harmonic distortion on linear load:

D. The ground space taken up by the static uninterruptible power 

supply shall be small. 

E. For case of installation, particulary when passing through 

doorways, staircase, its height shall not exceed 1.8M and it is the supplier's 

responsibility to unload the UPS. 

3.12 Battery 

A. The Battery shall be of Sealed lead calcium type. 

B. The Battery to be UL approved for UL standard (UL 924). 

C. The Battery must carry a life warranty of 10 years. 

D. The Batteries to be installed in matching enclosure similar to the 

UPS. 

E. The autonomy for the batteries will be 2 hours. 

3.13 System Status and Control 

The UPS shall be provided with a system status and control panel to provide 

monitoring and control of the complete system. The UPS shall be equipped with a 

self test system identifying the faulty subassembly in the event of a problem. 

Indications, measurements and alarms together with pwor history and battery 

autonomy shall be shown on a liquid crystal display panel. 

A. Metering 

A meter shall be provided with the capability of monitoring any of the following 

system functions: 

a. AC output voltage (L-L). 

b. AC output current/phase (L-N). 

c. AC output frequency. 

d. DC voltage. 

e. Battery DC current (Charge/discharge). 

B. System Control 

The following controls shall be provided for the system: 

a. Inverter off push button. 

B . Lamp test push button. 

C. System Alarm 




SEC.27 - 4

Visual Alarms: The following status shall be signaled: 

a. Rectifier-charger in operation. 

B.. Load on inverter. 

c. Load on standby mains. 

d. General Alarm. 

D. Also the following signaling shall be available. 

a. Battery problem. 

b. Manual charging cycle running. 

c. End of battery autonomy. 

d. Manual bypass in maintenance position. 

e. Standby mains outside tolerance limits. 

3.14 Environment 

Temperature: a. Storage: 50oC 

b. Operating: 40oC 

c. Noise: 50 to 65 dB at 1M 

b. Standard: EN 50091 - IEC 146 – 4 





SEC.27 - 5


1.01 HAND DRYERS 

SECTION 28 

ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS 

A. Dryer cover shall be one piece, heavy duty die cast zinc alloy. It shall be lightweight, 

unbreakable, rustproof fitted with an insulated pushbutton and 360 degrees revolving 

nozzle. Hand dryer shall be surface mounted to a wall plate. Supply dryer via back 

box. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded throughout. 

B. Motor shall be brushless and shall be insulated by a resilient mounting. Motor shall be 

protected by its own fuse. Fan shall be large single inlet centrifugal type. Fan shall be 

mounted directly on motor shaft and fan and motor shall be insulated from the dryer to 

obtain maximum dampening effect. Heater element shall be 2 kW rating and shall have 

its own protective device. Hand dryer shall be capable of providing air at 70 degrees C 

for an adjustable period of 10s to 30s. Motor and accessories shall be designed for 

operation on a 230 Volt, single phase, 50 Hz. power supply system. 

B. Hand dryer shall be equipped with infra-red proximity switch to switch on and off 

automatically as hands approach and are withdrawn. 

Hand dryer shall be fitted with indestructible metal casing. 

Hand dryer shall be provided with integrated shaver socket 230/115V. 

1.02 INSTALLATION: 

Install hand dryers according to manufacturer's instructions and in locations shown in 

Drawings centered on outlet box. 




ELECTRIC HAND DRYERS 

SEC.28 - 1

SECTION 29 

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 



A. Access shall be afforded at all times to the Engineer to enable him to inspect the 

Electrical Equipments. 

B. Upon completion of the Electrical Equipment installation or part of the installation, the 

Contractor shall carry out and be responsible for testing and commissioning it, in stages 

if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of performing all of 

its functions in accordance with the Specification and to the satisfaction of the 

Engineer. Any Electrical Equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced and 

retested by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

C. All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements of the relevant standards 

and regulations as may be stated or implied in the Specification or otherwise agreed by 

the Engineer in writing. 

D. The Contractor shall submit for Engineer's approval, no later than 6 weeks prior to the 

commencement of testing and commissioning, a schedule of all Electrical Equipment 

tests and commissioning procedures that he intends to carry out to prove that the 

Electrical Equipment complies with the requirements of the Specification together with 

his proposed programme for such testing and commissioning. 

E. Tests shall not commence before the schedule of tests has been approved and such other 

tests as may be required by the Engineer shall be included within the schedule of tests. 

F. The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days' notice of the date 

by which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation. 

Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date 

on such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor. 

G. The tests shall as far as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct. 

H. The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, consumables, apparatus 

and instruments required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time 

thereafter furnish to the Engineer a total of six certificates of all tests performed and 

accepted, signed by the Contractor, or an authorised person acting on his behalf, as 

prescribed in the appropriate regulations and specifications. 

I. If any part of the Electrical Equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests 

shall, if required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put 

in hand such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in 

the Contract and any expense which the Owner may have incurred by reason of such 

further tests may be deducted from the Contract price. 




SEC.29 - 1

J. Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the 

performance of the Electrical Equipment after erection as a complete working system in 

all respects. 

K. Each completed system within the installation shall be tested as a whole under normal 

site operating conditions to ensure that each component functions correctly in 

conjunction with the rest of the system. 

L. The Contractor's particular attention is drawn to the requirements of Section 01650 and 

01700 of the Specification in regard to testing, commissioning and handover of the 

Works. 

PART 2 TESTING 

2.01 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. The Contractor is to programme, oversee, co-ordinate and record all the testing and 

commissioning of the electrical systems. This will be carried out in co-ordination with 

those elements undertaken by the mechanical services Contractor. The electrical 

Contactor shall allow for liaising and attendance and providing all necessary test and 

general data information at the right times. 

B. The systems are to undergo phases of testing and commissioning, in accordance with 

the following:- 

Phase 1. 

Phase 2. 

Phase 3. 

Phase 4. 

Phase 5. 

Works testing and quality assurance of elements; 

Site installation, wiring, checks, performance and operational tests for 

all elements; 

Sub system group operational tests/performance tests; 

Complete system operational and performance tests on dummy loads; 

Complete system operational and performance tests on Client loads. 

C. All the electrical systems, whether mentioned in this section or not, will be subject to 

testing and commissioning. 

2.02 ELECTRICAL TESTING 

A. At the completion of the electrical installation for each facility it shall be tested to 

ensure that it is satisfactory and complies with the requirements of the Specification. 

B. Tests of the installation shall be carried out in the following sequence: 

1. Ring-main continuity 




SEC.29 - 2

2. Protective conductor continuity, including main and supplementary 

equipotential bonding 

3. Earth electrode resistance 

4. Measurement of insulation resistance including site built assemblies and 

distribution cables 

5. Check of protection by electrical separation, barriers and enclosures 

6. Measurement of the insulation on non-conducting floors and walls 

7. Check of phase rotation 

8. Verification of polarity 

9. Measurement of earth fault loop impedance 

10. Test of operation of residual current devices 

11. All external distribution cables, both high and low voltage in accordance with 

the relevant standard(s). 

12. Fault simulation on protective devices or control system of stand-by generator, 

transformers, 13.8 KV cubicles, power distribution boards, motor control 

centers, etc... 

13. Load test on stand by generator, sub-station, power distribution boards, 

panelboards, etc... 

14. All 13.8 kV cables and equipment shall be pressure tested. The Contractor shall 

submit a method statement for the test procedure, voltage levels and safety 

precautions. 

2.03 LOW CURRENT SYSTEMS TESTING 

A. All special low current systems such as telephone, intercom, public address, fire 

detection and alarm, Data, CCTV, CATV, security, sound, etc. shall be tested as 

specified herein or recommended by the manufacturers. 

B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing the procedure to test these 

systems as a whole for the site. 

C. At the completion of these special systems installation for each facility, these shall be 

tested individually for each facility then it should be tested with their main control 

panel, such as fire detection and alarm, telephone, CATV etc... so that to see the good 

performance of these systems as a whole. 




SEC.29 - 3

PART 3 COMMISSIONING 

3.01 GENERAL 

A. All Electrical Equipment and integral systems shall be commissioned in accordance 

with the relevant standards and regulations given in the Specification and to the 

recommendations of specialist suppliers (e.g. Switchboards, Standby Generators, Fire 

Detection and Alarm System, Public Address System, Cables, etc.). 

B. Full operational tests shall be carried out on all systems to demonstrate that they operate 

in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. 

3.02 SWITCHBOARDS 

A. Design tests of: Rated continuous current 

Short circuit current 

Enclosure dielectric. 

B. Production tests of: Dielectric 

Mechanical operation 

Grounding 

Control wiring 

Electrical operation. 

3.03 STANDBY GENERATOR 

A. Field erected fuel piping shall be tested with air pressure and proven right at 150 

percent of the working pressure for a period of two hours. 

B. Shops tests shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements: 

1. Unless otherwise directed, all tests shall be performed in the presence of the 

Supervising Engineer. 

2. Each assembled engine and generator shall be tested in accordance with the 

manufacturer's customary practice. 

3. All components shall be checked, lube-oil leaks shall be remedied. 

C. Following the complete installation of the generating unit and its associated equipment, 

field tests shall be conducted. The Contractor shall provide all instruments and supplies 

required for the tests. Fuel instruments and instrumentation procedures to be followed 

shall be appropriate for the tests to be performed. Prior to the startup of any generating 

units, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all piping 

systems have been cleaned. 




SEC.29 - 4

D. Sequence of Field Tests: 

1. Check all engine and driven unit mounting bolts. 

2. Check alignment of engine and generator by dial indication. 

3. Check generator motor air gap. 

4. Check generator and exciter insulation resistance with an insulation resistance 

tester. 

5. Perform engine manufacturer's recommended prestarting checks. This shall 

include a test of the prestart lube-oil pump to determine if adequate oil pressure 

is provided. 

6. Start engine and make engine manufacturer's after starting checks during a 

reasonable run-in or warm-up period. 

7. Operate generator with step loads of 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% for 7 hours and 

110% for 1 hour rated load. Record data hourly, including current, voltage, 

frequency KW and temperature information. A load bank has to be provided by 

the Contractor. 

8. Increase engine speed by means of the governor. Check speed at which 

overspeed device trips. 

9. Check functioning of high coolant temperature trip by restricting air into the 

radiator. 

10. Shut down engine and record pressure at which low oil pressure device trips. 

E. Checks to be made during field testing: 

1. During the tests, all operations of which the controls on the panel and at the 

switchboard are capable shall be performed to assure that all controls are 

functioning in a satisfactory manner. 

2. At several points during the tests, each instrument on the switchboard and 

engine panel shall be observed to assure that all instruments and gauges are 

functioning properly. 

3. During the tests, all auxillary and accessory equipment, all valves including 

pilot valves, and the injection pumps shall be checked to assure proper 

operation. 

4. During the 100 percent load test, pyrometer reading of each cylinder of each 




SEC.29 - 5

engine shall be taken and recorded at 1/2 hour intervals. 

F. After completion of the tests, a general inspection shall be made for: 

1. Leaks in the engine, piping systems, tanks, etc. 

2. Blow-by 

3. Crankcase contamination 

4. Crankshaft misalignment 

5. Generator misalignment and damage to generator bearings. 

3.04 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 

A. Wiring runs shall be tested for continuity, short circuits and grounds before system is 

energized. Resistance, current and voltage readings shall be made as work progresses. 

B. A systematic record shall be maintained of all readings using schedules or charts of 

tests and measurements. Areas shall be provided on the logging form for readings, 

dates and witnesses. The Engineer shall be notified before the start of the required tests. 

All items found at variance with the drawings or this specification during testing or 

inspection by the Engineer, shall be corrected. 

C. Test reports shall be delivered to the Engineer as completed. 

D. All test equipment, instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the system tests 

shall be made available by the installing contractor. The following equipment shall be a 

minimum for conducting the tests: 

1. Ladders and scaffolds as required to access all installed equipment. 

2. Multimeter for reading voltage, current and resistance. 

3. Intelligent device programmer/tester. 

4. Two way radios, flashlights, smoke generation devices and supplies. 

5. Laptop computer with programming software for any required programme 

revision. 

6. A manufacturer recommended device for measuring air flow through air duct 

smoke detector sampling assemblies. 

7. Decibel meter. 




SEC.29 - 6

E. In addition to the testing specified to be performed by the installing contractor, the 

installation shall be subject to test by the Engineer. 

F. A written acceptance test procedure (ATP) for testing the fire alarm system components 

and installation will be prepared by the Contractor and submitted for review and 

approval to the Engineer in accordance with NFPA 72, and this specification. The 

contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the ATP, demonstrating the 

function of the system and verifying the correct operation of all system components, 

circuits, and programming. 

G. A programme matrix shall be prepared by the installing Contractor referencing each 

alarm input to every output function affected as a result of an alarm condition on that 

input. In the case of outputs programmed using more complex logic functions involving 

"any", "or", "not", "count", "time", and "timer" statements; the complete output 

equation shall be referenced in the matrix. 

H. A complete listing of all device labels for alphanumeric annunciator displays and 

logging printers shall be prepared by the installing contractor prior to the ATP. 

I. In conducting the ATP, the Engineer shall request demonstration of any or all input and 

output functions. The items tested shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 

1. System wiring shall be tested to demonstrate correct system response and 

correct subsequent system operation in the event of: 

a. Open, shorted and grounded intelligent analog or network signalling 

circuits. 

b. Open, shorted and grounded conventional zone circuits. 

c. Open, shorted and grounded speaker telephone circuits. 

d. Primary power or battery disconnected. 

e. Intelligent device removal. 

f. Incorrect device at address. 

g. Printer trouble, off line or out of paper. 

2. System evacuation alarm indicating appliances shall be demonstrated as 

follows: 

a. All alarm notification appliances actuate as programmed 

b. Audibility and visibility at required levels. 

3. System indications shall be demonstrated as follows: 




SEC.29 - 7

a. Correct message display for each alarm input at the control panel, each 

remote alpha-numeric display and each CRT terminal. 

b. Correct annunciator light for each alarm input at each annunciator and 

colour graphic terminal as shown on the drawings. 

c. Correct printer logging for all system activity. 

4. System off-site reporting functions shall be demonstrated as follows: 

a. Correct zone transmitted for each alarm input 

b. Trouble signals received for disconnect 

5. Secondary power capabilities shall be demonstrated as follows: 

a. System primary power shall be disconnected for a period of time as 

specified herein. At the end of that period, an alarm condition shall be 

created and the system shall perform as specified for a period as 

specified. 

b. System primary power shall be restored for forty eight hours and system 

charging current shall be normal trickle charge for a fully charged 

battery bank. 

c. System battery voltages and charging currents shall be checked at the 

fire alarm control panel using the test codes and displayed on the LCD 

display. 

6. Fireman's HVAC override system functions shall be demonstrated as follows: 

a. Operation of key lockout switch preventing unauthorised operation of 

controls. 

b. On/Off controls of each controlled element and test of interaction of 

other automatic and manual control functions while in the over-ride 

mode. 

c. Correct status display of monitored elements. 

d. Correct logging of activity to printer and historical memory as 

programmed. 

J. In the event of system failure to perform as specified and programmed during the ATP 

procedure, at the discretion of the Engineer, the test shall be terminated. The installing 

contractor shall retest the system, correcting all deficiencies and providing test 

documentation to the Engineer. The Engineer may elect to require the complete ATP to 

be preformed again if, in his opinion, modifications to the system warrant complete 

retesting. 




SEC.29 - 8

K. Changes made to a systems configuration program required by the acceptance inspector 

or to comply with the systems operating parameters shall be validated to insure that in 

making the software programming change no other part of the systems operation was 

effected. The validation shall utilize systems software which meets the requirements of 

NFPA 72 section 7-1.6 "System Reacceptance Testing" as specified in the NFPA 72 

National Fire Alarm Code 1993 edition. Change validation methods other than that 

described will not be considered acceptable and shall allow the acceptance inspector to 

require the complete ATP to be performed again. 

PART 4 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING 

4.01 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING OF CLIENTS STAFF: 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of suitably qualified personnel for 

the instruction and supervision of the staff nominated by the Client at Site in the 

operation and routine maintenance of all Electrical Equipment and associated works. 

The instruction and training shall be for periods of six hours daily for twelve days after 

the satisfactory commissioning of the installation and as necessary, after each 

subsequent commissioning of a system or part thereof. 

B. The Contractor shall accept for training up to four technicians in every system 

nominated by the Client who will be assigned to train in all aspects of the installation 

on Site during operation of the installation. 

C. The cost of the training will be the Contractor's responsibility. During the training 

period the salaries of the trainees, their subsistence and all their out-of-pocket expenses 

will be the responsibility of the Owner. 

D. Before the commencement of such training, the Contractor shall have available 

additional copies of sufficient As Built drawings, record drawings, operating and 

maintenance instructions and spare parts lists referred to Section 16010 Basic Electrical 

Requirements, of the Specification so that the staff nominated can fully understand the 

operation and maintenance of the equipment. Two months prior to the commencement 

of commissioning and training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for 

approval, the schedule for testing, commissioning and training programme. 





SEC.29 - 9

Electrical Approved Manufacturer List 

Item 

Description 

(1) (2) (3) 

Manufacturer Origin Manufacturer Origin Manufacturer Origin 

1 Main Distribution Boards Schnider France Moeller Germany ABB Sweden 

2 Distribution Boards Schnider France Moeller Germany ABB Sweden 

3 Isolating Switch Schnider France Moeller Germany Legrand France 

4 Contactors and controls Schnider France ABB Sweden Moeller Germany 

5 Circuit Breakers Schnider France Moeller Germany ABB Sweden 

6 Wires and Cables Synergy Local Pirelli General Turkey Draka UK 

7 

Wiring Accessories, Sockets & 

switchs Schnider France Legrand France Bticino Italy 

8 PVC Conduits & Accessories Visman Local Mericaf Local Kasem plast Local 

9 Wiring for Fire Alarm System Teldor Local Pirelli Turkey Cavical Italy 

10 Wiring for Data System R&M Swiss Teldor Local Synergy Local 

11 Data Outlet & Patch Panel R&M Swiss 3M Germany Legrand France 

12 Public Address System TOA Japan Bosch Holland Honeywell USA 

13 Fire Alarm System Simplex USA Notifier USA Morely Canada 

14 Comunication Sysem Aiphone Japan Ormel Italy Comelit Italy 

15 Access Control System Honeywell USA GE USA Cardax Newzland 

16 CCTV System Bosch Holland Honeywell USA Pelco USA 

17 Lighting Fixtures Disano Italy Thorn UK Philips Holland 


Consultant Engineers 31 ِApproved Manufacturer List

Electrical Approved Manufacturer List 

Item 

Description 

18 Cable Glands & Accessories BICC UK 

(1) (2) (3) 

Manufacturer Origin Manufacturer Origin Manufacturer Origin 

OBO 

Bettermann Germany Wiska UK 

19 Telephone & PABX System Panasonic Japan Ericson Sweden Siemens Germany 

OBO 

20 Floor Boxes Wiremold UK Bettermann Germany Legrand France 

21 UPS APC USA Marlin Gerin France Makelsan Turkish 

22 Automatic Hand Dryers Wandsworth UK Vortice Italy 

23 SMATV System Hirshman Germany Fuba Germany Polytron Germany 

24 Stand by Diesel Generator SDMO France Caterpillar UK Perkins UK 

25 Lightning Protection Furse UK Helita France Indelic France 

26 Power Factor Correction 

Cable Trays, Ladders & Metalic 

27 Cable Trunking 

Schneider 

Electric France EKG Germany Simens Germany 

OBO 

Bettermann Germany Nidax Germany Wiremold UK 

28 Elevators Shindler Swiss Otis France Mitsubishi Japan 

Notes: 

1. Given list of manufactures is intended only to be used as a guideline for 

materials/equipment quality objective. 

2. Contractors can provide equal or better quality of that stated, and as per engineer 

approval. 


Consultant Engineers 32 ِApproved Manufacturer List



Project Name: 


Phase 1 

Sports Center 


Volume VI 


C- Mechanical Specification 

SPORT HALL 



Through: 

United Nations Development Programme 


Designed by 



2009 

1

DIVISION 2 

DIVISION 2 – MECHANICAL WORKS 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Section 1000 - Basic Mechanical Requirements....................... 

Section 1001 - Electrical Requirement s for Mechanical 

Equipment ......................................................... 

Section 1002 - Mechanical Identification.................................. 

Section 1100 - Plumbing Piping................................................ 

Section 1101 - Plumbing Valves............................................... 

Section 1102 - Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets....... 

Section 1103 - Plumbing Specialties......................................... 

Section 1104 - Plumbing Fixtures............................................. 

Section 1105 - Plumbing Piping Insulation............................... 

Section 1106 - Water Heaters.................................................... 

Section 1107 - Plumbing Pumps 

Section 1300 - Fire Protection Systems..................................... 

Section 1301 - Fire Protection Piping ....................................... 

Section 1302 - Fire Pumps ........................................................ 

Section 1303 - Fire Protection Specialties ................................ 

Section 1401 - Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning....... 

Section 1402 - HVAC Thermal Insulation................................ 

Section 1403 - Ductwork........................................................... 

Section 1404 - Ductwork Accessories....................................... 

Section 1405 - Air Outlets and Inlets

PART 1 - GENERAL 


SECTION 1000 

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. This Section covers the basic general requirements applicable to all Division 

1 works that shall be provided for by the Contractor. 

B. The following specifications may be used as a guide for pricing but the Contractor 

will be fully responsible for the mechanical services as indicated diagrammatically 

on the drawings and to supply complete Mechanical Services Installations to the 

approval of the Engineer and complying with the aesthetic requirements of the 

Architect/Interior Designer. 

1.02 CALCULATIONS 

A. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with the constructional details of the 

buildings and exterior works both before and during the course of erection 

and shall take his own particulars with regard to the installation of 

mechanical equipment. The Contractor shall check the sizes of all 

mechanical equipment taking into account any additions or deletions required 

to ensure the installations fit into the room or other spaces allocated and in 

relation to other plant and equipment being provided. 

B. The Contractor shall undertake and prepare all necessary calculations and 

drawings relating to the mechanical systems and equipment and for all 

associated foundation, structural and builder's and services work, except 

where specifically defined otherwise in the Specification and/or on the 

Drawing. 

C. The Contractor shall provide and submit to the Engineer all calculations, 

drawings and supporting data for the mechanical equipment. 

D. The Contractor shall provide calculations, details, drawings and technical 

data to enable the Engineer to ascertain the correctness of the specialist 

designs of the associated foundations, supports, bases and fixings. 

E. All calculations shall use final approved building construction elements, U- 

values including curtain walling system, other glazing types, floors, walls, 

roof. The Contractor shall use software based thermal modelling 

programme(s) capable of demonstrating building thermal storage and 3- 

dimensional heat transfer for external element construction. 


A. The Contractor shall provide submittals as directed in the individual sections. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 

Basic Mechanical Requirements 

1000-1

B. The Contractor shall provide method statements for installation procedures 

of ductwork, pipe work, plant, equipment and BMS/automatic controls and 

all specialised systems. 

C. Refer to Division (1). 

1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall provide for approval working drawings of the whole 

mechanical works. The drawings shall include, but not necessarily be limited 

to the followings:- 

1. Co-ordinated general arrangements of all services to a scale of 

not less than 1:50 

2. Co-ordinated detailed layouts of plant rooms and similar 

spaces to a scale of not less than 1:20. 

3. Schedules of all equipment to be installed, together with 

starting and full load current and running power consumption 

along with any integral power factor correction capacitors. 

4. Indicate with accurate dimensions sizes and positions of all 

plant, equipment, pipes, thermal and acoustic insulation, 

conduits, trunking, under floor ducting, cable tray, cables 

together with all inspection points and cable joints. 

5. Fully indicate all ductwork, pipe work, sizes and positions of 

all plant equipment and valves together with all inspection 

points and test positions. 

6. Fully indicate all builders’ work requirements inclusive of all 

foundations, bases, plinths, sumps and holes together with the 

overall sizes and masses of the plant concerned. 

7. Indicate the number, size and services for every cable, duct, 

pipe for every service within the building. 

8. Indicate all equipment and control wiring diagrams for all 

systems. 

9. Show all pipes, cables and ducts in pits and service ducts on 

drawings to a scale of 1:50 or larger. 

10. Show clearly all plumbing and drainage and setting out 

dimensions for all drainage pipe work and manholes, both 

within the building and throughout. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-2

11. Services zoning principle in cross-section for each ceiling 

void area having extensive engineering. The sections are to 

demonstrate the sizes, dimensions of zones allocated for 

separate HVAC, public health, electrical, and other 

engineering services along with services cross-over zones, 

support/brackets zones thermal insulation, clearance and 

maintenance allowances to demonstrate the correct 

coordination. 

12. Fully indicate extent and construction/installation details for all acoustic, 

noise and vibration control systems including floating floor constructions, 

inertia bases and plant room. 

B. The symbols used for each service for all working drawings shall be shown 

on separate drawings. 

C. In addition to the working drawings, the Contractor shall obtain and provide 

at the request of the Engineer, two sets of all manufacturers’ detailed 

drawings for all items of plant, equipment, apparatus and materials. These 

drawings shall be suitably titled and have drawings references number added. 

Specific requirements are given in the individual specification Sections. 

D. All drawings, diagrams and schedules called for in this clause shall be 

submitted to the Engineer for examination and approval. 

E. The Contractor shall make due allowance for an approval/comment period 

and it must be clearly understood that the correctness of the submitted 

information will directly affect this comment/approval period. 

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating all mechanical, 

electrical, lift, fire protection, plumbing, drainage and irrigation works, and 

other engineering systems such that each may be installed in a proper 

manner, ensuring correct performance and allowing adequate maintenance 

access. All services shall be installed such that the positioning of ducts, 

pipes, cables, and all items of equipment avoid conflict. The Contractor's 

working drawings shall indicate any services co-ordination needs prior to 

submission to the Engineer for approval; tender drawing shall not be reissued 

as working drawings. 

1.05 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS 

A. Following approval of the Contractor's drawings by the Engineer, they shall 

constitute "Construction Drawings" and the E and M equipment shall be 

manufactured and installed in accordance with those approved drawings. The 

acceptance by the Engineer of any such drawing shall not relieve the 

Contractor of his responsibility under the Contract and shall not commit the 

Engineer or make the Engineer liable for any mistake of the manufacturer's 

deficiencies in strength or efficiency in operation of any part of any item for 

its specified purpose. 

B. The Engineer reserves the right subsequently to amend or add to the 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-3

Construction Drawings as may be necessary or expedient. 

C. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer, immediately after approval of each 

detailed drawing, one copy and two dye-line prints. 

1.06 REGULATIONS 

A. The installation materials and components shall comply with all relevant 

statutory instructions and regulations current at the date of tender, whether so 

detailed or not. In particular, the following regulations and standards must be 

followed: - 

1. Standards issued by Jordanian Standards Organisation 

2. British Standard Specifications 

3. British Standard Code of Practice 

4. UK IEE Regulations for Electrical Installation 

5. US National Electrical Code 

6. US National Electrical Safety Code 

7. UK Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers 

(CIBSE) 

8. The American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air 

Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 

9. Electrical Regulations issued by JEPCO 

10. US Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National 

Association (SMACNA) 

11. UK HVCA DW142 Ductwork specification. 

12. US National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 

13. IEE Regulations for Electrical Equipment of Buildings 

14. Local Laws, Rules and Regulations 

15. U.K. CIBSE Commissioning codes for Air, Water, 

Refrigeration and Controls Installations. 

One copy of all the above codes and standards in hard-copy are to be held on site for 

the duration of the contract and be available for reference by the Contractors and 

Clients Site Supervision Teams. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-4

1.07 CLIMATIC AND OPERATING CONDITIONS 

A. City : palestine 

B. Elevation : 850m above sea level 

C. Design conditions : Outdoor dry bulb summer 38 °C (For calculating heat 

gain) 

: Outdoor dry bulb summer 40 °C (For chiller selection) 

: Outdoor dry bulb winter 0°C 

1.08 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components for 

each system are mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient 

systems complying with the Drawings and Specification. Corresponding 

parts throughout the Works shall be made to gauge and be interchangeable 

wherever possible. The Contractor shall, when required by the Engineer, 

prove interchange ability by the actual interchange of the various parts. 

B. All articles and materials specified to conform to Jordanian, British and other 

standards shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the appropriate standard 

number specified except where marking is impracticable when relevant 

documents shall include this information. 

C. All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

The Contractor shall maintain a competent supervising engineer and 

supervisors for each specialisation and for each section of the work on Site 

throughout the whole of the time to the completion of the works. The 

Engineer shall give prior approval to the appointment of this supervising 

engineer and shall have the authority to withdraw this approval at any time. 

No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work that is normally 

carried out by a skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and 

proficient in the trade concerned. The Engineer shall have the authority to 

require any tradesman to demonstrate his proficiency to the satisfaction of 

the Engineer. 

1.09 INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS 

A. The Engineer and his duly authorised representative shall have at all 

reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to inspect and examine 

the materials and workmanship of mechanical equipment being 

manufactured there, and if part of such equipment is being manufactured on 

other premises, the Contractors shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly 

authorised representative permission to inspect as if that equipment was 

manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such inspection, 

examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-5

obligation under the Contract. 

B. All works, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as 

necessary at the Contractor's own expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

C. Where the mechanical equipment is a composite unit of several individual 

pieces manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as 

one complete working unit, at the manufacturer's works, to the relevant test 

or tests required. 

D. The Contractor shall submit his proposed programme of tests for the 

Engineer' approval six weeks before the commencement of testing. 

E. The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall 

not in any way relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory Site tests 

after erection as specified. 

F. The Contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least ten clear 

days in writing, of the date and the place at which any mechanical Equipment 

will be ready for testing as provided in the Contract and the Engineer shall 

thereupon at his discretion notify the Contractor of his intention either to 

release such part upon receipt of works tests certificates or of his intention to 

inspect such part. The Contractor shall forward to the Engineer six duly 

certified copies of all relevant test readings. 

E. The Contractor shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, 

electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus, instruments and other things as may 

be reasonably demanded to carry out efficiently such tests of the mechanical 

equipment in accordance with the Contract, and shall provide facilities to the 

Engineer or to his authorised representative to accomplish such testing. 

Where inspection or testing is to be carried out at a Sub-contractor's works, a 

representative of the Contractor shall be present. 

F. Works tests shall also be carried out with due consideration is given to the 

Site conditions under which the mechanical equipment is required to 

function. The test certificates shall give all details of such tests. 

G. Specific performance works tests are described in the relevant Sections of 

Division 9, and include all major items of Mechanical, HVAC and Plumbing 

plant and equipment. 

1.10 CERTIFIED DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all "Certified" drawings 

from manufacturers of mechanical equipment, prior to their manufacture and 

installation. A "Certified' manufacturer's drawing shall mean a drawing 

which is prepared by a manufacturer showing the exact dimensions and 

details of items of the mechanical equipment, as they will be supplied and 

installed on the site. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-6

1.11 SAMPLES 

A. The Contractor shall provide a sample, properly labelled, of all fittings, valves, 

insulation, cocks, unions, grilles, dampers, switchgear, cables and other like 

accessories described in the Specification or as required by the Engineer. 

1.12 PROTECTION AND CARE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 

A. All mechanical equipment shall be packed in robust containers to prevent 

damage and mishandling during transport to Site. Before dispatch from 

works, all mechanical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, protected 

against damage, deterioration, corrosion and ingress of dirt and packed and 

protected suitable for prolonged storage in a humid and saline atmosphere. 

B. During storage and erection at the Site, the mechanical equipment shall be 

kept clean and free from dirt and debris, and water shall not be allowed to 

remain in any pockets of the equipment. All items of mechanical equipment 

shall be stored clear of the ground on suitable timbers to the approval of the 

Engineer. 

C. All mechanical equipment, particularly electrical and other sensitive 

instrumentation shall at all times be protected so that it is not subject to 

damage by rainwater, moisture, dust, etc., from any source. Mechanical 

equipment that may be damaged by heat or sun shall be protected 

accordingly. All open pipe and duct ends whether installed or in store shall 

be fitted with plastic caps or suitable protective covering. 

1.13 GUARDS 

A. A guard shall be provided for all open unprotected intakes to axial fans, 

centrifugal flow fans, for V-belt drives. 

B. Fan guards shall be manufactured by the fan maker, of galvanised steel wire 

mesh, not greater than 25mm attached to a rigid galvanised steel rod 

framework. 

C. Guards to V-belt drives shall be made of galvanised steel wire of at least 12 

gauge, with a mesh not greater than 12.5mm attached to a rigid galvanised 

framework of rods of not less than 10mm diameter. The guard shall be 

readily removable to permit the belts to be changed. Adequate access panels 

shall be provided in the side of the guard to allow tachometer readings of the 

two shafts to be taken and belt tension tested. Allowance shall be made for 

the adjustment of the motor on its slide rails. 

1.14 CLEANING 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all mechanical equipment at 

all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cleaning shall be carried out 

notwithstanding the fact that the installation or any part thereof may be in use 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-7

or partial use within the premises in occupation by others. A Certificate of 

Completion will not be issued until the Engineer is satisfied that all dirt, 

jointing materials and other extraneous and injurious materials have been 

removed. 

1.15 AIR CONDITIONED STORES 

A. The Contractor shall provide air-conditioned site stores for all goods that 

deteriorate when subjected to the site climatic conditions detailed. The 

contractor will adhere strictly to the Manufacturer's instructions with regard 

to storage temperatures for all materials being used for the construction of 

this project. 

1.16 PAINTING 

A. The preparation, painting and treatment of mechanical equipment surfaces 

shall be in accordance with relevant items in Division 9 and Division 9. 

B. Full details of the manufacturer's standard finishes shall be given to the 

Engineer for his approval prior to manufacturer. Special care shall be taken 

to ensure standard finishes are suitable for the particular conditions 

applicable to the individual items of plant. 

C. Any damage to paintwork that occurs shall be made good by the Contractor 

at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

E. All bright metal parts shall be covered before despatch with an approved 

protective compound and protected adequately during delivery to Site. After 

erection these parts shall be cleaned with a correct solvent and polished 

bright where required. 

F. Machined mating surfaces such as gear teeth, etc., shall be coated with a 

thick layer of grease. Other machined surfaces shall be given a coat of rustpreventing 

paint, which shall be readily removable when required. 

G. Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of special items such as 

pumps, compressors, electric motors, gear boxes, switch gear, etc., to apply a 

high standard of protective enamel paintwork in the shop before despatch, 

this will be acceptable provided any subsequent damage to the paintwork is 

made good by the Contractor, at his own cost. The preferred finish is light 

grey. 

H. The inside of outdoor control cubicles, cabinets, etc., where condensation is 

liable to occur, shall be coated with an approved anti-condensation 

composition. 

I. The Contractor shall obtain the paint manufacturer's guarantee that each coat 

of paint is compatible with the previous and subsequent coats so that peeling, 

flaking and other faults do not occur. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-8

J. The Contractor shall include for painting all pipes, ducts, flange edges, etc., 

prior to their being insulated. 

1.17 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES 

A. Nameplates: Each item of mechanical equipment and plant shall have the 

manufacturer's name or trademark on a corrosion-resistant nameplate, 

securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The manufacturer's name or 

trademark may be cast integrally, stamped or otherwise permanently marked 

upon the item of the equipment. The nameplate shall show the equipment 

reference number, date of manufacture and the capacity. Such other 

information as the manufacturer may consider necessary to complete 

identification shall be shown on the nameplates. 

1.18 LABELS 

A. Identification labels of plastic laminate or similar approved materials engraved black 

on white unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm "line" style letters shall be 

fixed on all controls, switches and distribution gear, by means of at least two brass 

screws. Socket outlets of all voltages shall be similarly identified or engraved. 

B. The labels shall bear the identification shown on the Drawings, such as 

indication, designation, function and, where necessary, phase, voltage, 

current, frequency, pressure and temperature. All labels shall be in Arabic 

and English. 

1.19 LUBRICATION 

A. The Contractor shall furnish a complete schedule of recommended oils and 

other lubricants. The number of different types of lubricants shall be kept to a 

minimum. The schedule and the name of the supplier of the lubricants shall 

be submitted to the Engineer for approval before incorporation in the 

instruction manuals. In the case of grease lubricated roller type bearings for 

electric motors, a lithium base grease is preferred. 

B. Where lubrication is affected by means of grease, preference shall be given to 

a pressure system that does not require frequent adjustment or recharging. 

Frequent, for this purpose, means more than once weekly and grease systems 

having shorter periods between greasing should be avoided. Where necessary 

for accessibility, grease nipples shall be placed at the end of extension piping 

and, when a number of such points can be grouped conveniently, the nipples 

shall be brought to a battery plate mounted in a convenient position. Button 

head type nipples shall be of the same size and type for every part of the 

plant. Arrangements shall be provided to prevent bearings being overfilled 

with either grease or oil. 

C. Where more than one special grease is required a grease gun for each special 

type shall be supplied and permanently labelled. 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-9

D. Oil sumps shall be fitted with oil level indicators of the sight glass type, or 

where this is not practical, with dipsticks. The indicators shall show the level of 

all temperatures likely to be experienced in service. The normal, maximum and 

minimum levels at 30 o C shall be clearly visible in the sight glass type from the 

normal access floor to the particular item of plant, and they shall be easily 

dismantled. 

E. All sight glasses shall be firmly held and enclosed in metal protection in such a 

manner that they cannot be accidentally damaged. 

F. All lubrication systems shall be designed so as not to present a fire hazard. 

Particular care shall be taken to prevent leakage of lubricants and to avoid 

leaking lubricants coming into current contact with any electrical equipment, 

heated surfaces or any other potential source of fire. 

G. The Contractor shall supply flushing oil for each lubrication system when an 

item of plant is ready for preliminary running and a sufficient quantity of the 

approved lubricants for setting to work and for the commercial operation for 

one year after the relevant Certification of Completion has been issued. 

1.20 SPECIAL TOOLS 

A. The Contractor shall supply two complete sets of any special tools necessary 

for the operation, maintenance and dismantling of the mechanical equipment. 

The Contractor shall supply wall-mounted strongboxes; each fitted with a 

suitable lock and two keys, and located near the item of mechanical 

equipment for which they will be used. Such tools shall not be used by the 

Contractor during the erection of the mechanical equipment. 

1.21 SUNDRY BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION WITH SERVICES 

A. The Contractor shall include in his prices for drilling, rawbolting, plugging, 

screwing and nailing of all brackets and hangers for all pipework, ductwork 

conduit, cable tray, cable trunking and cable supports. The Contractor shall 

also include for supplying all brackets, hangers and supports as necessary. 

1.22 NOISE (REFER ALSO TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 1407) 

A. Noise Criteria . 

B. The Contractor shall employ an Acoustic Specialist, approved by the 

Engineer, to carryout all noise and vibration analysis, calculations, 

recommendations and final specification of acoustic treatments. 

C. The Contractor shall provide a quiet installation. All items of mechanical 

equipment shown on the Drawings shall be carefully chosen with a view to 

silent operation. The recommendations in BS 5720 and BS 8233 shall be 

followed wherever necessary. The Contractor shall prepare detailed noise 

level calculations to indicate the anticipated noise levels in all occupied 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-10

areas. Fan chambers, technical rooms and chiller plant rooms shall be 

constructed to ensure that noise levels in surrounding spaces meet specified 

levels. 

D. All possible steps shall be taken, (e.g. by the use of sound insulation, antivibration 

mountings, floating floors, walls, ceilings and careful design of 

pumps, motors, fans, ducts, bends, dampers, grilles and other equipment) to 

reduce the noise produced by the mechanical equipment. 

E. The Contractor shall determine the noise levels of all primary mechanical 

equipment before proceeding with manufacture and submit sound power 

levels of such equipment and resultant room noise levels to the Engineer for 

approval before manufacture is commenced. 

1.23 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS AND SOUND ABSORPTION 

A. The Contractor shall provide and fix all mechanical equipment to prevent 

noise and the transmission of vibration through the structure. 

B. All fans, motors, chillers, pumps and other items, as appropriate, shall be 

mounted on resilient mountings in such a manner that the plant foundations 

are isolated from the floor or structure. Pumps shall be installed on inertia 

bases. In addition, all rotating plant shall be statically and dynamically 

balanced. 

C. Mechanical vibration shall be eliminated by the use of anti-vibration 

mountings and flexible connections to ensure an isolation efficiency in 

excess of 98% from the building structure except where defined otherwise on 

the Drawings or in the Specification. 

D. Spring type anti-vibration mountings shall be the captive partially encased 

and restrained type to prevent lateral movement. 

1.24 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. “As Built” record drawings are to be produced as the installation work is 

completed. The working drawings shall be checked against the installation, 

corrected and issued for approval. The Contractor shall provide a delivery 

schedule of the drawing submissions based on the construction programme. 

Thirty days prior to the date of the handing over certificate, the Contractor 

shall provide the final copy of the "as built" record drawings of the whole 

works for approval. 

B. The Drawings shall include the following:- 

1. General arrangements of all services to a scale of not less than 

1:50. 

2. Detailed layouts of plant rooms and similar spaces to a scale 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-11

of not less than 1:20. 

3. Schedules of all plant and cross referenced equipment to the 

maintenance manual. 

4. All equipment and control wiring diagrams. Diagrams must 

be co-ordinated and show all required interlocks etc. between 

systems or components. 

5. Indicate with accurate dimensions, sizes and positions of all 

plant, equipment and valves together with all inspection 

points and test positions. All plants to have indicated 

manufacturer's name, model and type number also crossreferenced 

to maintenance manual. 

6. Fully indicate all ductwork, pipe work, sizes and positions of 

all plant equipment and valves together with all inspection 

points and test positions. All plant to have indicated 

manufacturer's name model and type number also crossreferenced 

to maintenance manual. 

7. Show the disposition and depth of all cables, pipes, ducts, 

buried direct in the ground and taken at intervals where cable 

increase or decrease in number/size and at every point where 

the services enter into or depart from ducts or buildings. 

8. Indicate the number, sizes and services for every cable, duct, 

and pipe, for every service within each building. Circuit lists 

for every distribution board shall be entered on to the relevant 

drawings and such lists shall agree with the list fixed within 

the distribution board door. 

9. Show clearly on site drawings all the new buildings together 

with all other existing buildings and other permanent features 

with dimensions between such buildings 

10. Cables, pipes, ducts, etc. clearly marked, together with 

installed backfill and surround to each service. 

11. Show clearly all plumbing and drainage and setting out 

dimensions for all drainage pipe work and manholes both 

within the building throughout the site, together with drainage 

pipe work backfill, or surround in each location. A schedule 

shall be included to indicate each manhole size, cover size, 

invert level and ground level. 

C. The symbol used for each service for all as built drawings shall be shown on 

separate drawings. 

D. In order to achieve accurate as built drawings, all relevant information 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-12

elating to the mechanical works shall be entered onto prints supplied 

immediately after the work has been carried out. The marked up prints shall 

be available for inspection at the Contractor's site office at any reasonable 

time during the progress of the works. 

E. All service routes, intersections and joints shown on the prints and finally 

recorded shall be actually physically measured from permanent features and 

accurate distances shall be shown on the Drawings. 

F. In addition to the ”as built drawings”, the Contractor shall obtain and provide 

two sets of all manufacturers’ detailed drawings for all items of plant, 

equipment, apparatus and materials. These drawings shall be suitably titled 

and have drawing reference numbers added. 

G. The Contractor shall provide two copies of all “as built drawings” for review 

comments and approval. Upon receiving approval in writing from the Engineer, or 

his representative, the Contractor shall provide one negative copy of each approved 

as built drawing and bind one set of prints into each of 6 No. copies of the operating 

instructions specified in clause 1.25. 

1.25 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

A. The working, operating and maintenance instruction shall be prepared in 

draft as soon as the working drawings are in hand as the work progresses and 

shall take the form of a manual in which fully detailed information relating to 

the maintenance and operation of the complete installation and its component 

parts is presented. 

1. Overall general description of the complete equipment 

installed together with the method of functioning. 

2. Full technical descriptions of each and every item of 

equipment, including the electrical circuit details as 

applicable. 

3. Operating procedures for each section of the works and each 

individual item of equipment or plant. 

4. Planned maintenance schedules for the installation and its 

component parts to include commissioning performance 

details and measurements. 

5. Schedule of components comprising each and every item of 

equipment including manufacturer's name, description and 

part number of each component. 

6. A copy of the manufacturer's literature, describing each item 

of equipment, plant fittings and accessory type used 

throughout the installation. This literature shall list the 

technical data available, together with catalogue list numbers 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-13

for replacement purposes. 

Complete name of manufacturer, postal address, contact 

person telephone, telefax and E mail shall be tabulated for 

ease in procurement of spare parts. Spare parts forms 

(standard) shall be prepared. 

7. Generally all drawings must be arranged to flood out from 

their position and be entirely visible when any part of the 

manual is being read. They shall be printed on linen-backed 

paper. 

8. Each section shall be encased in a loose-leaf ring binder 

covered in plastic material of an approved colour and of a type 

that shall be flat when open. 

9. The Contractor shall include for the preparation and supply of 

six copies of the above operating and maintenance 

instructions for each section after the Engineer has approved 

all details. 

10. Electronic transfer of "As Built" drawings shall be provided as 

required by the Engineer. 

1.26 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of suitably qualified 

personnel for the instruction and supervision of the Employer's staff at Site in 

the operation and routine maintenance of all mechanical equipment and 

associate works. Unless specified to the contrary in the specific technical 

clauses, instruction and training shall be for periods of six hours daily for 

twenty days after the satisfactory commissioning of the installation and as 

necessary, after each subsequent commissioning of a system or part thereof. 

B. The Contractor shall provide a fully working and completely documented 

electronic planned preventative maintenance schedule (PPM). The PPM shall 

contain all the recommendations of the individual manufacturers of the 

equipment installed and recognised good practice. The Contractor shall 

employ a specialist to provide the software and compile the records, along 

with training of the Clients staff. 

1.27 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES 

A. A list of spares and consumables for 1 year’s operation for every item of 

plant and system shall be furnished by the Contractor at the time of 

tendering. 

1.28 MOCK-UPS 

A. The Contractor shall provide mechanical equipment to allow full 

Architectural Mock-ups to be built as described elsewhere in the 




____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-14


Not Used. 


Not Used. 

* END OF SECTION 1000 * 



____________________________________________________________________________ 


1000-15

SECTION 1001 

ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 

PART 1GENERAL 

1.01 SCOPE OF SECTION 

A. This Technical Specification details the electrical requirements of the mechanical 

equipment and plant.. 

1.02 WORK INCLUDED 

A. The work includes the provision of all labour materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the electrical requirements for mechanical equipment. 

B. Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of the 

work of all trades. 


A. The Contractor shall employ specialist electrical equipment installers and 

manufacturers that can demonstrate at least 5 years successful experience in the 

supply and installation of the type of equipment and systems specified. 


A. The Electrical Requirements shall comply with the latest relevant British Standards 

in all respects. 

B. The following are some of the most commonly used British and other Standards 

associated with Electrical works. However, the Contractor shall ensure all applicable 

Standards are complied with, whether listed here or not. 

BS 1376 

BS 2757 

Specification for colours of light signals. 

Method for determining the thermal classification of 

electrical insulation. 

BS 4099 

BS 4794 Part 2 

Colours of indicator lights, push buttons, annunciators and 

digital readouts. 

Special requirements for specific types of control switches. 

BS 6231 

Specification for PVC insulated cable for switchgear and 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 

Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 

1001-1

controlgear wiring. 

IEC 144 

Degrees of protection of enclosures for low voltage 

switchgear & controlgear. 


A.Product data - relating to each and every component and assembly. 

B.Systems information - full schematic and wiring diagrams including panel fascia layouts. 


1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions. 


2.01 CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES 

A. Panels shall be constructed from 2-mm thick galvanised steel plate to IP54. 

B. Each composite panel shall include a main isolator interlocked with the door, which 

shall be lockable. All panels shall be finished with stove enamel internally and 

externally. All panels shall be sealed against ingress of moisture, dust and vermin. 

All starters and controls shall be located in panels unless agreed otherwise by the 

Engineer. Anti-condensation heaters and ventilation fans shall be provided in each 

panel. 

C. An earthing bar shall be provided throughout the entire length of the control panel. 

D. A minimum of 2 doors shall be provided on any panels wider than 800 mm which 

shall be fabricated to form rigid trays with dust excluding gaskets around their 

perimeter. 

E. Doors shall be fitted with hinges to facilitate the removal of the door panels if 

required. 

F. All doors shall be interlocked or arranged such that the door that provides access to 

the main isolator must be opened first. All door locks shall be provided with common 

keys. 

G. Panels shall be designed with the following limitations:- 

1. Height =2200 mm max. 

2. Length of single section =2400 mm max. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-2

2.02 CONTROL PANEL METERS 

A. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be provided for each motor either of the moving coil 

or moving iron self-contained type to BS 89 (Industrial Grade). 

B. All instruments shall be flush mounted and those with moving coil or moving iron 

movements shall be centre pivot type with circular scales unless otherwise specified 

or approved. They shall be of the dead-beat type and shall be capable of carrying 

their full-scale currents continuously without undue heating or impairing their 

accuracy. The indicated reading shall be clearly defined and shown against indelibly 

marked scales engraved on enamelled metal. The pointers shall be of clean outline. 

The pointers and scales shall be such that the scale is marked on a stepped section to 

avoid the casting of shadows on the scale, and parallax errors. The markings on the 

dials shall be restricted to the scale markings. Instrument transformer ratios and 

maker's name shall not appear prominently on the dials but may be marked in an 

unobtrusive position. The glass covers to dials shall be of non-reflecting glass. 

C. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or 

removing the instrument from the panel. 

D. Busbar voltmeters shall be calibrated while hot. All voltage circuits to instruments 

shall be protected by a fuse on each pole of the circuit placed as close as possible to 

the instrument transformer terminal or, where instruments are direct connected, as 

close as possible to the mains connection in any one of three phases. All instruments 

and apparatus shall be back connected and all instruments shall be properly earthed. 

2.03 CONTROL SWITCHES AND ELECTRICAL ISOLATION 

A. Control switches shall comply with BS 4794. 

B. Switches shall be of the rotary type. 

C. All control switches shall be capable of being locked in the "off" position, unless 

stated otherwise. 

D. The contacts of all switches shall be strong and have a positive wiping action when 

operated. 

E. All control switches shall be provided with labels. 

F. All control panels shall be provided with a defeat proof door interlock isolator 

controlling the main incoming supply. The isolator shall be capable of making and 

breaking on full load without damage. Additionally the isolator shall have:- 

1. Auxiliary contacts to isolate any secondary supplies to the control panel. 

2. Manual override switch to enable the control system only to be energised 

whilst the incoming supplies are isolated. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-3

G. All terminals of the isolator (incoming and outgoing) are to be shrouded to prevent 

accidental contact. 

H. The panel shall be constructed such that power (3-phase and single-phase) equipment 

is located behind the interlocked isolator door. 

I. Control (extra low voltage) and BMS outstation equipment shall be located behind 

the second or subsequent doors to ensure segregation from power equipment. 

J. The control system operating voltage shall not exceed 24V without prior 

authorisation. 

K. All internal wiring shall be enclosed within wireways. Inter wiring that is required to 

pass between the power and control sections of the panel shall be enclosed within 

separate or segregated wireways to ensure electrical separation of the power and 

control systems. 

2.04 INDICATING LAMPS, INSTRUMENTS AND FITTINGS 

A. Indicating lamps fitted into the facias of switch and instrument cubicles or panels 

shall be adequately ventilated. 

B. A red warning light shall be provided to indicate "Main Supply On". 

C. The following must be included on all local HVAC control panels. 

1. Run/trip lamps for all equipment (plus run/trip indication to BMS). 

2. Panel live lamp 

3. Rotary selector switches for duty/standby plant 

4. Rotary switches for all single plant items (Auto/Off/Hand) 

5. Ammeters for all motors. 

6. Warning lamps (plus warning signals to BMS). 

7. Gauges (plus reading to BMS). 

8. Hours run meters (plus information to BMS). 

9. Variable speed inverter drive indicators (plus status information to BMS). 

(If required). 

10. Filter clogged indicator lamp (plus indication to BMS). 

D. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the panel by manual means 

without the use of extractors. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-4

E. The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass shall be of an 

approved finish and easily removable from the body of the fitting so as to permit 

access to the lamp and lamp glass. 

F. The lamps shall be clear and shall fit into a standard form of lamp holder. The rated 

lamp voltage should be 10 percent in excess of the auxiliary supply voltage, whether 

ac or dc. For ac circuits, lamp units shall have an integral transformer providing a 6V 

supply to the lamp. 

G. The lamp glasses shall comply with BS 1376 and BS 4099 and shall be in standard 

colours, red, green, blue, white and amber. The colour shall be in the glasses and not 

an applied coating and the different coloured glasses shall not be interchangeable. 

Transparent synthetic materials may be used instead of glass, provided such materials 

have fast colours and are completely suitable for use in tropical climates. 

H. All indicating 1amp circuits shall have a "Test Lamp" switch. 

2.05 SMALL WIRING 

A. All control panel wiring shall be carried out in a neat and systematic manner with 

cable supported clear of the panels and other surfaces at all points to obtain free 

circulation of air. 

B. In all cases, the sequences of the wiring terminals shall be such that the junction 

between multi-core cables and the terminals is affected without crossover. Except 

where terminals are approved by the Engineer for use with bare conductors, crimped 

connectors of approved type shall be used to terminate all small wiring. Insulating 

bushes shall be provided where necessary to prevent chafing of wiring. 

C. All panel wiring shall comply with the requirements of BS 6231 Type A or B, as 

appropriate. Conductors shall be copper and have a minimum cross section equivalent 

to 50/0.25 mm (2.5 mm²), 7/0.67 mm (2.5 mm²) or 1/1.78 mm (2.5 mm²). 7/0.67 mm 

shall only be employed for rigid connections, which are not subject to movement or 

vibration during shipment, operation or maintenance. Flexible conductors’ equivalent 

to 30/0.25 mm (1.5 mm²) or smaller sizes generally shall only be employed with 

written approval. 

D. All wires shall be colour coded and fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at 

each termination. At points of inter-connection between wiring, where a change of 

numbering cannot be avoided, double ferrules shall be provided. Such points shall be 

clearly indicated on the wiring diagram. 

E. No wires shall be tied or jointed between terminal points. 

F. Electrical wiring and instruments shall be located so that leakage of oil or water cannot 

affect them. 

G. All metallic cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc., mounted on control 

panels or in cubicles, steel, or otherwise, shall be connected by means of copper 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-5

conductors of not less than 2.5-sq.mm section to the nearest earth bar. These 

conductors may be bare or have insulation coloured green/yellow stripes. 

2.06 LINKS AND FUSES 

A. Provision shall be made for isolating links to enable circuits to be isolated for 

maintenance and testing items of plant on the panels without affecting other circuits. 

These links shall be clearly labelled. 

B. All incoming supply terminals above 230V shall be shrouded. 

C. Fuses of the appropriate rating shall be fitted to each outgoing circuit to provide both 

overload and short-circuit protection. 

D. All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type and comply with BS 88. Carriers and 

bases for fuses and links shall be coloured in accordance with local practice. The 

labelling of links and fuses shall be in accordance with the schematic diagrams. A 

complete set of spare fuses shall be provided in each panel. 

E. If miniature circuit breakers and/or moulded case circuit breakers are utilised in any 

circuit, and "back-up protection is required to afford adequate discrimination between 

these circuit breakers and any other protective device in the circuit, HRC fuses shall 

be used as “fault current limiters". 

F. The rating and characteristics of fault current limiters shall be such as to limit the 

fault current of the ultimate circuit breaker in the circuit to the fault current capacity 

of the circuit breaker. Fault current limiters shall be such that they will not operate 

under overload as distinct from short circuit conditions. Fault current limiters shall be 

labelled as such. 

G. Equipment fixed inside cubicles shall be required to give easy access to wiring and 

terminals. Resistance boxes shall be located so that the adjustment screws are on a 

vertical accessible face. Stud terminals shall be provided for all resistances. 

2.07 TERMINAL BOARDS 

A. Grouped terminal boards of adequate capacity and fully numbered, with permanent 

labels, shall be provided for all wires leading to equipment outside a panel. Terminal 

numbers or markings shall correspond with those used on related apparatus and 

wiring diagrams. Removable plates or other facility shall be provided for the entry of 

incoming cables, conduits, trunking, etc. with means for effective earthing to the 

cubicle chassis. Provision shall be made for the earthing of all non-current carrying 

metalwork. For main power terminals incorporated within a panel, soldered socket 

type terminals shall be provided. 

B. All terminal boards shall be mounted in accessible positions and when in enclosed 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-6

cubicles, are preferably to be inclined towards the doors. Spacing of adjacent 

terminal boards shall be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of each board shall be 

not less than 200 mm above the incoming cable gland plate. Separate terminations 

shall be provided on each terminal strip for the cores of incoming and outgoing 

cables including all spare cores. Barriers shall be provided between wires of different 

voltages on the same or adjacent terminals. 

C. Terminals that are "live" from other power sources when the cubicle isolator is open 

shall be shrouded and fitted with a danger label. 

D. Screw or stud type terminals shall only be used with crimped ring type wiring 

terminations. Plain steel screws and studs shall be not less than size M6 but stainless 

steel and bronze down to size M5 may be used provided that the current carrying 

capacity is adequate. All studs shall be provided with nuts, washers and lock 

washers. 

E. Insertion type terminals shall generally be employed for small circuit wiring whereby 

the stranded conductor or crimped termination is clamped between plates by a screw 

having a suitable locking device. Terminal entries shall be shrouded such that no 

current carrying metal is exposed. Tapped holes shall have not less than three full 

threads. 

F. Terminal assemblies are preferably to be of the unit form suitable for mounting 

collectively on a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the 

required number of ways plus 10% spare. 

G. All connections shall be made at the front of the terminal boards and no live metal is 

to be exposed at the back. 

H. No more than two leads shall be taken to any common pair of terminals, unless 

specially approved by the Engineer. 

1.2 NUMBER PLATES AND LABELS 

A. Number plates and labels shall be provided and fixed to all items, including push 

buttons, operating levers, indicating lamps, etc. to show the purpose and function of 

each item and to ensure its safe and satisfactory operation. The type, size, inscription 

and position of labels shall be to the Engineer's approval. 

B. Adhesive die stamped or printed tapes shall not be permitted for labelling equipment. 

2.08 EARTHING 

A. All control panels shall be provided with a continuous copper earth bar having a 

sectional area of not less than 75 mm 2 placed at a convenient position near the 

bottom of the panel. The area of the earth bar shall not be less than half the crosssectional 

area of the phase busbars and not less than the area of the incoming neutral 

conductor. 

B. All metal cases or earth terminals of the various instruments, relays, etc. on the 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-7

panels shall be connected to this earth bar by copper connections of not less than 2.5 

mm 2 . 

C. All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall be earthed 

in an approved manner and all earthing terminals shall be of adequate dimensions. 

2.09 ANTI CONDENSATION HEATERS 

A. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided in all control panels, switchboards and 

motors to prevent internal condensation due to atmospheric or load variations. The 

heaters shall be thermostatically and humidity controlled and of sufficient capacity to 

maintain 5 o C temperature differential with the surrounding atmosphere. The heater 

circuit shall include an isolating switch and indicator lamp to show "Heater Circuit 

On". The heaters may be energised from a 400V or 230V, 50Hz supply, as 

applicable. 

B. When maintaining equipment fitted with heaters it will be necessary to switch off 

both the main isolating switch and the switch for the heater. A warning notice of this 

danger shall be fitted near the terminal box of every remote heater and at every panel 

fitted with heaters. 

C. All equipment fitted with heaters shall be such that the maximum permitted rise in 

temperature is not exceeded if the heaters are energised while the equipment is in 

operation and as such must be provided with suitable ventilation. 

D. All such equipment, whether fitted with a heater device or not, shall be provided with 

suitable drainage and be free from pockets in which moisture can collect. 

2.10 MOTOR STARTERS 

A. Motor starter enclosures shall be at least to the standards specified for LV switchgear. 

B. Motor starters shall be of the following types and suitably rated for each application:- 

1. MANUAL = UNDER 0.34 kW MOTORS 

2. DIRECT ON LINE = UP TO 5 kW MOTORS 

3. STAR DELTA = ABOVE 5 kW MOTORS 

4. AUTO TRANSFORMER WHEN SUPPLIED BY THE MOTOR 

MANUFACTURER. 

C. Auto-transformer type motor starters when supplied shall each comprise: 

1. Triple pole mechanically interlocked isolator with padlocking facilities in the 

'off' position. 

2. Protection devices in the power circuit. 

3. Adequately rated autotransformer. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-8

4. Contactors rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with 

magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main 

contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated operating coils. 

5. Under voltage release. 

6. Overload relays of the adjustable electro-magnetic type with oil dashpot time 

lags and reset facilities, calibrating plates shall be scaled in amperes or 

equivalent thermal compensated type. 

7. Control circuit fuses of the cartridge type. 

8. Single-phase preventative device. 

9. Ammeter of the moving iron type. 

10. Pilot lamp to indicate "motor-running". 

11. Removable neutral link of heavy section copper. 

D. The Star/Delta motor starters shall each comprise: 


"off" position. 

2. Protection devices fuses in the power circuit. 

3. Contactors rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with 

magnetic blow-outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main 

contacts of the removable type and continuously rated operating coils. 


5. Overload relay of the adjustable thermal type. 


7. Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing) 

8. Ammeter of the moving iron type. 

9. Pilot lamp to indicate "motor running". 


E. Direct-on-line type motor starters shall each comprise: 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-9


"off" position. 

2. Protection devices fuses in the power circuit. 

3. Contactor rated at 9 starts per hour suitable for pushbutton operation, with 

magnetic blow outs and arc chutes on each pole, hard drawn copper main 

contacts of the removable type, and continuously rated operating coils. 


5. Overload relays of the adjustable thermal type. 


7. Motor protection relay (unbalance and single phasing). 

8. Ammeter of the moving iron type for motors in excess of 5 kW. 

9. Pilot lamp to indicate "motor running". 


F. For starters incorporating reduced voltage starting the change over shall be 

automatic. A lock-off switch shall be provided and located locally to each motor and 

connected into the starter control circuit so that the starter cannot be operated when 

the switch is in the "off" position. 

G. "Hand/off/Auto" switches shall be provided for all starters. 

H. Variable frequency inverter drives shall be used for V.A.V AHU fans as indicated in 

the schedules. 

I. Variable frequency inverter drives shall be used for secondary chilled and hot water 

pumps as indicated in the schedules. 

2.11 BELT DRIVES 

A. Centrifugal fans shall be driven by electric motors through V-belt drives unless 

specified otherwise. V-belt drives shall conform to BS 1440 and shall consist of 

endless V-belts capable of transmitting a power at least 75% in excess of the rated 

BHP of the motor. Not less than two belts per drive shall be used. Guards shall be 

provided for all V-Belt drives. 

2.12 ELECTRIC MOTORS 

A. Motors shall be of the totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) design to BS 5000 and 

shall be fitted with axially locating type bearings and/or heavy duty thrust bearings at 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-10

the non-driving end and roller type bearings at the drive end. All bearings shall be of 

adequate proportions and design suitable for the particular application. 

B. Motors shall be of the squirrel cage induction type. Motors shall be suitably finished 

to afford protection against any corrosive liquid or fumes. 

C. All motors shall be built of high-grade components and materials and shall operate 

without undue vibration and with the minimum of noise. 

D. The insulation shall be Class `F' to BS 2757 but the temperature rise shall be limited 

to 80 o C measured by the resistance method, at an ambient temperature of 40 o C. The 

motors shall be suitable in all respects for their operational duties taking into account 

such an ambient temperature within the building. 

E. All motors rated at 11 kW and above shall be fitted with thermostatic control 

elements actuating directly on the control circuit of the motor and disconnecting it 

from the supply in the event of a temperature rise exceeding the acceptable limits for 

its insulation class. 

F. The motors shall be fully tropicalised, and shall be fitted with anti-condensation 

heaters. 

G. The motors shall be capable of providing 10% in excess of the specified volume flow 

of their respective fans under all operating conditions. Selections must assume that 

resistance increases by the square law and absorbed power by the cube law. 

H. Motors are required to operate from a 400V, 3 phase or 230V single phase, 50Hz 

supply as applicable, and shall be continuously rated. 

I. The motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation with a voltage variation of 10% 

above or below the supply voltage. They shall also be capable of operating 

satisfactorily with a frequency variation of 2.5% above or below the normal 

frequency of 50. 

1. No motor shall run faster than 900 rpm. unless otherwise Indicated. 

2. Motors shall be designed to operate at a power factor not less than 0.85. 

3. Motors shall be suitable for the starting methods specified. 

4. Motor starting currents shall not exceed the following values:- 

Autotransformer starting - 1.5 times the full load current. 

Star/Delta starting - 3.5 times the full load current. 

Direct-on-line starting - 6 times the full load current. 

J. The connections of the motors shall be brought out to easily accessible terminals of 

the stud type, totally enclosed. They shall be substantially designed and thoroughly 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-11

insulated from the frame. Cambric or equal insulation shall be used for the 

connections from the windings to the terminals. Terminal boxes shall be fitted with 

glands to accept the specified type of cable. 

K. The cable glands shall be downwards pointing at such an angle as is necessary to 

clear the motor base plate and plinth. 

L. Motors shall have visible nameplates indicating:- 

1. Motor power --- kW 

2. Voltage 

3. Phase 

4. Cycles 

5. RPM 

6. Full load amps, 

7. Locked Rotor amps 

8. Frame size 

9. Manufacturers name and model 

10. Power factor 

2.13 VARIABLE VOLUME FAN AND PUMP MOTOR SPEED CONTROLS 

A. Fan motor speed variation control of specified fans shall be achieved using digital 

Pulse Width Modulation Inverters. 

B. Totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage motors shall be used rated for ambient 

conditions and the Contractor shall ensure that the fan manufacturer sizes motors to 

allow for frequency inverter control and confirms that their equipment is fully 

suitable for this method of control and the inverters provided. Motors and inverters 

shall be capable of continuous operation at levels of 10% in excess of specified 

duties. 

C. All inverters shall be of the same manufacture and installed fully in accordance with 

the manufacturer's recommendations. 

D. Inverters shall control over the range 0.5 to 120 Hz, starting current 1 x FLC, near 

unity power factor over the speed range and not require any additional means for 

motor starting. 

E. Acceleration and deceleration ramps shall be independently adjustable and the 

inverter capable of riding a 500 millisecond mains interruption without causing 

tripping. 

F. Inverters shall be mounted in the local mechanical control panels dust and damp 

protected to BS 5420 IP54, allowing all parameters to be set with the door closed, 

and provided with adequate ventilation for cooling. Ambient air shall be taken as 

40 o C Inverters shall be installed by the panel manufacturer and shall be totally 

compatible with all control and drive equipment supplied by others. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-12

G. Inverters shall provide the following protection:- 

1. Motor phase to phase fault. 

2. Motor phase to earth fault - continuous during operation. 

3. Overvoltage. 

4. Undervoltage 

5. Inverter overheat 

6. Motor overheat 

7. Stall protection 

8. Loss of control signal 

9. Loss of auxiliary control voltage 

10. Current limit 

H. Operation of any of these faults shall cause electronic shutdown without fuse 

blowing. 

I. Selectable information should be available as an output digital display: 

1. Output frequency (Hz) 

2. Reference 1 (hand) 

3. Reference 2 (auto) 

4. Difference of references 

5. Motor current (amps) 

6. Torque (% x PN) 

7. DC link voltage (%) 

8. Temperature (C) 

9. Fault memory 

J. Inverters shall have the ability to provide either a linear or square law voltage to 

frequency ratio on the output, and the facility to adjust the field weakening point. 

K. Inverters must be capable of electronic maintenance without the motor being 

connected. 

L. The inverter shall be speed controlled by direct digital input from the DDC fan 

controllers’ out-station, and all necessary interface cards shall be provided. 

M. The inverter shall provide means of running at a fixed (selectable) speed on the 

closure of a remote volt free contact. This should override the normal speed control 

reference signal. 

N. A common fault alarm condition shall be available from volt free contact, together 

with an output signal to indicate output frequency (speed). 

O. Inverters shall be screened for radio and computer interference. 



________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-13



A. Installation of all the equipment, plant and material included in this Section of the 

Specification shall additionally be in accordance with the requirements of Division 

16. 




________________________________________________________________________________ - 


1001-14

SECTION 1002 


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 


A. This Technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the 

standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Mechanical 

Identification systems. 


A. The work includes the provision of all labor, materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the supply and installation of Mechanical Identification 

systems as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 

B. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work 

of all trades. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Mechanical 

Identification systems whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar 

application and not less than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Mechanical 

Identification systems with at least 5 years successful installation experiences on 

projects of a similar nature. 


A. Mechanical Identification systems and all associated materials and workmanship shall 

comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards in all respects. 

The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated 

with pipe work products and associated materials. However, the Contractor shall ensure 

that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not. 

BS 1710 - Specification for Identification of Pipelines and Services. 

BS 4800 - Specification for Paint Colours for Building Purposes. 


A. Drawings: refer to 1000 



_________________________________________________________________ 

Mechanical Identification 

1002-1

B. Products : Full manufacturers color data for each product. 

C. Samples - Full - size color sample of pipe work and ductwork identification and 

labeling. 


A. Mechanical identification system shall correspond totally to "As Built" data. 

1.07 WARRANTY 



2.01 PLANT AND PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. All pipe work shall be color coded in accordance with BS 1710 as detailed in Table 1. 

Basic Colors 

Colour Key BS 5252 Colour Ref. Basic Contents 

Green G 12 D 45 Water 

Silver Grey SGy 10 A 03 Steam 

Brown B 06 C 39 Oil 

Yellow Ochre YO 08 C 35 Gases 

Black BK Black Drainage 

Light Blue LBe 20 E 51 Air also Vacuum 

Voilet V 22 C 37 Acides & Alkalis 

Orange O 06 E 51 Electrical Conduits 

Code Clours 

Colour Kev. BS 5252 Colour Ref. 

Auxiliary Blue Abe 18 E 53 

Crimson C 04 D 45 

Emerald Green EG 14 E 53 

Salmon Pink SPk 04 C 33 

Safety Ref. SR 04 E 53 

French Blue FBe 20 D 45 

Grey Gy 00 A 09 Exhaust/recirculated air 

Primrose P 12 E 51 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-2

Terracotta/Brown T 06 C 39 

Yellow Yw 10 E 53 

White W White 

Black BK Black 

Maroon M 02 C 39 

Colour Identification Charts 

General Services 

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

Color code 

indication 

100mm 

Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

WATER 

Drinking G Abe G 

Cooling G W G 

Boiling feed G C W C G 

Condensate C EG C G 

Chilled G W EG W G 

Central Heating – 

100 o C 

G ABe C Abe G 

Cold, down service G W ABe W G 

Hot water supply G W C W G 

Hydraulic Power G SPk G 

Sea, river untreated 

G 

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

Colour code 

indication 

100mm 

Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

Fire extinguishing G SR G 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-3

Softened water 

Raw water 

De ionised 

G (SOFTENED) 

G (RAW) 

G (De ionised) 

WATER (Cont.) 

Laundry recovered 

Steam 

Drainage 

G (RECOVERED) 

Sgy 

Bk 

Electrical conduit 

ducts 

O 

GAS 

Natural gas YO Yw YO 

LPG YO EG YO 

INDUSTRIAL GASES 

Vacuum LBe W Lbe 

Acetylene 

* (See note) 

YO 

M 

(ACETYLENE) 

YO 

Argon 

YO (ARGON) 

Butane 

YO (BUTANE) 

Hydrogen 

YO (HYDROGEN) 

Nitrogen 

YO (NITROGEN) 

Oxygen YO (IND. O 2 ) 

Propane 

Refrigerant 

YO (PROPANE) 

YO (REFRIGERANT) 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-4

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

Color code 

indication 100mm 

Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

MEDICAL GASES 

Compressed Air LBe W Bk LBe 

Vacuum LBe P LBe 

Nitrous Oxide YO Fbe YO 

Oxygen YO W YO 

Nitrous Oxide 

Oxygen Mixture 

YO 

(O 2 + N 2 O) 

FBe W YO 

(50/50) 

Spare Medical Gas 

YO (S.MG) 

Pathology services shall have an extra code colour band (terracotta) with the letters 

‘PATH’ OR ‘PATHOLOGY’ clearly printed in black as illustrated in the example given 

below. 

Example 

Basic Color 

(PATHOLOGY) 

T 

Code 

Color 

Basic Color 

* Note: Acetylene pipelines shall have identification (as shown) at intervals not 

greater than 3 meters. 

Oils, Acids, Alkalis and Chemicals 

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

Color code 


Basic color 

approximately 

90mm 

OILS 

Burner fuel 

B 

Diesel B W B 

Hydraulic Power B SPk B 

Lubricating B EG B 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-5

Transformer B C B 

Liquid soap 

(Laundries 

B (Soap) 

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

Colour code 


Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

ACIDS, ALKALIS AND CHEMICALS 

PIPE CONTENTS 

Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

Colour code 


Basic colour 

approximately 

90mm 

Bleach 

V (BLEACH) 

Caustic soda 

V (CAUSTIC SODA) 

Cleaning Fluid 

V (CLEANING FLUID) 

Soda 

V (SODA) 

Hydrochloric Acid 

V (HYDROCHLORIC) 

Chlorine 

V (CHLORINE) 

Ventilation Plant and Ductwork 

Shall be identified in accordance with DW/142 coded and fixed as specified in Part D. 

B. Identification to pipework shall consist of 100mm PVC adhesive bands over the basic 

colour and shall include flow direction arrows together with the abbreviation of the 

service name. All coding requirements are to be agreed with the Engineer. 

C. Code indication for safety conditions shall be as follows:- 

Safety Colour 

BS colour reference 

BS 4800 

Red 04 E 53 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-6

Yellow 08 E 51 

Auxiliary Blue 18 E 53 

Safety colour references are as follows:- 

1. Red for fighting equipment. 

2. Yellow with black diagonal stripes for warning of danger. 

3. Yellow with trefoil symbol for ironizing radiation 

(as defined in BS 3510). 

4. Auxiliary blue in connection with green basic colours, to denote pipes 

carrying fresh water, either potable or non-potable. 

Safety colour references shall be applied using 100mm wide sections of PVC adhesive 

band in all permanent locations, to be agreed with the Engineer. 

Colour references shall include notation as follows:- 

1. FIRE 

2. DANGER 

3. RADIATION 

4. POTABLE OR NON-POTABLE 

In the case of fire service, all equipment, i.e. valves, suction tanks, etc., shall also be 

painted red. 

D. Uninsulated pipework shall be painted with one coat of undercoat and one coat of gloss 

finish to the relevant BS colour. 

E. Valve identification shall be by means of 40mm diameter traffalyte discs of 

white/black/white composition. Letters and figures of 8mm minimum height, 

identifying the service and valve number shall be engraved into the material. A 3mm 

diameter hole shall be drilled through the disc for the purpose of securing the disc to the 

valve. 

F. Plant identification shall be by means of traffalyte labels of white/black/white 

composition. Letters and figures of 8mm minimum height identifying the plant shall be 

of a size to be agreed with the Engineer. A minimum of two 3mm diameter holes shall 

be drilled through the label to the plant. 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-7

G. All plants shall carry the manufacturer's identification plate which shall incorporate all 

details of electrical and mechanical duties. 

2.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. Ductwork shall be colour coded in accordance with HVAC Specification DW142 to the 

colours indicated in Table 2. For conditioned air, identification shall comprise either of 

two symbols (one red, one blue) or a single symbol coloured, part red, part blue. 

TABLE 2 

DUCT IDENTIFICATION COLOURS 

Type Colour BS 4800 

Conditioned Air 

Warm Air 

Fresh Air 

Exhaust / extract recirculated air 

Foul Air 

Red and Blue 

Yellow 

Green 

Grey 

Brown 

04353 / 18E53 

10E53 

14E53 

AA009 

06C39 

B. Direction of flow shall be by PVC self adhesive equilateral triangles with one apex 

pointing in the direction of flow. The minimum length of side of the triangle shall be 

90mm. 

C. For all fume cupboard and laboratory exhausts at roof level and in service ducts, the 

ductwork shall be labelled with an industry standard “Biological Hazard” label. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All identification materials shall be stored within a well lit container or purpose made 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-8

compartmented racks or shelving. The material shall be adequately covered to prevent 

damage and ingress of dirt. 

B. Refer Division (1) 

3.02 GENERAL 

A. Identification shall be placed where it can be easily seen and at positions where 

identification will be required. To ensure that the symbols are seen, the following points 

shall be considered:- 

1. The symbols shall be on the surface which faces the positions of normal access 

to the completed installation. 

2. The symbols shall not be hidden from view by structural members, other ducts, 

plant or other services distribution systems. 

3. The symbols shall be placed where there is adequate natural or artificial light. 

B. Symbols shall occur frequently enough to avoid the need for ducts and pipes to be traced 

back. Symbols should be placed at any service and access points to the distribution 

system. 

C. Identification shall be applied to pipework and ductwork at every entry and exit point to 

a room but in no case of intervals of less than 12m. 

3.03 PLANT AND PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. In addition to the colour bands, all pipework in plant rooms and service areas, whether 

insulated or not, shall be legibly marked with black or white letters to indicate the type 

of service and the direction of flow. Services shall be identified as follows:- 

Chilled Water: 

CHW 

Refrigerant: 

RFG 

Cold Water: Raw RW 

Sweet SW 

Deionised Water: 

DW 

Domestic Hot Water: Raw RW 

Sweet SW 

Softened Water 

SFTW 

Fire Main: 

FM 

Gas: 

GAS 

Steam 

ST 

OTI 

OTI 

LPG 

LPG 

B. The basic identification colour shall be applied using a PVC adhesive band either 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-9

applied to pipework insulation or pipe when uninsulated. Identification shall be placed 

at all junctions, at both sides of valves, services appliances, bulkheads, wall penetrations 

and at any other places where identification is necessary or advantageous. 

C. Where pipes are run in pairs, the letters F and R shall be added to indicate flow and 

return respectively. 

3.04 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION 

A. All ductwork in plant rooms and services areas, whether insulated or not, shall be 

legibly marked with black or white letters to indicated the type of service and the 

direction of flow. Services shall be identified as follows:- 

Supply Air - S 

Return Air - R 

Fresh Air - F 

Exhaust - E 

Fume Cupboard 

Exhaust - E (with biohazard labelling) 

B. Ductwork identification shall be applied to ductwork whether insulated or not, at all 

branches, plant connections, wall penetrations and at any other place where 

identification is necessary or advantageous. 

* END OF SECTION 1002* 



_________________________________________________________________ 


1002-10

SECTION 1100 



PLUMBING PIPING 

A. This technical Specification establishes the minimum requirements for the 

equipment to be incorporated into the above ground Soil, Waste, Rainwater 

and Hot and Cold water services plumbing pipe work. 

B. It also establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to be used in the 

supply and installation of the systems. 


A. Section 1000 Basic Mechanical Requirements 

B. Section 1002 Mechanical Identification 

C. Section 1101 Plumbing Valves 

D. Section 1102 Plumbing Supports, Hangers and Brackets 

E. Section 1103 Plumbing Specialties 

F. Section 1105 Plumbing Piping Insulation 


A. Provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all operations 

necessary for the supply and installation of pipe work and fittings of the 

above ground Soil, Waste Rainwater and Hot and Cold water services 

systems as specified herein and as detailed on the Drawings. 

B. Co-ordination: The Contractor shall ensure that the soil and waste systems 

are fully compatible with all trades, particularly those of the Civil, 

Mechanical and Electrical services, for successful installation and operation. 

C. Submittals: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and 

approval, all calculations and drawings for the equipment proposed and 

associated builders works to show that the plant as installed will meet all the 

specified criteria. 

No works shall commence on the site until the design has received the approval 

of the Engineer. 


ConsultantEngineers 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Piping 

1100-1


A. Manufacturers: The Contractor shall only propose the use of materials 

produced by firms who have been regularly engaged in the manufacture of 

plumbing pipe work systems and whose products have proved satisfactory in 


B. Installer: Firms proposed for the installation of the plumbing pipe work 

systems shall have been regularly engaged for at least 5 years in the 

installation of plants of a similar type, quality and scope as is required for 

this project. 


A. The plumbing pipe work shall comply fully with the latest relevant British 

and DIN Standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used Standards associated with Cold, 

Hot, Soil and Waste Systems. However, the Contractor shall ensure that all 

applicable Standards are complied with, whether listed here or not. 

BS: 1387 

BS: 4514 

Galvanised steel medium and heavy duty. 

Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC soil 

and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories. 

BS: 4660 Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC 

underground drainpipe and fittings. 

BS: 5255 

BS: 5481 

BS: 6367 

BS: 6700 

BS: 8000 

DIN: 8079 

DIN: 8061 

Plastic waste pipe and fittings. 

Unplasticized polyvinyle chloride UPVC pipes 

and fittings for gravity sewers. 

Drainage of roofs and paved areas. 

Design, installation, testing and maintenance of 

services supplying water for domestic use within 

buildings.. 

Part 13 - Above ground drainage and sanitary appliances. 

Chlorinated polyvinyle chloride CPVC pipes 




_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-2

DIN: 8062 

DIN: 8063 


Pipe joints and pipe fittings for pressure 

Unplasticized PVC pipes 


A. Drawings - refer to Section 1000 

B. Products - submit full manufacturer data for every item. 


A. Comply with Section 1000 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty in accordance with contract conditions 

PART 2- PRODUCTS 

2.01 MATERIALS 

Pipes and Fittings Shall Be In Accordance With The Following Schedule: - 

Service 

Soil, waste, rain water drain and vent 

pipes for above ground installation 

Soil, waste, rain water drain and vent 

pipes for below ground installation 

Pressurized Soil and waste drainage 

pipes 

Main cold and hot water pipes inside 

building 

Main cold and hot water pipes in 

boiler room, parking area and on roof. 

Cold and hot water distribution 

pipework to sanitary fixtures 

Condensate drains pipes less than 

50mm dia. 

Material 

HDPE 

HDPE 

HDPE 

Galvanised steel 

Copper pipes to BS 2871 

Cross linked polyethylene (PE-Xa ) 

pipe-XLPE 

Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride 

(CPVC)- 16 bar 

2.02 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS 

A. The above ground drainage installations shall mean all pipework inside buildings and 

located as follows:- 

-Above floor slab 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-3

-Under tiles 

-Embeded in walls 

-At high level or low level exposed or concealed 

-All vertical pipes (risers) 

B. .The pipes and fittings shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride UPVC to 

BS 4514 and BS 5255 

C. All pipes shall be cast in one piece and with or without spigot bead or gasket 

positioning lugs. All pipes shall be legibly marked on the barrel. The marking 

shall consist of the manufacturer's name or registered trademark by which he can 

be identified. 

D. Each fitting shall be plainly marked with the manufacturer's name or 

registered trademark by which he can be identified. 

E. Jointing of pipework and fittings shall be by the use of solvent weld 

sockets carried out in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. 

Solvent weld cement shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of 

the pipework being jointed. 

F. Additional ring seal joints shall be provided as necessary to account for 

expansion and contraction. 

G. The connection of pipes to all water closets shall be made by WCconnector 

with O- ring adapter socket and pan seal socket. 

2.03 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS 

A. The below ground drainage installation shall mean all drainage pipework installed 

belowground slab and all external drainage pipework. 

B. The pipes and fittings shall be unplasticised polyvinyl chloride UPVC. 

Pipe size 110 mm. and 160 mm. shall conform to BS 4660, and size 200 mm. 

up to 630 mm. shall conform to BS5481. 

C. Pipes and fittings shall be manufactured with polyproplene seal retaining caps. 

All joints for below ground pipework shall be made by seal ring expansion 

joint. 

2.04 SANITARY DISTRIBUTION PIPEWORK 

A. The sanitary pipework for cold water and hot water distribution from the water 

distribution cabinets to the taps, mixers, etc. shall be cross linked polyethylene 

plastic pipes, PE-Xa with high molecular weight and high density according to DIN 

16892, with a working pressure of 10 bar at 90 C temperature, and shall comply with 

and approved by DVGW (Germany), for drinking water and food usage. 

The cross-linking factor shall be net less than 75%. 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-4

The outside diameter of all pipes supply sanitary fixtures shall be 16mm of 2.2mm 

thickness, 20mm of 2.8mm thickness, 25mm of 3.5mm thickness. 

The pipes shall run in conduits (sleeves) to each individual outlet without using any 

fittings along to the distribution cabinets. 

The sleeves shall be of smooth polyethylene pipe of 32mm dia for 16mm and 20mm 

pipes, and 50mm for 25mm pipes. 

The pipes shall be flexible type delivered coiled. 

The gap between the conduit and the pipe connected to the manifold outlet shall be 

sealed with approved rubber ring. 

B. Connections to Sanitary Fixtures 

The connections of PEX pipes to the tapes, mixers etc., shall be made using brass 

elbow/adapter to BS 5750, housed in PVC box (Termination Box) built inside the 

wall. The boxes shall have provision for incoming flexible conduit. 

The termination box shall have compression connection for PEX pipe on one side 

and female thread for the tap, mixer connection on other. 

The complete assembly shall be such that the PEX pipe can be withdrawn and 

replaced without damaging the wall finish. 


3.01 SOIL, WASTE AND RAINWATER PIPEWORK 

A. WORKMANSHIP 

1. Materials and workmanship shall be of best quality and 

executed in accordance with the Specification, drawings and 

manufacturers recommendations. 

2. Where any pipe is required to be shortened it shall be cut off 

square and cleanly with an approved pipe-cutting machine. 

3. Where special joints or jointing materials are shown for pipes 

of any materials, they shall be of an approved type and 

manufacture, and the joint shall be made in accordance with 

the manufacturer's instructions, or as directed. 

4. Responsibility shall be assumed to identify and install all 

necessary expansion couplings and fire sleeves throughout the 

installations. 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-5

5. All plant, pipes and fittings etc shall be thoroughly cleaned of 

all foreign matter before installation. Each section of the 

installation shall be clean and free from any obstructions 

whatsoever before proceeding with the next section of the 

installation. 

6. Flexible joints are to be provided wherever pipes cross 

expansion joints. 

7. All soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes shall be to the sizes 

and positions indicated on the drawings to take the discharge 

from the branch waste and vent pipes, sanitary fittings and 

equipment adjacent thereto. 

8. On completion the whole of the work is to be handed over in a 

sound and clean condition. In the event of any pipe being 

fractured from any cause whatsoever after having been (to all 

appearances) properly installed, responsibility shall be 

assumed in every instance and any such defective pipes shall 

be replaced for approval. 

9. All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly 

appearance, arranged parallel to or at right-angles to the 

structural members of the buildings, giving maximum 

headroom and shall not obstruct windows or doorways. 

Pipework shall be erected such that there is a minimum 

clearance of 75 mm to finished floor level and a minimum 

clearance of 25 mm to finished wall faces. 

10. Slopes of drainage system (gravity) shall be as recommended 

by local codes. 

B. The discharge pipework shall be so installed as to minimise the risk of 

blockage. Access covers and/or rodding eyes are to be positioned such as to 

enable maintenance equipment to be inserted into the system(s) to permit 

cleaning or clearing of all sections of the system(s). 

The pipework system and fittings are to be installed so that broken or defective parts 

can be easily removed and replaced. 

The discharge pipework shall ensure that there is no leakage of contaminated water or 

foul air into any building. 

C. The work shall be set out and responsibility assumed for the accuracy of the 

same and the position of all fittings shall be approved by the Client's 

representative. When first setting to any work, consideration must be given 

to the work of other trades. 

D. Responsibility shall be assumed for leaving all unfinished works in a safe 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-6

condition during the progress of the works. 

All materials and equipment are to be installed and protected in such manner as to be 

adequately covered against damage and deterioration, and during the execution of the 

work the open ends of all pipework shall be temporarily plugged off by means of blank 

ends and compression caps respectively. 

E. Vent pipe roof termination 

1. Discharge stacks complete with domical cages shall terminate 

not less than 300 mm above the roof, 900 mm above and not 

less than 3000 mm, measured horizontally from any window 

or air conditioner. 

2. Where the stack passes through floors, ceilings and roofs, the 

openings are to be perfectly sealed-off by proprietary fittings. 

They shall terminate with neoprene aluminium weathering 

slate, weathering collar; and a cowl on top of pipe. 

F. All branch waste pipes to a range of fittings shall have an access provided on 

the pipe in an accessible position at the end of the run. 

G. All pipework shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer 

recommendations. Sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through walls 

or floors. Pipe sleeves shall be compatible with the pipes they protect; noncombustible 

and 1 ½ times the diameter of the pipe. Void between pipe and 

pipe sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool and sealed with approved 

mastic sealant. 

H. Where plastic pipes 50mm diameter and larger pass through fire 

compartment walls, floors or ceiling cavity barriers they shall be fitted with 

approved collars having the same fire resistance rating as the fire barrier they 

pass through. 

I. All vertical soil and waste pipes shall have access doors on each floor fitted 

above the spillover level of fittings served. Where pipes are installed in ducts 

or built into walls access doors shall be provided in the duct wall or wall for 

access to the access door. The type and finish of the access shall be to suit the 

location and to the approval of the Architect. 

J. Connection to sanitary fittings 

All outlets shall be trapped and provided with accessible and adequate means of 

removal and cleaning. The traps shall be designed to be self-cleaning all surfaces and 

joints are to be smooth. 

1. All traps with outlets for pipes up to and including 50 mm 

shall have a minimum water seal of 75 mm. 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-7

2. Traps with outlets for pipes of over 50 mm shall have a 

minimum water seal of 50 mm. 

The waste pipes to the various sanitary fittings shall be of the following minimum 

sizes: 

Wash basins 

Sinks 

WC's 

Shower bath tray 

Floor drains with integral trap 

Floor drains with P- trap 

Urinals 

Bidet 

Floor cleanouts 

50 mm diameter 









K. Condensate drains shall be provided from all fan coil units, and other A/C 

units complete with proper P- trap and shall be piped as indicated on 

drawings. 

L. Self siphonage tests 

The contractor shall undertake tests for self-siphonage and induced siphonage in 

branch discharge pipes by filling each appliance to over flowing and then discharging 

by removing the plugs and discharging the W.C(s) at the upstream end of the discharge 

pipe. All seals are to remain in the traps. The numbers of sanitary appliances to be 

discharged for this performance test are enumerated below: 

Type of 

Use 

Number of 

appliances 

of each kind 

on the stack 

Number of appliances to be discharged 

simultaneously 

Domestic 1 to 9 

10 to 24 

Congested 1 to 4 

5 to 9 

10 to 13 

14 to 26 

27 to 39 

40 to 50 

WC Wash basin Kitchen sink 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

2 

2 

2 

2 

3 

3 

4 

3 

5 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-8

M. Testing and commissioning 

1. All tests requested by Local Municipality on the entire 

installation shall be carried out, and all necessary appliance 

and equipment for this purpose shall be supplied. 

2. Provision shall be made to carry out any test requested at any 

time during the progress of the works or after their 

completion. 

3. Whilst phased testing may be carried out (which may or may 

not have been witnessed) the contractor shall be required to 

demonstrate the watertightness, alignment, and level and 

cleanliness of the whole installation seven days prior to the 

installation being handed over. 

4. This requirement shall be discharged by the applying a full 

running water test to the whole installation as described below 

and by the drawing through of a drain profile, which will be 

provided, to the required detail. 

5. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Client's 

representative, and a minimum of 48 hours notice shall be 

given of readiness to test any section of the installation. Test 

Certificates shall be submitted to the person witnessing the 

test for their signature of approval, to the effect that the 

system satisfies the requirements of this Specification. 

6. All sections of works must be pretested to satisfy that the 

system will pass the required test, prior to carrying out the 

main test. 

7. The Test Certificate shall be required to be completed for all 

sections of the installation. 

8. After erection and immediately prior to sealing in, all 

rainwater, main soil, waste, vent and branch soil, waste pipes, 

shall be checked throughout for obstructions and finally tested 

for soundness. 

9. The above ground sanitation and rainwater pipe installation 

shall be subjected to two air tests, one of 75 mm water gauge 

for a minimum period of 9 minutes prior to connection of 

sanitary fittings and building in of pipework, and a second air 

test on completion of the system with all traps and WC's 

connected when the test pressure shall be 45 mm water gauge 

for a minimum period of 9 minutes. 

10. At start of testing, sanitation and Rainwater Pipework shall be 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-9

checked for alignment and stability; mechanical joints shall be 

re-torqued where necessary. 

11. Access doors shall be removed, felt washers greased and 

doors replaced. 

12. The whole system shall be rodded through with an 

appropriately sized disc type plus the allowance shall also be 

made for testing to the Local Authority requirements and for 

carrying out separate and independent tests if required. 

13. The provision shall also be made for obtaining an acceptance 

test certificate form the Local Authority on completion of the 

works. The test for the Local Authority shall be allowed for 

as an addition to the tests required under this specification. 

3.02 DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER SERVICES PIPEWORK 

A. Product handling 

1. All products shall be delivered in manufacturer's original 

protective packaging. All products shall be inspected at time 

of delivery for damage and for compliance with 

Specifications. Any products that are found to be damaged or 

not in accordance with the Specifications shall immediately be 

repaired or removed from the site and replaced. Repairs shall 

not be undertaken before the Engineer's review of Contractor's 

proposed action. 

2. All products shall be handled and stored as recommended by 

the manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration. The 

Contractor shall supply handling equipment such as lifting 

beams, reinforced canvas slings, protective padding, struts, 

cradles, etc., required to handle the products without 

damaging hardware or linings and coatings. 

3. Products shall be protected against damage and the ambient 

conditions both during transport, site storage and immediately 

up to the time products are installed. Precautions shall be 

taken to protect the product from mechanical damage and the 

effects of sunlight and heat, until the backfilling operations 

have been completed. All site storage areas shall be shaded. 

B. Installation of pipework 

1. Joints in buried pipework shall be kept to the absolute 

minimum. Marker tapes with embedded metal strip shall be 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-10

laid 90 mm above the pipework. If valves are required, they 

are to be in a valve chamber with the surface box lettered to 

indicate what service is below them. 

2. The underground pipework shall be laid in 200 mm of sand or 

stone free bedding material and wherever possible in straight 

lines to uniform gradients. The clearance between the 

pipework and footings of the buildings is not to be less than 

200 mm. If less, the pipes shall be installed in a flexible 

sleeve. 

3. All pipework shall run vertically or at an inclination to the 

horizontal to enable the whole system to be drained off either 

through the system or through a valve discharging externally 

with an air gap to prevent contamination by backflow. When 

the pipework is drained down, air is to be allowed into the 

system to prevent failure or damage to the hot water cylinder. 

A manual air inlet value shall be fitted to the high point in the 

system to achieve this. 

4. Where cold water pipes are run chased into walls, floors, or 

exposed to view all pipework shall be insulated. 

5. All main domestic hot water pipework shall be insulated. 

6. The connection of PEX pipes to sanitary fixtures shall be made via brass 

elbow housed inside pvc box, chrome plated angle valve, chrome plated 

copper tube flexible connections. 

7. All PEX pipework distributed to sanitary fixtures shall run inside 

polyethylene sleeves of smooth pipes . 

8 All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance, 

arranged parallel to or at right-angles to the structural members of the 

buildings, giving maximum headroom and shall not obstruct windows 

or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers, projections and into 

recesses forming part of the structural works whether so indicated on 

the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a 

minimum clearance of 75 mm to the finished floor level and at least 

25 mm to the finished wall faces. 

9. All fittings shall, as far as practicable, be the same size as the tubes 

and pipes connected to them. Bushed outlets will only be accepted if 

the required outlet size of a fitting is not of standard manufacturer. 

Eccentric bushings and square tees shall be used where concentric 

bushing and pitcher tees might cause air to be trapped in the system. 

Elsewhere, square tees shall be confined to dead-leg branches of 

domestic hot water supply systems and on cold-water branches to 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-11

fitting or ranges of fittings. 

10 Elbows shall be used, where practicable, in preference to bends. 

11 Pipework shall follow the contours of walls and shall be graded to 

ensure venting and draining. The clearance between pipework (or 

the insulation) and the wall and any other fixtures shall be not less 

than 20 mm. 

12. Tubes shall be reamed after cutting and shall be free from burrs, rust 

scale and other defects and shall be thoroughly cleaned before 

erection. Open ends left during the progress of work shall be 

temporally closed with purpose-made metal or plastic plugs or caps, 

or blank metal flanges. 

13. All joints between copper and steel pipes shall be made using 

dielectric couplings.. 

14 Where pipework passes through walls, floors or ceilings, 

sleeves shall be provided. Pipework passing through flooring 

shall be provided with approved type floor and ceiling plates 

fastened securely to the pipe. The sleeves shall be 1.5 of pipe 

size and to be of the same metal as the pipe. 

9. All exit holes to or from a building for pipework services shall 

be sealed and plugged. For service conditions below 60 deg C 

the sealant shall be mastic compound, Above this temperature 

it shall be silicon rubber. Where the pipework enters the 

building through a large hole or duct, a mild steel blanking 

plate not less than 6 mm thick shall be built into the walls of 

the hole or duct. The service pipes shall pass through 

clearance sockets welded to the plate and the space between 

pipe exterior and socket interior shall be sealed and plugged. 

16 Hangers for horizontal pipework shall be supported in 

accordance with the requirements of Section 1102 – Plumbing 

Supports, Hangers and Brackets. 

17 Piping that is insulated shall be secured by clips that allow 

sufficient space behind the back of the pipe for the pipe 

insulation to be properly installed. 

18 All pipework shall be installed so that the vertical distance 

between the discharge point and overflow level of the 

receiving appliance shall not be less than 25 mm for taps 

and/or fittings up to and including 20 mm and 70 mm for 

those over 20 mm to prevent contamination as result of 

backflow of water. 

C. Storage 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-12

1. All pipework shall be stored on purpose made pipe racks of 

welded construction and of sufficient strength to support the 

entire weight of the materials without any noticeable 

deformation. The racks shall be such that all pipework is clear 

of the ground. 

2. Pipework fittings shall be stored within a well-lit container 

made compartmented racks or shelves. The fittings shall be 

separated by means of their type and size and laid out in an 

orderly manner for ease of identification. 

D. System testing 

1. The Contractor shall ensure that all pipework is watertight to 

the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall supply all pressure 

gauges, meters, hoses, pumps and other temporary supports, 

equipment and manpower necessary for carrying out pressure 

tests. 

2. The Contractor shall, during testing, check the satisfactory 

operation of each valve installed under the Contract. 

3. Before filling or pressure testing is started the Contractor shall 

re-check pipes and valves for cleanliness and shall re-check 

the operation of valves. The open ends of the pipes shall 

normally be stopped off by blank flanges or capped ends 

additionally secured where necessary by temporary struts and 

wedges. 

4. Potable water system shall be tested with water to 1.5 times 

the normal system working pressure or 6 bar whichever is 

greater for a period of 4 hours, while uncovered but 

adequately anchored. The testing shall be carried out in 

sections if necessary. If a section should fail the test, the 

Contractor shall trace and repair all leaks and defects and 

retest the section before any further pipes or section of 

adjacent pipework are laid. 

5. The system shall be filled with potable water and all air 

expelled. After the system has been completely filled, the 

pressure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the test 

pressure has been reached. If any loss is recorded, repairs shall 

be made and the test re-run. 

6. Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested 

system together with time of test and name of testing Engineer 

in tabulated format shall be submitted for review by the 

Engineer upon completion of the test. 

E. Flushing and disinfection 



_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-13

1. All visible dirt and debris shall be removed from the tank. 

2. The tank and distributing pipes shall be filled with clean, 

potable water and then drained until empty of all water. 

3. The tank shall be filled with clean potable water and supply 

closed. 

4. A measured quantity of sodium hypochlorite solution of a 

known strength shall be added to the water in the tank to give 

a free residual chlorine concentration of 50mg/L (50ppm) in 

the water. 

5. The tank shall be left to stand for 1 hour. 

6. Each draw off fitting shall be successively opened working 

progressively away from the tank. 

7. Each tap and draw off fitting shall be closed when the water 

discharged smells of chlorine. 

8. The tank shall not be allowed to become empty during this 

operation. If necessary it shall be refilled and chlorinated as 

above. 

9. The cistern and pipes shall then remain charged for a further 

1-hour. 

10. The tap furthest from the cistern shall be opened and the level 

of free residual chlorine in the water discharged from the tap 

measured. If the concentration of free residual chlorine is less 

then 30mg/L (30 ppm) the disinfecting process shall be 

repeated. 

11. Finally, the tank and pipes shall remain charged for at least 16 

hours and then thoroughly flushed out with clean, potable 

water until the free residual chlorine concentration at the taps 

is no greater then 21 mg/L (21ppm). 




_________________________________________________________________________________ 


1100-14

SECTION 1101 

PLUMBING VALVES 



A. This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials, and the 

standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of valves. 




C. Section 1100 Plumbing Piping 





A. The work includes the provision of all labour; materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the supply and installation of valves as specified 

herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 




A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of valves whose 

products have been in satisfactory use in similar applications for not less than 10 

years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of valves with at 

least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar nature. 


A. The valves and all associated materials shall comply fully with the latest relevant 

British Standards in all respects. 



________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Valves 

1101-1

The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards 

associated with valves and associated materials. However, the Contractor shall 

ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with, whether listed here or 

not. 

BS: 21 

BS: 4504 

BS: 590 

BS: 591 

BS: 592 

BS: 2879 

BS: 593 

BS: 594 

BS: 595 

BS: 596 

BS: 6683 

Specification for Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings where 

Pressure Tight Joints are made on the Threads. 

Circular Flanges for Pipes, Valves and Fittings (PN 

designated). 

Specification for cast iron gate valves. 

Cast Iron Gate (Parallel Slide ) Valves. 

Cast Iron Globe and Globe Stop and Check Valves for general 

purposes. 

Draining taps (screw down pattern). 

Cast Iron Check Valves for general purposes. 

Copper Alloy Globe, Globe Stop and Check, Check and Gate 

Valves. 

Butterfly valves. 

Diaphragm Valves. 

Guide to Installation and Use of Valves. 






1.08 WARRANTY 




________________________________________________________________ 


1101-2


2.01 GENERAL 

A. Valves, cocks, air vents and pipework specialties shall be provided where indicated 

on the Drawings and at all positions necessary for the proper working, regulation, 

control and maintenance of the installation with the approval for the Engineer. 

B. All valves and cocks shall be suitable for the temperatures, working and test 

pressures applicable to each system. 

C. All valves cocks vents and specialties must be fitted in such a manner that they are 

accessible for operation and maintenance. 

D. All valves, cocks, vents and specialties installed for the work specified in this 

Contract shall be of the manufacturer specified hereafter or equal and approved by 

the Engineer. 

2.02 VALVES 

A. Isolating Valves < 50mm shall be:- 

1. Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Gate Valve to BS 594 series ‘B’ threaded to BS 21 

taper. Solid wedge disk, non-rising stem, screwed-in bonnet, handwheel 

operated. Rated PN20. 

B. Isolating Valves > 65m shall be:- 

1. Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) Gate Valve to BS 590 flanged BS 4504 Wedge 

disk, non-rising stem, inside screw. Bronze seat rings and disk facings. Rated 

PN16. 

C. Non Return Valves < 50mm shall be:- 

Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Non-return Valve swing type to BS 594 series ‘B’ threaded 

to BS 21 taper. Renewable nitrile rubber disk, free to rotate, and hinge pin mounted. 

Screwed-in cap. Integral seat. Rated PN20 but limited to 100C maximum 

temperature. 

D. Non Return Valves > 65 mm shall be:- 

1. Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) Non-return Valve swing type to BS 593 BS 4504 

PN16. Bronze faced disk, free to rotate, hinge pin mounted. Bolted seat ring 

bronze. Rated PN16. 



________________________________________________________________ 


1101-3

E. Strainers < 50mm shall be:- 

1. Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) ‘Y’ type Strainer. Ends threaded to BS 21 taper. 

Fitted with perforated stainless steel screens with 0.75 mm holes. Machined 

seats body and cap ends. Screwed-in cap with captive washer. Rated PN32. 

F. Strainers > 65mm shall be:- 

1. Cast iron (BS 1452 – 220) ‘Y’ type Strainer. Ends flanged to BS 4504 Fitted 

with perforated stainless steel screens with 0.75mm holes. Machined seats 

body and cap ends. Bolted cap with captive washer. Rated PN16. 

G. Draining Taps < 25mm shall be:- 

1. Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Angle Pattern Screw-down Draining Tap, lockshield 

type. Male inlet threaded to BS 21 taper, outlet ribbed to provide integral 

hose connection. Washer EP rubber. Rated PN 10. 

H. Draw Off Cocks < 50mm shall be:- 

Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Gland Pattern Draw-off Cock to BS 2879 type 2, inlet 

threaded male to BS 21 taper. Fitted with hose union. Bronze tapered plug. Rated 

generally to PN 10. 

I. Automatic Air Vents shall be:- 

1. Bronze (BS 1400 LG2) Automatic Air Vent, Vertical inlet with Bronze union 

threaded ½” BS21 taper female, Horizontal side outlet threaded ½” BS2779 

parallel with compression nut and sleeve to suit copper tube to BS2871. 

Borosilicate glass inspection tube, integral check valve on outlet, EPDM 

disk, 316 Stainless steel lever and clip, Rated PN 10. 

J. Hose bibs 

Hose bibs shall be bronze, with coupling union elbow replaceable hexagonal disc, 

hose thread spout, vacuum breaker, chrome plated where exposed. 

K. Pressure reducing valves 

1. Water pressure reducing valves shall deliver flow rates based on initial and 

final pressures as indicated. Valves shall be suitable for 1725 kPa operating 

pressure on the inlet side with outlet pressure range 34.5 to 682 kPa. 

2. Valves shall have easily adjustable low-pressure setting and shall be designed 

to resist water shock pressures. 



________________________________________________________________ 


1101-4

3. Valves 50mm and smaller shall have bronze body and trim with screwed 

ends. 

4. Valves 65mm and larger shall have iron body and bronze trim and flanged 

ends. 

5. Valves shall have stainless steel stem, disc and diaphragm shall be synthetic 

rubber, and seats shall be bronze. 

6. Valves shall be self-contained, single seated direct operated, diaphragm, 

spring-loaded type with balanced operation suitable for continuous or deadend 

service. 

L. Double Check Valve Assemblies. 

Bronze backed in line double check valves to BS 6282 part 1 with intervening test 

plug and screwed ends. 

M. Automatic Relief Valves 

1. Pressure relief valves 

Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim with pipe type manual actuation 

lever. The unit shall be pre-set and sealed at the factory. 

2. Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves 

Bronze body, stainless steel spring and trim on ceramic coated temperature 

sensing element and pipe type manual actuation lever. Unit shall be rated for 

relieving the maximum heat input to the water heater and pre-set and factory 

sealed. Unit shall be labelled with manufactures name, serial no, maximum 

working pressure and temperature, set pressure and temperature and relieving 

capacity in watts. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All valves shall be stored within a well lit container on purpose made 

compartmented racks or shelves, constructed in a similar manner to support the 

entire weight of materials without noticeable deformation. 

B. The valves shall be separated by means of their type and size and laid out in an 

orderly manner for ease of identification. 

C. Valves shall be supplied and stored with purpose made or manufactured plugs to 

prevent ingress of dirt. 



________________________________________________________________ 


1101-5

3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION 

A. Valves with screwed ends shall have a union installed adjacent to the valve for ease 

of dismantling. 

B. Where possible, valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertically upright 

position. However, all valves shall be installed in a manner such that they are 

readily accessible for ease of operation. 

C. Sufficient clearance shall be allowed for the application of thermal insulation, valve 

boxes, etc. and to ensure that full travel of the valve stem can be achieved. 

3.03 ISOLATING VALVES 

A. Separate isolating valves shall be provided on all pipework services to each item of 

plant or equipment and on each main and submain, except where flow measuring or 

regulating valves are required and these valves can be used for isolating purposes 

without affecting their measuring or regulating functions. 

3.04 DRAIN VALVES 

A. Drain valves shall be installed at all system low points on the dead side of isolating 

valves and on all items of plant to facilitate emptying down and removal. 

B. Line sized drain valves shall be installed at the end of each pipework run and at the 

base of each pipework riser to enable the system to be adequately flushed. 

3.05 AIR VENTING DEVICES 

A. Air venting devices shall be installed at all system high points. 

B. Automatic air eliminators shall be complete with copper relief pipework, taken to 

within 1.5 m of the floor level and extended to a position where any discharge will 

not damage building fabrics, decorations or the like. 




________________________________________________________________ 


1101-6


SECTION 1102 

PLUMBING SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND BRACKETS 


A. This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the 

standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Supports, 

Hangers and Brackets. 





D. Section 1101 Plumbing Valves 




A. The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of 

all operations in connection with the supply and installation of Supports, Hangers 

and Brackets as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 

B. Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full co-ordination of 

the work of all trades. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Supports, Hangers 

and Brackets whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar 

application for not less than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of pipework 

systems with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a 

similar nature. 



_______________________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Supports, Hangers & Brackets 

1102-1


A. The Supports, Hangers and Brackets and all associated materials and 

workmanship shall comply with the latest relevant British Standards in all 

respects. 

The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards 

associated with pipework products and associated materials. However, the 

Contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with 

whether listed here or not. 

BS 5572 

BS 1387 

BS 2871 

BS 3974 

(Part 1 & 2) 

Sanitary pipework. 

Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and 

tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding 

or for screwing to BS 21 Pipe Threads. 8mm - 90 mm dia. 

Copper and copper alloy tubes. 

Pipe supports. 


A. Drawings: Refer to Section 1000. 

B. Products: Submit full manufacturer data for every item. 


A. Comply with Section 1000. 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. Provide warranty in accordance with the contract conditions. 






_______________________________________________________________________________ 


1102-2

2.01 GENERAL 

A. All supports, hangers and brackets shall be of an approved manufacture as 

described herein and detailed on the drawings. 

B. All steel products used for support systems if not manufactured from malleable 

cast iron or stainless steel shall be either galvanised or painted with one coat of 

red oxide paint. 

C. All drop rods shall be galvanised and sized to suit the bracket type and system 

weight but in no case shall be less than 6-mm diameter. 

D. All materials used for support systems shall be compatible with the material they 

are supporting. Generally steel pipework shall be supported by cast iron and steel 

clips, copper pipework by copper or brass clips and uPVC pipework by brass or 

PVC clips. Where galvanised steel pipework is used all pipework clips shall be 

galvanised. 

E. Where brackets are exposed to view they shall be of a chrome-plated finish. 

F. Fixings to concrete and masonry shall be of the expanding bolt or wedge anchor 

type selected in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and suitable 

for the imposed loads. Where fixings are to be made close to the outside edge of 

concrete or masonry structures resin banded fixings shall be used to reduce the 

risk of fracture. 

G. Brackets for fixing to woodwork or lightweight partitioned walls shall be of the 

screw on pattern. 

H. Purpose made girder clamps shall be used where any system is supported from 

steelwork and only with the approval of the Engineer. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All continuous lengths of channel angle and screwed rod shall be stored on 

purpose made pipe racks of welded construction and of sufficient strength to 

support the entire weight of the material without any noticeable deformation. The 

racks shall be such that all material is clear of the ground. 

B. All raw metal shall be wire brushed and painted with one coat of red oxide paint 

prior to storage. 



_______________________________________________________________________________ 


1102-3

C. All general support materials shall be stored within a well-lit container on purpose 

made compartmented racks or shelving. The materials shall be separated by 

means of their type and size and laid out in an orderly manner for ease of 

identification. 

3.02 GENERAL 

A. All systems shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free 

movement due to expansion, contraction, vibration or other changes in the system. 

Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction. 

B. Vertical rising pipes and ducts particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported 

at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall 

branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical 

pipework. 

C. Hangers for horizontal systems at high level shall be supported from angle or 

channel irons suitable for securing to the structure. 

D. Pipework shall be independently supported; double stacking of pipes from the 

same support will not be permitted. 

E. Adjustable mild steel hangers on steel pipework systems shall be used with swivel 

joints at the pipe rings and spherical washers at the top of the hanger rods. Pipe 

rings shall be malleable cast iron or fabricated steel made in halves and secured 

by bolts or screws. Malleable iron hinged pipe rings may also be used but calliper 

hooks shall not be permitted. Pipework 65 mm diameter and over shall not be 

supported using malleable iron brackets. All pipe brackets over 50 mm diameter 

shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved by the Engineer prior to 

manufacture. 

F. Where rollers and chairs are required, these shall be preformed and where used 

singularly they shall have restraining "U" straps or bolts formed over the diameter 

of the pipe and bolted to the base support of the chair. The "U" straps or bolts 

shall be fitted to allow movement of the pipe without binding. Continuously 

threaded "U" bolts will not be permitted. 

G. The spacing of supports shall be determined in accordance with the pipe 

manufacturer recommendation. Where one support carries more than one pipe of 

different diameters the spacing shall be determined by the requirement of the 

smallest diameter. 




_______________________________________________________________________________ 


1102-4

SECTION 1103 

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 



A. This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials, and the 

standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Plumbing 

Specialties. 


A. The work includes the provision of all labour; materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the supply and installation of Plumbing Specialties as 

specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 




A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of piping specialties 

whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less 

than 10 years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Plumbing 

Specialties with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a 



A. The Plumbing Specialties and all associated materials shall comply fully with the 

latest relevant British Standards in all respects. 


A. Drawings - 


C. Provide samples of each item where requested by the Engineer. 



_______________________________________________________________________ 

Section 1103-1 

Plumbing Specialties

1.08 WARRANTY 



2.02 PIPE SLEEVES 

A. Pipe work sleeves shall be compatible with the pipes they protect and noncombustible. 

B. The inside diameter of sleeves shall be such as to allow an 8 mm minimum gap 

between the finished surface of an insulated pipe and the internal surface of the 

sleeve. The length of the sleeve shall be limited to prevent the sleeve protruding 

beyond the finished building surface. Void between pipe and pipe sleeve shall be 

packed with mineral wool and sealed at both ends with approved mastic sealant. 

2.03 FLOOR, CEILING AND WALL COVER PLATES 

A. Floor, ceiling and wall plates shall be plastic and selected to suit the pipework size 

and material with which they are to be used. 

2.04 PIPE CLEANOUTS 

A. Shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 100 mm will 

not be required. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be 

T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs of the same 

size as the pipe up to and including 100 mm. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug 

shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior 

downspouts, on each connection to building storm drain where interior downspouts 

are indicated, and on each building drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches 

may be omitted on stacks in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or 

where less than 450 mm of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on 

pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium-plated bronze, nickel 

bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access 

covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access 

covers may be provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs, and cover screws. 

Cleanouts in finished walls shall have access covers and frames installed flush with 

the finished wall. Covers in finished walls shall be of a type approved by the 

Architect. 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



2.05 FLASHINGS 

A. A sheet-lead flashing shield shall be provided for drains and pipe sleeves with 

integral clamping devices that penetrate a membrane. Flashing shield shall be made 

from sheet lead not lighter than 20 kg/m², and extend not less than 200 mm from the 

drain or sleeve in all direction. Flashing shall be inserted into the clamping device 

and made watertight. Lead flashing shields, and roof flanges of lead or copper 

flashing with integral flange, shall be set over membrane in a solid coat of a 

bituminous cement and strip-flashed as specified by the manufacturer. Pipes passing 

through pitched roofs shall be flashed using lead or copper flashing with an 

adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 200 mm from the 

pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to provide a watertight seal. 

2.06 FLOOR DRAINS 

A. Floor drain type FD, shall be trapped UPVC gully with integral cleanout. 

The floor drain shall have 4 blank inlets of 50 mm dia (2") and one outlet of 100 mm 

dia (4"). 

2.07 PLANTER DRAINS 

A. Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination membrane flashing clamp 

and gravel guard. Outlet size to suit connected pipework. 

B. Domed grating with fine stainless steel mesh screen secured in place by bolts. 

2.08 ROOF DRAINS 

A. UPVC body with bottom or angled outlets as required. Outlet size to suit connected 

pipe work. 

B. Domed, grating with securing bolts. 

2.09 FLOOR CLEANOUT 

A. UPVCbody with bottom outlet. Outlet size to suit connected pipework with 

maximum diameter 100mm and eccentric reducer to connect to pipework where 

larger than 100mm diameter. 90 x 90mm solid top, UPVC head with airtight seal. 

2.10 GRATING DRAIN 

A. Grating drain shall consist of pit of dimensions as indicated on the drawings; with 

heavy duty primary coated grating fitted to the pit by means of steel angles. The 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



ottom of the pit shall be provided with a floor drain type FD-1 as specified in 

Clause 2.06 B. 

The pit shall be furnished with all required civil work. 

2.11 WATER DISTRIBUTION CABINET 

The cabinet shall be 1.5mm thick stove enameled wall hung type on 

wall bearing hanger, and shall be exposed in the service shaft for 

maintenance.and shall be steel.with double doors. 

The depth of the cabinet shall be 110 mm, and the dimensions shall be 

selected according to the length of manifolds required as shown on the 

water distribution cabinets schedules drawings, and to be sufficient for 

the installation of all valves and fittings inside the cabinets. 

Where the cabinets located within walls of ceramic tiles finish, the 

cabinets shall be provided with heavy duty hinged type cover. The 

cover to be of 10 mm thick fitted with ceramic tiles. The cover shall be 

provided with locking mechanism. Cabinets and covers shall be 

approved by the Consultant. 

The cabinets shall include the following components: 

. 

A. Cold and Hot Water Manifolds & Fittings 

The manifold shall be made from extrusive shaped, brass bar with 

ends female threaded, and supplied with the required outlets. 

Manifolds and fittings shall be manufactured to BS 5750 Part (2). 

The manifold size shall be of the same internal bore as CWS & HWS 

feeder. 

The outlet size shall be of the same internal bore as PEX pipes 

distribution to the sanitary taps. 

The connection of manifolds and outlets to copper and plastic tubes 

shall be made properly using adaptors with O-rings. Outlets that are 

not required, they shall be blanked off with plug and washer. 

The manifolds shall be supported on the cabinet with adjustable 

horizontal brackets. 

B. Isolating Valves 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



Isolating valves shall be installed on CWS & HWS feeders to 

manifolds and to each individual pipe connections to manifolds 

outlets. 

The isolating valves shall be standard port ball valves with T-handle, 

chrome plated free brass, to BS 5750. 

The valve size shall be of the same bore as the pipework connections. 

Isolating valves shall be connected to the CWS and HWS feeders by 

copper elbows and fittings. 

C. Automatic Air Vents 

Automatic air vent of 12 mm dia. shall be provided on each manifold. 

2.12 MANHOLES - GENERAL 

Manholes shall be made of extra strength precast reinforced concrete construction 

and shall be of details shown on the drawings. 

Manholes shall be constructed to the required depth. The manholes top shall have a 

600mm. opening and shall be shaped to accommodate a standard size manhole 

frame and cover. 

Manhole floors shall be formed by hand with rich cement mortar to the size and 

shape of the sewer. Inverts shall have a cross section of exact shape as the sewers 

and all changes in sewer size shall be made gradually and evenly. The floor shall 

have a gradual slope from the sidewalls to the central channel 

All concrete shall be made with sulphate resisting cement. 

All internal surfaces of manholes shall be painted with two coats of approved 

bitumen solution. 

During construction of the manhole, galvanized iron steps shall be furnished and set 

in place on the inside wall. They shall be properly embedded in the wall. 

All work shall be carried out in a manner to ensure watertight construction. If leaks 

occur they shall be caulked, repaired or the entire work shall be removed and rebuilt. 

Attention shall be particularly paid to the necessary of keeping the water level below 

all parts of the manhole until the cement has obtained adequate set. 

2.13 BENCHING AND INVERTS OF MANHOLES 

The open channel in the bottom of the manholes shall be formed in the benching 

with half round of pipe. All side branches shall be connected to the main channel so 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



that the discharge is in the direction of the flow in the main channel. The benching 

shall be concrete and shall rise vertically from the edge of the channel pipe to a 

height not less that the outgoing pipe and be sloped upwards from there to meet the 

wall of the manhole at a gradient of about 1 in 6. Rendering to benching shall be 

applied in a coat of cement mortar (1:1) to a final thickness of 20 mm trowelled to a 

smooth hard finish in accordance with BS. CP301. 

2.14 TEMPORARY COVERS FOR MANHOLES 

Temporary covers shall be fitted and retained in position on all manholes from the 

time the top access is formed or the concrete cover slab installed, until the 

permanent cover is installed. 

2.9 MANHOLE STEP IRONS 

All manholes of depth greater than 1200 mm. shall be provided with galvanized steel 

irons complying with BS. 1247. They shall be staggered in two vertical runs at 

300mm. centers vertically and 225 mm horizontally. 

The top iron shall be no more than 350 mm. below the underside of the manhole 

cover slab and the lowest no more than 300 mm. above the benching. Manhole cover 

frames shall be bedded in 1:3 soleplate resisting cement sand mortar. 

2.16 FRAMES AND COVERS 

The Contractor shall provide for each manhole cast iron frame and cover with a 600 

mm diameter clear opening. the concrete masonry shall be neatly and accurately 

brought to the dimensions of the base of the frame. the frame shall be thoroughly 

embedded in mortar and frame and cover set level and to the proper grade. 

All castings for frames and covers shall be of tough gray iron and shall be made 

accurately to dimensions and machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers 

shall fit the frames in any position and if found to rattle under traffic shall be 

replaced. No plugging, burning in or filling to obtain tight covers will be allowed. 

All castings shall be carefully coated inside and outside with coal tar pitch varnish of 

approved quality. 

All frames and covers shall comply with BS 497 of grads as indicated on the 

manholes schedules. 

All manholes covers shall be provided with at least two keyways. 

All covers and frames shall have clearly cast thereon the number of BS., the 

appropriate grade and the weight in kg. 

2.17 TESTING OF DRAINS 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



Unless more stringent requirements are stated in this specification, all testing shall 

be carried out in accordance with BS8301. 

A. The Contractor shall provide the necessary labor and equipment and include in his 

Tender for testing and work to the requirements and satisfaction of the Engineer and 

all relevant public authorities. 

B. All drains and sewers shall be tested with air after being laid and jointed but before 

surround and backfilling is commenced to ensure that the jointing is satisfactory. 

The results of the test must be approved by the Engineer before connecting. 

The air test shall be applied at a pressure equivalent to 100mm head of water shall be 

held for 5 minutes without further pumping; with loss not exceeding 25mm for 

satisfactory testing. Where gullies or other ground floor appliances are connected, a 

50mm test should be applied with a maximum loss of 12mm over a 5-minute 

period.. 

A gauge in the form of a glass 'U' tube shall be provided and connected to the drain 

plug of the length of drain under test. 

C. A further water test shall be carried out after the completion of the backfilling and 

manhole construction, the length tested being between manholes. Test shall be 

carried out in the manner described in the following paragraph. 

D. To facilitate the general building program, tests shall be made of sections as the 

work proceeds, such testing however will not absolve the Contractor from his 

liability for any subsequent or final testing. 

E. Any defects that become apparent during these tests of any part or parts of the 

installation shall be rectified at the Contractor's expense and the part, or parts, 

retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the relevant public authorities. 

F. For a water test, the drain lines shall be subjected to test pressure of at least 900 mm. 

head of water at the highest point of the section under test. Allowance should be 

made for added water until absorption has ceased, after which the test proper should 

be commenced and the water level be maintained for a minimum of 30 minutes 

without the addition of further water. 

The same diameter as the drain at end, shall be fitted temporarily, in the socket of 

the last pipe laid the joints being made watertight. The length under test shall be 

fitted with water. The length under test shall be filled with water and after allowing 

for 2 hours absorption and topping up,. the water level in the pipe shall be observed 

for 30 minutes. The test shall be regarded as satisfactory if the loss of water does 

not exceed: 

Pipe Diameter 

Water Loss 



_______________________________________________________________________ 



(mm) 

(liter per meter run) 

100 .05 

90 .08 

225 .12 

300 .9 

G. Test for straightens and obstruction shall be made to the Engineer's satisfaction and 

in accordance with the requirements of B.S.C.P. 301, Building Drainage. 

H. The whole of the installation shall be left clean and free from debris. 

I. The Contractor shall keep a record of the tests carried out on the drainage 

installation throughout the Contract, recording date of test, by whom tested and the 

result, one copy of the records shall be sent to the Engineer on completion of the 

Contract. 

2.18 TESTING OF MANHOLES 

Manholes shall be subjected to a hydraulic test. Pipe stoppers shall be inserted into 

all pipe ends and the manhole filled with water to a height of 900 mm above the 

benching invert. This water shall stand for five minutes for absorption to take place 

and then be topped up as necessary. The water shall then remain at this level for a 

further two hours to satisfy the test. If the water level falls, then all defects shall be 

made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and the test shall be repeated as many 

times as may be necessary until the manhole is satisfactory. 

PART 3 INSTALLATION 

3.01 All floor drains and floor cleanouts shall be installed square to the building and 

surrounding finishes. The Contractor shall ensure that floor drains are co-ordinated 

with the tiling layout. 




_______________________________________________________________________ 



SECTION 1104 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 



A. This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to be 

used in the supply and installation of plumbing fixtures. 



B. Section 1100 Plumbing Piping 





a. Co-ordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of the work of 

all trades. 

b. Note, for actual specification of type of appliances in toilet areas refer to schedules. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of plumbing equipment and 

fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 

years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing works of a similar quality 

and scope as this project for at least 5 years. 


A. The plumbing fixtures shall comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards or DIN 

standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used British Standards associated with plumbing 



_________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Fixtures 

1104-1

fixtures. However the contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards are 

complied with, whether listed here or not. 

BS 1224 

Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium. 

BS 1254 

BS 1329 

BS 3402 

BS 3457 

BS 5388 

BS 5503 

BS 5506 

BS 5572 

BS 5627 

BS 5779 

WC seats (plastics) 

Metal hand rinse basins 

Quality of vitreous china sanitary appliances 

Materials for water tap and stop valve seat washers 

Spray taps 

WC pans with horizontal outlets 

Wash basins 

Sanitary pipework 

Plastic connectors for use with horizontal vitreous china WC pans. 

Spray mixing taps 




C. Provide samples of products where requested by Engineer. 

1.07 OPERATION MAINTENANCE DATA 


1.08 WARRANTY 






_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-2

PART 2 PODUCTS 

2.01 GENERAL 

A. All units and assemblies of sanitary ware shall be as shown on the Mechanical and 

Architectural drawings, listed in schedules and as listed below. 

B. Unless approved or stated otherwise all sanitary fixtures shall be from one manufacturer. 

C. Each plumbing fixture shall be supplied and installed complete with all necessary fittings 

for operational and maintenance requirements. All fittings exposed to view (i.e. not 

concealed in chase, void, duct or buried in building structure) shall be heavily chrome 

plated unless otherwise indicated in the specification schedules or on the drawings. 

2.02 WATER CLOSET- WALL HUNG 

White vitreous china, wall hung back outlet type, complete with the following trim and 

accessories: 

A. Solid plastic seat with cover and rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts. 

. 

B. 6 liter cistern concealed type with stop valve 20mm dia, push button plate,chrome plated. 

C. Chrome plated angle valve with copper tube flexible connection and escutcheon. 

D 

WC plastic outlet connector 

E. WC bowl S-trap 

2.03 WATER CLOSET- FLOOR MOUNTED 

White vitreous china, floor mounted type, complete with the following trim and accessories: 

A. Solid plastic seat with cover and rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts. 

B. 6 liter cistern and valve less fittings including siphon, side inlet ball valve, internal overflow, 

and reversible chrome plated cistern lever and cistern support. 

C. Chrome plated angle valve with copper tube flexible connection and escutcheon. 

D 

WC plastic outlet connector 

E. WC bowl S-trap 

2.04 WASH BASIN – SEMI-PEDESTAL TYPE 

White vitreous china, semi-pedestal type, with one tap hole and overflow, complete with the 



_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-3

following trim and accessories: 

A. Single lever mixer with ceramic cartridge, mousseur variable adjustable volume and 

temperature limiter 

B. Pop-up waste fitting 

C. Chrome plated trap 32mmdia. 

D. Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections. 

E. Wall brackets. 

2.05 WASH BASIN – COUTERTOP TYPE 

White vitreous china, countertop type, with one tap hole and overflow, complete with the 

following trim and accessories: 

A. Single lever mixer with ceramic cartridge, mousseur variable adjustable volume and 

temperature limiter 

B. Pop-up waste fitting 

C. Chrome plated trap 32mmdia. 

D. Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections. 

2.06 SHOWER TRAY 

The shower tray shall be made of pressed steel 3.5mm thick coated with porcelain vitreous 

enamel china, of dimensions 760x760 mm, with anti- slip base and 90mm wall height, 

complete with the following trim and accessories: 

A. Single- lever bath/ shower mixer 9mm dia , wall mounted. 

B. U-grip ceramic cartridge, automatic diverter bath/ shower mixer integrated non return 

valve, mousseur, S- union, flow limiter, temperature limiter. 

C. Shower set consisting of shower rail 600mm long, with wall brackets, sliding piece and 

swivel holder, hand shower, shower hose 900mm long, soap dish all of chrome plated. 

2.07 URINAL 

Urinal shall be white vitreous china wall mounted type screwed to wall with hangers. The 

urinal shall be complete with the following trim and accessories: 

A. Chrome plated flush valve 20mm dia with spreader. 

B. Chrome plated domed outlet grating 40mm dia. 



_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-4

C. Chrome plated bottle trap 40mm dia. 

D. Bowel support. 

2.08 BEDIT- FLOOR MOUNTED 

Bidet shall be white vitreous china floor mounted with one tap hole, of dimensions 

370x390mm. The bidet shall be complete with the following trim and accessories: 

A. One hole single lever mixer 9mm dia. 

B. Over rim supply pop-up waste fittings. 

C. Bidet trap 32mm dia. 

D. Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections 

2.09 HAND SPREY 

Hand spray shall be complete with chrome plated angle valve, one meter flexible tube and 

wall bracket. 

2.10 SINK 

The sink shall be made of 1.2mm stainless steel and of overall dimensions as shown on 

Architectural drawings. The sink shall be complete with the following trim and 

accessories: 

A. Single lever sink mixer 9mm dia deck mounted with ceramic cartridge, swivelling 

tubular spout, mousseur, with adjustable volume and temperature limiter. 

B. Plastic bottle trap 40mm dia. 

C. Two angle valves with escutcheon and copper tube flexible connections. 

2.11 SANITARY ACCESSORIES 

All Sanitary accessories shall be as shown on the Architectural drawings. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All plumbing fixtures shall be stored in their original containers in a secure enclosed store. 

Vitreous chinaware shall be stored out of direct sunlight. Accessories (Taps, mixers, etc.) 

shall be stored in boxes or wrappings to prevent the ingress of dust to machined surfaces. 

All storage areas shall have adequate artificial lighting to allow for inspection of the 

equipment by the Engineer. 



_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-5

3.02 FIXINGS 

A. All fixings (Screens, Bolts etc.) shall be as supplied and/or recommended by the 

fitting/fixture manufacturer. The fixings shall be entirely suitable for the medium they are 

fixing into and shall be chosen to prevent any electrolytic action between any of the 

installation elements. All fixings exposed to view shall be stainless steel or where only the 

heads are exposed shall have caps of the same colours as the item they are fixing. 

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES 

A. All preparation work (provision of holes, pipes etc.) shall be carried out in strict accordance 

with the fixture manufacturers requirements and shall be arranged such that pipe fittings, 

offsets & connections are kept to a minimum. All plumbing fixtures shall be securely fixed 

to the structure or their support system and shall be plumb & level. The fixtures & their 

plumbing connections shall be arranged to ensure the connections are not subject to any 

strain or load from the fixtures. 

B. All fixtures shall be sealed to adjacent walls or other surface with white silicon sealant. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS 

A. All accessories shall be installed true & straight or where curved, shall follow the 

manufacturer recommendations to produce a smooth, fair & continuous radius. Any 

accessories exhibiting `tool working' or surface finish damage shall be replaced. When 

positioning fixtures and accessories the contractor shall ensure that all items are central, or 

where in a range, consistent and symmetrical about architectural finishes as indicated on the 

Architectural drawings. 

B. Where accessories are concealed the contractor shall ensure that they are accessible for 

maintenance without affecting the structure or finishes. 

3.05 PROTECTION 

A. The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect fixtures and accessories during 

construction. New equivalent units shall replace any damaged fixtures and accessories. 

Repairing of damaged units shall not be accepted. 

B. All fixtures and accessories shall be finally cleaned and put into working order upon 

completion of construction. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for maintaining these 

items until the facility is finally handed over. 

3.06 TOOLS 

A. The contractor shall supply any special wrenches or other devices necessary for servicing 

and maintaining the fixtures and accessories. 



_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-6




_________________________________________________________________________________________ 


1104-7

SECTION 1105 

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 



A. This technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the standard 

of workmanship to be used in the supply and application of thermal insulation to 

plumbing piping. 



B. Section 1100 Plumbing Piping 



A. The work includes the provision of all labour, materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the supply and application of thermal insulation as specified 

herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 

B. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work of 

all trades. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of thermal insulation 

materials whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not 


B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the application of thermal insulation 

materials with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar 

nature. 


A. The thermal insulation products and all associated materials shall comply with the latest 

relevant British Standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated 

with thermal insulation products and associated material. However, the Contractor shall 

ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Piping Insulation 

1105-1

BS 476 Part 4 : Non-combustibility Test for Materials. 

BS 476 Part 7 : Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of 

Flame of Products 

BS 476 Part 20 Method for Determination of the Fire Resistance of 

Elements of Construction. 

BS 1485 : Specification for Zinc Coated Hexagonal Steel Wire 

Netting. 




:Metal Mesh Faced Man-made Mineral Fibre Mattresses. 

:Bonded Preformed Man-made Mineral Fibre Pipe Sections. 

:Specification for Bonded Man-made Mineral Fibre Slabs. 

BS 5422 : Specification for the use of Thermal Insulation Materials. 

BS 5970 : Code of Practice for Thermal Insulation of 

Pipework and Equipment. 



To comply with specifications 

2.02 GENERAL 

A. For general applications the thermal insulation materials shall be made from materials 

which will not burn, but materials which are not entirely non-combustible may be 

accepted if they have self-extinguishing characteristics, the total mass of combustible 

materials is small and combustion does not produce dense smoke or toxic fumes. All 

material finishes shall conform to spread of flame classification class O. Such materials 

shall only be used with the prior permission of the Engineer. 

B. Insulation shall be rotproof, odourless, non-hygroscopic, shall not sustain vermin and 

shall not contribute to metal corrosion. Any finishes (or coverings) used shall not 

deteriorate with age or the effects of solar heat. 

C. Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free and be suitable for 

continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and within the 

environment indicated. 

D. All insulating materials and associated products, sealants, tapes, adhesives, securing 

bands and protective cladding shall be as specified or equal and approved. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1105-2

2.03 EXPOSED PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION 

A. Exposed thermal insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs, the basic material 

consisting of the following: 

1. Pre-formed glass fibre sections (density 48 Kg/m 3 ). 

The insulation shall be manufactured from long stranded mineral fibres, resin bonded to 

form sections having uniform density and high compressibility. The preformed rigid 

insulation outside surface shall be smooth, unbroken, uniform, concentric and firm. 

B. Pipework insulation shall be high-density rigid resin bonded preformed glass fibre 

sections of the thickness specified. The insulation shall comprise of two half sections with 

a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil covering hinging the two half mating sections 

for ease of installation. The covering shall have a 50mm side overlap of reinforced 

aluminium foil to enable the outside surface to be completely sealed. 

C. Where thermal insulation of plant is required the insulation shall be preformed rigid 

sections or slab. The material shall consist of long fine fibres (free from shot and coarse 

fibres) bonded with a temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 48 

Kg/m 3 and the surface shall have a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil finish. 

D. Thickness of insulation shall be determined in accordance with the following tables for 

the appropriate medium and the declared value of thermal conductivity of the insulation 

material at the relevant temperature. 

When selecting the insulation thermal conductivity, the space available for the installation 

shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that the resultant thickness can be accommodated. 

TABLE 1 

THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR HOT WATER SERVICES 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (W/m o C) 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

Size of Tube Up to 0.040 0.041-0.055 0.056-0.070 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

mm 

Minimum thickness of insulation (mm) 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

9 to 32 25 25 25 

40 to 50 25 32 32 

65 to 80 32 32 32 

100 32 32 38 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1105-3

125 32 38 44 

90 38 44 44 

Flat Surface 44 44 44 

2.04 CONCEALED PIPEWORK INSULATION 

A. Concealed pipework thermal insulation shall be pre-formed closed cell elastomeric nitrile 

foam having a minimum density of 80 Kg/m 3 . 

B. Thickness of insulation shall be 13mm for pipe sizes upto and including 50mm diameter 

and 19mm for pipe sizes above 50mm diameter. 

C. All joints between sections where insulation is split and joints in site made sections 

around valves etc. care to be glued with insulation manufacturers recommended adhesive. 

TABLE 2 

THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR COLD WATER SERVICES 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY (W/m o C) 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

Pipework within Building External Pipework 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

Size of Up to 0.041 to 0.056 to Up to 0.041 to 0.056 to 

tube 0.040 0.055 0.070 0.040 0.050 0.070 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

(mm) 

Minimum thickness of insulation (mm) 

_______________________________________________________________________ 

9 to 40 32 50 75 38 63 100 

50 to 80 25 32 50 25 44 63 

100 to 90 19 25 38 25 32 50 

Flat Surfaces 19 25 38 25 32 50 




_____________________________________________________________________ 


1105-4

3.01 STORAGE 

A. All thermal insulation materials shall be stored in their original packaging in such a 

manner as to prevent the ingress of dust or moisture. The height of the packages shall be 

restricted to prevent any deformation of preformed rigid sections. 

B. Flat sheet and rolled metal materials used for protective claddings shall be stored away 

from the ground surface, adequately covered and protected in a manner to prevent damage 

to the materials. 

C. All storage areas shall have adequate lighting to allow for the inspection of all materials. 

3.02 FIXINGS 

A. All mechanical fixings (rivets, screws) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of 

the material being fixed. All mechanical fixings, sealants, tapes and adhesives shall be 

entirely suitable for the medium that they are being applied to and the application shall be 

fully in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 

3.03 PLANT AND PIPEWORK INSULATION 

A. Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in 

accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework 

prior to witnessing of the pipework pressure test and only then after a full inspection and 

approval by the Engineer. 

B. Thermal insulation shall be applied to the following: - 

1. All hot water pipework including flanges and bodies of valves on all sizes of 

pipework. 

2. External distributing mains and fittings above ground and in ducts, chases and 

trenches including all valve bodies and flanges. 

3. Cold water pipework (including valve bodies and flanges) run above ground 

external to buildings and run in ducts, chases, roof spaces and elsewhere as 

indicated, to prevent shedding of condensation. 

4. Buried pipework shall have special forms of insulation as indicated. 

5. Rainwater pipes where run horizontally in ceiling voids. 

Insulation shall fit closely on pipework and other surfaces without gaps between. 

C. The following lines shall not be insulated: 

1. Pipe used solely for fire protection. 

2. Chromium-plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. 

D. All sections of the insulation shall be of the correct size and made for the type and grade 

of piping to which it is fitted and shall form a tight fit on the pipework after application of 

adhesive and lapping. Bends shall be formed by cutting a series of gussets in the preformed 

sections to form a continuous finish with the pipework. The valve bodies and 

flanges in plantrooms and those components within the entire pipework system 65mm dia 

and above shall be insulated with the same insulation as the accompanying pipework but 

contained within a removable aluminium box. Where a vapour seal is incorporated into 

the insulation, all joints shall be effectively sealed with approved sealing material and 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1105-5

securely fixed. 

E. Each pre-formed rigid insulation section shall be butt jointed to the next, the point being 

fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape. The preformed sections on domestic hot 

and cold water services shall be secured hard to the bracket where inserts are not used. 

The reinforced aluminium side overlap shall be sealed with a suitable adhesive or 75 mm 

wide aluminium tape. Outer coverings shall not come into contact with pipework and 

attachments. 

F. Each section of pre-formed insulation shall be secured to the pipe by one of the following 

means: 

1. Circumferential tie wires each formed from three turns of wire not less than 1 mm 

thick, spaced not more than 450 mm apart. 

2. Circumferential bands of non-ferrous metal, plastic fibre or adhesive sheet. 

3. Rigid insulation applied to cylinders and flat surfaces shall be secured with nonferrous 

metal or plastic fixings. 

4. Nitrile rubber foam split joint with insulation manufacturers recommended 

adhesive. 

G. Insulation on pipework exposed to view and within plantrooms shall be clad fully in a 

pre-formed aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8 mm thick held in place by means of 

rivets or self tapping screws. All joints shall be sealed with a non-setting sealing 

compound. 

H. Insulation on pipework exposed to the outside atmosphere shall be clad with a covering of 

polyisobutylene sheet fixed with adhesive, lapped and solvent welded to form an 

impervious seal. At entries into buildings, the weatherproof insulation shall extended not 

less than 100 mm beyond the inner face of the wall and be sealed to the satisfaction of the 

Engineer. 

I. Thermal insulation on pipework in concrete trenches shall be as that for insulation on 

pipework exposed to the outside atmosphere. 


A. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the works during construction. 

Any damaged sections of insulation shall be completely cut out and replaced with a new 

section. The vapour seal shall be repaired to ensure continuity. 

B. All damaged sections shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense until the system is 

accepted and finally handed over. 




_____________________________________________________________________ 


1105-6

SECTION 1106 

WATER HEATERS 



A. This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to 

be used in the supply and installation of water heaters. 



B. Section 1001 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 



E. Section 1107 Plumbing Pumps 


A. The work includes the provision of all labor, materials and the performance of all 

operations in connection with the installation of the water heaters as specified herein 

and shown on the drawings. 

B. The work includes testing of the water heaters. 

C. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for full coordination of the work of 

all trades. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of water heaters and 

ancillary equipment and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in 


B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing works of a similar 

quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years. 


A. The water heaters, and associated fittings and accessories shall comply fully with the 

latest relevant British Standards or DIN standards in all respects. 



________________________________________________________________________ 

Water Heaters 

1106-1



B. Products - submit full manufacturers data for every item. 

1.07 OPERATION MAINTENANCE DATA 


1.08 WARRANTY 



2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 

A. The electrical water storage heaters shall be capable of withstanding the static head 

imposed from the water supply pressure mains, and the cylinders shall be capable of 

withstanding a test pressure of 7 bar. Water heaters shall be provided with temperature 

gauges, pressure/temperature relief valves, reverse flow prevention, stop cocks. 

B. The water heaters shall be manufactured of heavy gauge steel with glass lining and 

high density magnesium anode protection rod, all suitable for the above working and 

test pressures. 

C. All wall mounted units are to have factory fitted 3 cm thick polyurethane foam, or 

equivalent thermal insulation with a thermal conductivity value not greater than 

0.035W/m deg.C, protected by an outer stove enameled casing. 

D. The water heaters shall be suitable for use with the available electrical power supply. 

E. Water heaters shall be provided with one immersion heater banks controlled by 

thermostats. A manual reset high limit thermostat shall also be incorporated. 

Immersion heaters shall be highest quality mineral filled titanium heaters with 

connection box for conduit/wiring entry. 

F. All water heaters shall have a thermometer calibrated in deg C mounted on the outer 

casing of the heater. 

G. All wall mounted units less than shall have safety valves. 



________________________________________________________________________ 

Water Heaters 

1106-2

2.02 CALORIFIERS 

A. Calorifiers shall be high output, vertical, storage type with an in-built heat exchanger, 

withdrawable U tube battery; integral bronze circulating pump and a load regulator. 

B. Calorifier shall be designed and manufactured for a working pressure of 10 bars. 

C. Calorifier shall be provided with approved thermal insulation protected by galvanised 

mild steel casing finished in gloss enamel. 

D. The following fittings to be supplied as a minimum:- 

1. Temperature/pressure relief valve. 

2. Rigid stem dial thermometer. 

3. Water pressure gauge. 

4. Isolating valves on primary and secondary piping. 

5. Drain cock. 

6. Check valve on cold water make-up. 

E. All screwed connections shall be to BS 21. 

F. All flanged connections shall be to BS 4504. 

2.03 HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS 

A. Hot water return pumps for hot water systems shall be constructed so that all parts in 

contact with the water are in stainless steel or bronze and shall be capable of 

circulating the volume and head indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 1107 – 

Plumbing Pumps. 


3.01 PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS 

A. All pipework connections to each water heater shall have a union disconnection point 

between the heater and it's stop valve. 

B. All drain points, vent and safety valve discharge pipes shall be extended to discharge 

over a tundish which shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. 

C. The Contractor shall ensure that all the pipe and electrical connections to each water 

heater are easily accessible for maintenance and that the heater can be removed and 

replaced with the minimum of disturbance to the system. 



________________________________________________________________________ 

Water Heaters 

1106-3

3.02 INSPECTION, TESTING AND STERILISATION 

A. All pipework shall be visibly examined and tested before being concealed or built into 

the structure. 

1. All pipework and water heaters are to be pressure tested to twice the working 

head whichever is the greater, without loss of pressure for 2 hours. 

2. On, satisfactory completion, the system shall be flushed out and refilled with 

chlorinated water at a chlorine concentration of 50 mg/l free chlorine for 24 

hours. The system is to be washed-out prior to acceptance until the free 

chlorine at the outlets is no greater than that present in the water mains. 

3. The above tests are to be witnessed by representatives of the Engineer and 

Contractor who will sign that the tests have been fully complied with. 




________________________________________________________________________ 

Water Heaters 

1106-4

SECTION 1107 

PLUMBING PUMPS 




standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Pumps. 



B. Section 1001 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 





operations in connection with the supply and installation of Pumps as specified herein 

and where referred to on the Drawings and Schedules. 

B. Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the 



A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Pumps whose 

products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than 10 

years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Pumps with at 

least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar nature. 


The Pumps, and all associated materials and workmanship shall comply fully with the 

latest relevant British Standards and ISO Standards in all respects. 


A. Drawings refer to 1000 



_____________________________________________________________________________ 

Plumbing Pumps 

1107-1

B. Calculations: Pump Head calculations shall be submitted for approval based on the 

Contractors working drawings and pipeline equipment to be installed. 

C. Products: Full certified manufacturer performance data and construction details. 


A. Comply with 1000 

1.08 WARRANTY 



2.01 COLD WATER TRANSFER PUMPSET 

A. The design, construction, materials and finishes or all units shall be suitable for the 

locations, climatic and operating conditions in this specification. 

B. The units shall be one piece, packaged fully locally assembled, piped, wired and 

complete with operating and safety controls and all customary auxiliaries deemed 

necessary by the manufacturer for the safe, controlled automatic operation of the 

equipment. 

C. Packaged unit shall comprise: - 

1. Multi-stage, centrifugal pumps 

2. Valves and fittings 

3. System pipework connections. 

4. Pressure vessel 

5. Controls and instrumentation. 

D. Pumps 

1. Provide pumps as schedules fitted with self-adjusting mechanical seals. 

2. Motors shall be TEFC to IP 54 squirrel cage type with class `F’ insulation and 

of 1450 RPM motor. Specification section1 9171 also applies. 

3. All wetted parts shall be type 304 stainless steel; impellers shall be stainless 

steel or bronze. 

E. Valves and Fittings 

1 Provide the following valves and fittings: 



_____________________________________________________________________________ 


1107-2

a. Pump isolating gate valves on suction and discharge side. 

b. Non return valves on discharge side. 

c. Strainer on suction side. 

d. Pressure gauges. 

e. Flexible pipe connectors on suction line connected to the ground water 

reservoir. 

f. Pressure vessel of 50 liter capacity, 10 bar working pressure, with 

diaphragm, safety valve, automatic air vent and isolating valve. 

F. Control and Instrumentations 

1. The pumps shall operate under the control of pressure switch to transfer the 

water from ground water reservoir to roof tanks. 

2. Provide the following controls and instrumentation: 

a. Pressure switches and transducer. 

b. Pressure gauges. 

c. Hand/off/auto switch for each pump. 

d. Duty selector switch. 

h. System under pressure alarm. 

3. Pre-wire all of the above items to a composite front accessible control panel 

having power on light, run and trip lights, tank level lights, audible alarm with 

mute facility, main isolator switch and terminal blocks suitable for field 

services, interlocks to provide a complete packaged unit. 

4. The controls shall include for auto-alternating operation of pumps. 

5. The pump set shall have dry-running protection. 

6. All alarms and pumps functions shall be interfaced with BMS (if required). 

G. Base Frame 

1. Mount all components onto a mild steel angle and hollow section frame. 

2. Prime and paint base with protective undercoat and hammer finish gloss. 

H. Vibration Isolators 

1. Mount unit on anti vibration isolators. 

2. Provide non-ferrous braided flexible pressure connections in interfaces with 

pipework system. 

3. Final electrical connections to be made with armoured flexible conduit. 

2.02 HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS 



_____________________________________________________________________________ 


1107-3

The pump shall be inline close coupled single suction centrifugal type. The pump 

shall have suction and discharge flanges of the same diameter and on the same canter 

line. 

The pump motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type rated for continuous 

operation at ambient temperature not less than 40°C. 

The motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type with insulation class F and IP54 

protection. 

The pump construction shall be all stainless steel have a pressure rating not less than 

10 bar. 

Pipe connections including fittings, valves, instrumentations etc. shall be as shown on 

the drawings. 

2.03 SUMP PUMPS 

A. Sump pumps shall be duty and standby to the sizes shown on the project drawings or 

schedules. 

B. Sump pumps shall be of the fully submersible type. Each pump shall be complete with 

non –return valve and isolating gate valve on the pump discharge. These valves shall 

be fitted above the normal highest liquid level and in a location accessible from the 

surface. 

C. Pumps shall be supplied complete with control panel for automatic operation and auto 

changeover of duty/standby pump. Control panel shall have visual/audible alarm. 

D. Mode of control shall be as follows: - 

1. Low level pump stop float switch. 

2. Normal level pump start float switch. 

3. High level standby pump float switch. 

4. High level alarm float switch. 

E. Pump components shall be manufactured of the following materials: - 

Motor : 3 - phase or single phase, insulation class F, protection type IP68. 

Pump housing : Grade 304 stainless steel or cast iron to BS1452 grade 20. 

Impeller : Grade 304 stainless steel. 

Pump sleeve : Grade 316 stainless steel. 

Shaft : Grade 304 stainless steel. 

Bearing : Heavy-duty pre-lubricated ball bearings. 

O-rings :Neoprene rubber. 

F. Discharge pipe within sump between pump and valves shall be heavy-duty reinforced 

rubber hose. 



_____________________________________________________________________________ 


1107-4

G. Sum pump used for sewage (waste and soil drain) shall be explosion proof type. 



A. Carry out static checks on electrical wiring settings of all control and safety devices to 

ensure conditions are safe prior to start up and running. 

B. Align and shim level units on prepared bases. 

C. Fix all units to bases. 

D. Ensure adequate space is available around the units to allow inspection and 

maintenance of all components. 

3.02 INSTALLATION INSPECTIONS 

A. Pre-installation Inspection: 

1. Examine the areas and conditions under which the boosting units are to be 

installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper 

and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner suitable to the 

Owner. 

B. Post Installation Check: 

1. Provide the services of an experienced component and authorised 

representative of manufacturer or supplier of the equipment to visit site to 

inspect, check, adjust if necessary and approve installation of all booster units. 

C. Carry out necessary testing to ensure installations are in working order and acceptable 

to Owner. 

D. Ensure that equipment supplier’s representative is present when equipment is placed 

in operation. 

3.03 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 

A. COMMISSIONING 



_____________________________________________________________________________ 


1107-5

1. Carry out status checks on electrical wiring; settings of all control and safety 

devices to ensure conditions are safe prior to start up and running. 

2. Operate equipment to ensure all control temperature pressure and safety 

devices function as required and log settings of all control and safety devices 

for tabulation and inclusion in submittal document required in accordance with 

this specification. The equipment shall be left in safe and proper working order 

for “Post Installation Check”. 




_____________________________________________________________________________ 


1107-6

SECTION 1300 

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 



A. This technical Specification establishes the quality of materials and workmanship to 

be used in the supply and installation of the Fire Protection systems and equipment 



B. Section 1002Mechanical Identification. 

C. Section 1301 Fire Protection Piping 

D. Section 1302 Fire Pumps 

E. Section 1303Fire Protection Specialties 


A. Provisions of all labor, materials and the performance of all operations in connection 

with the installation and testing fire protection systems within buildings as specified 

herein and shown on the drawings. 

Coordination: The Contractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of the 

work of all trades and shall provide clear drawings where necessary. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire protection 

systems and equipment fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in 


B. Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on 

projects with fire protection schemes and equipment similar to that required for this 

project. 

1. Conform to the requirements of Civil Defense Department 

2 All materials used for fire protection systems and shop drawings shall be 

approved by the Civil Defense Department. The Contractor shall not place 

any order or proceed with any installation, prior to obtain the approval from 

the Civil Defense Department. 

3. Special fire protection systems like FM200 shall be executed, only by 

Contractors who have full experience for the execution of such systems. 



_________________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Protection Systems and Equipment 

1300-1


A. The fire protection systems and equipment shall comply fully with the latest relevant 

British Standards and National Fire Protection Association standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most applicable standards: 

BS3506 part 1 

BS3506 part 2 

NFPA Codes 



1. Submit product data, samples and shop drawings in accordance with the 

following. 

a) Manufacturer's printed brochures and catalogs along with write up of 

selection criteria. 

b) General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller that 1:100. 

c) Equipment installation and piping layout double line drawings of plant 

rooms, water storage tanks, etc. Clearly indicating all fittings, supports, 

valves and control gear to a scale of 1:20. Submit sections and elevations as 

required. 

d) Builders work layout plans to a scale of 1:100 / 1:50 as above, along with 

shaft detail plans to 1:10. 

e) Installation details of: 

(1) Assemblies like fire cabinets, fire brigade breaching inlets, fire 

hydrants, control valves and items of similar nature to a scale of 1:10. 

(2) Sprinklers, air release valves and items of similar nature to a scale of 

1:10 

(3) Sleeves and penetrations, equipment foundations etc. to a scale of 1:10. 

(4) Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20). 

f) Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings. 

g) Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required. 

h) Printout of hydraulic calculations of sprinkler system piping executed 

by an approved computer program, along with shop drawings. 



_________________________________________________________________________ 


1300-2

2. Submit shop drawings, product data and samples to the Civil Defence Department 

and obtain their approval, prior to execution of works at site. 

3. Submit composite shop drawings for all congested services areas showing the 

interrelationship of all services with each other and with the surrounding civil 

and architectural work. 

4. Submit project record drawings of all works installed under this section. 

5. Submit project "as built" drawings prepared from the latest progress prints. 

6. Submit FOUR (4) hard bound copies of "operation and maintenance manual" 

with complete data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below: 

a) The cover shall contain: 

(1) Title: "Fire protection system operation and maintenance manual. 

(2) Names of the Owner. The Consultant and the Contractor. 

b) The manual shall contain: 

(1) Table of contents. 

(2) Fire protection materials and drawings submittal with the Engineer and 

Civil Defence Department approval. 

(3) Manufacturer's installation instructions. 

(4) Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams. 

(5) Manufacturer's assembly details. 

(6) Replacements parts / materials, number listing and description. 

(7) Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and or 

replacement. 

(8) Lubricants, commercial equivalents and schedules of use. 

(9) Names and address of manufacturer's sales and service agencies and 

local representative / distributor including telephone and telex numbers. 

(10) Name and address of Contractor's maintenance department including 

emergency contact telephone number. 

c) Arrange the contents of the manual in sections with tags, grouping each 

class of equipment as pumps; pump control panels; fire extinguishers; fire 

cabinets; installation control valves; valves; fire protection specialties; 



_________________________________________________________________________ 


1300-3

monitoring and alarm systems etc. 

d) Arrange contents of each section in sequence as listed above. 

7. Be responsible for training the Employer's personnel , selected by the Owner , in 

the correct operation, control and maintenance of the installations specified 

herein. Training shall be carried out by qualified commissioning and operating 

staff of the Contractor. 

8. The foregoing Clauses are in addition to and in no way relieve the Contractor of 

his liabilities and obligations under the Contract. 



1.08 WARRANTY 


B. Manufacturers shall provide their standard warranties and guarantees for products 

furnished under this Section of the Specification. However, such guarantees shall be 

in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which manufacturers and the 

Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 

C. Any fault or failure due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship 

or Contractor's design which may develop shall be made good forthwith, by and at 

the expense of the Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials 

and other systems resulting from such fault or failure. 

D. The Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient 

capacity as in or implied by the Contract Documents. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services by Civil 

defense Department 

2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

A. All materials, equipment and procedures associated with the Fire Protection Systems 

shall be in accordance with requirements of these specifications. 

B. Where operating or warning instructions are provided or specified they shall be 

clearly denoted in Arabic and English. 



_________________________________________________________________________ 


1300-4

The Contractor shall supply original authenticated certificates for each type of 

material or equipment, confirming the standard they have been manufactured and 

tested to. 



A. All items shall be installed in the locations indicated on the drawings and strictly in 

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 

B. The installation shall comply fully with all applicable standards and codes listed in 

Part 1.05. 

3.02 LOCAL AUTHORITY APPROVAL 

A. The Contractor shall make all necessary submittals to Civil Defense Department and 

gain all required approvals for the Fire Protection Systems. 

3.03 COMPLETION 

A. On completion of the works and prior to handover the entire Fire Protection Systems 

shall be tested and commissioned in strict accordance with the relevant requirements 

of the NFPA, British Standards, and LPC Rules 




_________________________________________________________________________ 


1300-5

SECTION 1301 


FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 

1.01. SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Pipe and pipe fittings. 

B. Valves. 

C. Sprinkler system piping. 

1.02APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 

ASTM A53 

BS: 1387 

Pipe, steel, Black and hot dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless. 

Galvanised steel medium and heavy duty. 


A. Manufacturer's name, pressure rating and side shall be cast-on, on the valve body.. 

B. For each product specified, provide from same manufacturer throughout, where 

possible. 

C. Test certificates from approved independent laboratories or testing agencies shall be 

furnished at no extra cost 

D. Maintain uniformity in respect of connection standards (threads, flanges etc.). Where 

this is not practicable due to justifiable reasons, the Contractor shall ensure 

compatibility by using appropriate adapters, conversion spools, mating counter 

flanges etc. 


A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 15010. 

B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories and recommended 

coating materials. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instruction or recommendations. 

D. Submit copies of valve ordering schedules for approval prior to ordering valves. 


A. Deliver products to site, store and protect . 

B. Store plastic and copper pipes on elevated racks only. 

Royal Electro mechanical Eng. 

Consulting Engineers 

__________________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Protection Piping 

1301-1

C. Store plastic and rubber products out of direct sunlight. 

D. Keep ends of pipes closed with factory manufactured plugs to prevent entry of 

foreign matter. 

E. Apply two coats of approved primer to all untreated ferrous pipes, prior to storage. 

F. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. 

G. Store plug/ball valves in open position and gate/globe valves in closed position to 

prevent damages to seats. Retain flange protectors on the valves, until installation 

to prevent damages to flange faces. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS 

2.02 JOINTS 

A. Black steel: 

SERVICE LOCATION TYPE 

All 

Sprinkler, landing valves, 

and hose reels piping up to 

50 mm nom. dia. 

Sprinkler, landing valves, 

hose reels and hydrants 

piping 65mm nom. dia. 

and larger. 

ASTM A53 black steel, 

schedule 40 seamless. 

All ASTM A53 Black, 

steel, schedule 40, 

seamless. 

Drainage piping All ASTM A53 galvanised 

steel, schedule 40 

seamless. 

1. 50 mm (2") diameter and less: - Threaded, with Teflon tape 

2. 65 mm dia. and above: - Mechanical welded 

B. Galvanized steel: 

1. 50 mm (2") diameter and less: 

Threaded, with Teflon tape or joining compound (non-toxic) applied to pipe 

threads. 

C. All joint shall be rated for 1035 kPa (150 psig) working water pressure at 121 deg. C 

(250 deg. F). 

2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS 



__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-2

A. For pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and less. 

1. Black steel piping: - Malleable iron unions with bronze to iron seat, threaded 

ends. 

2. Galvanized steel piping: - Malleable iron unions with bronze to iron seat, 

threaded ends.. 

B. For pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom. dia. and over: 

1. Black steel piping: - welding 

2. Galvanized steel piping: -Galvanized malleable iron flanges with stiffening ribs, 

threaded end 

3. Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some 

angular deflection, contraction and expansion, "C" shape composition sealing 

gasket; steel bolts, nuts and washers, galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. 

C. Dielectric connections: 

1. Use dielectric unions with one end malleable iron threaded and the other end 

copper solder for pipe sixes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and less. Use dielectric 

flanged fittings for pipe sizes 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) nom dia and above. Both 

unions and flanges shall have water impervious isolation barrier certified to 

withstand a minimum 600 volts on dry line with no flashover. 

D. All flanges, unions and couplings shall be rated for 1035 kPa (150 psig) working water 

pressure at 121 deg. C (250 deg. F). 

2.04 VALVES - GENERAL 

A. Provide valves form same manufacturer throughout where possible. 

B. All valves shall be approved by Civil Defense Department 

2.05 GATE VALVES 

A. Up to 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: 

1. Bronze body, rising stem and union bonnet, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends. 

B. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: 

1. Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising stem, OS&Y, renewable seat, flanged 

ends. 

2.06 BALL VALVES 


1. Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box ring, lever 

operation;threaded ends. 



__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-3


1. Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore, floating; Teflon seat and stuffing box 

seals; lever/key operation; flanged ends. 

2.07 SILENT CHECK VALVES 


1. Bronze body, in-line, resilient seat and disc, spring loaded, screwed ends. 


1. Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composite disc andseat,flanged 

ends. 

C. Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: 

1. Iron body, bronze trim, swing type with external lever and weight, renewable seat 

and disc, flanged ends. 

2.08 DRAIN VALVES 

A. Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet and hose connection outlet 

with cap and chain. 

2.10. PRESSURE RATINGS 

A. Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 1724 kPa (250 psig) 

working water pressure at 121 deg. C (250 deg. F). 

B. Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet the valve 

construction features. 

2.11 VALVE OPERATORS 

A. Provide hand wheels/operating levers for valves as appropriate. Hand wheels for gate 

and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. and smaller, shall be non-ferrous metal 

(die cast zinc/aluminum alloy etc.) 

B. Provide one key/wrench of appropriate size per lever operated valve installed. 

C. Provide chain operated sheaves for valves located more than 2M (7 feet) above floor. 

Extend chains to about 150 cm (5 feet) above floor and hook to clips in order to clear 

walk ways and equipment. 

D. Provide geared operators for valves 8 inches and larger in size. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.01 PREPARATION 



__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-4

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. 

B. Remove weld splatter, scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 


A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain proper gradient. 

B. Install piping in a way that conserves building space and does not interfere with use of 

space. 

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe joints or 

connected equipment. 

E. Install exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls, except where 

otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. 

F. Where changes in pipe sizes occur, install tapered reducer fittings. Use of bushings is 

not permitted. Install eccentric reducing fittings with level crown. 

G. Where changes in pipe direction occur install factory manufactured fittings. Bending 

or forming of piping is not permitted without Project Manager's written permission. 

H. Provide adequate clearance for installation of fittings, insulation etc. and access to 

valves and fittings. 

I. Provide minimum clearance between piping covered by this section and other services. 

J. Provide access doors of suitable and adequate sizes where valves and fittings are not 

exposed. 

K. Slope sprinkler piping and arrange to drain at installation control valves. Provide 

additional drain valves at undrainable segments of piping. 

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush 

clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 

M. During progress of work keep the ends of all piping closed with factory manufactured 

plugs or blind flanges to prevent entry of foreign matters. Ensure the removal of such 

plugs or flanges on completion of the works. All blind flanges shall have integral 

indicating flags. 

N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

O. All valves shall be same size as pipeline except if otherwise note on the Contract 

Drawings. 

P. Padlock all valves in open or closed position with leather strap, as required. 

Q. Provide couplings/unions on horizontal pipe runs at spacing not exceeding 18.0 M (60 

feet). 

3.03 APPLICATION 



__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-5

A. Install unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus 

connections. 

B. Install dielectric unions or flanged fittings wherever joining dissimilar metals. 

C. Install drain valves at system low points and at each riser base. 

D. Install gate valves for shutoff and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical 

risers. 

E. Install flap type check valves on the Fire Brigade Breaching line. 

F. Select appropriate valve gland packing, sealing and gasket materials for the 

temperature and pressure encountered. 


A. Give the following protective coatings/wrappings to piping. 

1. Exposed, black steel piping: 

(a) Two coats of red oxide primer. 

(b) Two coats of enamel paint, as coded or to match with the surrounding 

architectural finish schedule. 

2. Concealed (in shafts) black steel piping: 

(a) Two coats or red oxide primer. 

(b) Two coats of enamel paint as coded. 

3. Exposed galvanized iron piping: 

(a) Two coats of zinc chromate primer. 

(b) Two coats of enamel paint as coded or to match with the surrounding 

Architectural finishes (in areas exposed to view). 

4. Concealed (in shafts) galvanized iron piping: 

(a) Two coats of zinc chromate primer. 

(b) Two coats of enamel paint as coded. 

5. Buried (external to the building and embedded in concrete structure) ductile 

piping 

(a) Two coats of coal and tar. 

(b) Wrapping with an anti-corrosion tape. 

3.05. TESTING OF PRESSURIZED PIPING 

A. The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24 

hours, AND FLUSHED AND CLEAN before the tests are carried out. 

B. The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. Furnish all labor, and 

necessary testing instruments such as gauges, pumps etc. as directed by the Project 

Manager. A minimum of two (2) nos. identical pressure gauges shall be installed at 

extremities of the piping circuit to be tested. 

C. Fill the piping with clean fresh water starting at the lowest point and leaving all high 

points open to allow for purging of air. 



__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-6

D. Pressure test the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the test 

pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure increment. 

Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted. 

E. Do not over pressurize the system under any circumstances. If the test pressure is close 

to the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the system components, 

install calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit. 

F. Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After completion 

of pressure test, close each valve one at time starting from the pressure release end, so 

as to ensure tightness of the above. 

G. The piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 1550 kPa (225 Psig) or 1.5 

times the system working pressure which ever is greater but limited to 1724 kPa (250 

psig). The pressure shall be maintained for at least 4 hours. Allow for pressure 

fluctuations due to ambient temperature variation. Record the circuit temperature 

along with the pressure readings. 

H. Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of 10 kPa 

(1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable. 

I. Do not subject sprinklers to the test pressure. 

J. Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an official 

log book for recording the test carried out on sections of piping, including test 

pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer representative witnessing the 

test. 




__________________________________________________________________________ 


1301-7

SECTION 1302 

FIRE PUMPS 


1.01. SCOPE 

A .The contractor shall provide and install a fire pump set. 

1.02. RELATED WORKS 

A. SECTION 1300 Fire protection systems. 

B. SECTION 1301 Fire protection piping. 


A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services 

by Civil Defense Department 


A. Submit product data, samples and installation details as specified. 

B. Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use and 

location. 

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver products to site store and protect under provision of Sections 9000. 

B. Keep factory packed items in shipping cartons, until time of installation. 

C. Store factory calibrated items, which are dropped or subjected to shock 

otherwise in separate containers with appropriate labels, till completion of 

works. Keep a record of the same for inspection by the Project Manager. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services 

by Civil Defense Department 

2.02 PUMPS 

A. The fire pumps shall be of end suction centrifugal design. The pump shall 

comply with ULFM and factory assembled.PACKAGED 



_______________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Pumps1302-1

B. Duty 

1. The pumps shall be designed to operate at a maximum of 2900RPM. 

C. Casing: 

1. Cast iron. 

2. Replaceable, lock on bronze wearing rings. 

D. Ratings 

1. Pressure: Minimum 16 bar. 

2. Connections: 8.6 bar inlet and 40 bar discharge flanged. 

E. Impellers: 

1. Fully enclosed, bronze, key to the shaft. 

2. Replaceable bronze wearing rings to match casing rings, seal against 

internal recirculation, lock on. 

F. Shaft: 

1. Stainless steel, ground smooth. 

G. Shaft Sleeves: 

1. Bronze, lock on the shaft and seal against air or water leakage. 

2. Sleeves shall extend from the impeller through the stuffing boxes. 

H. Stuffing Boxes: 

1. Multiple layers of packing rings in stuffing boxes, water lubricate by 

copper tubing connections to casing. 

2. Provide bronze lantern rings when operating at suction pressures of 9 

psig or less. 

I. Bearings: 

1 Heavy duty ball type, oil or grease lubricate, capable of handling radial 

and thrust loads; mount outboard in sealed housings with lubricant 

reservoirs and fittings for adding lubricant and flushing. 

2. Protect from water by slinger rings on shaft. 

J. The pump unit and accessories shall meet all the requirements of local code. 

2.03 Fire Pump Controller 

A. The fire pump controller shall meet the requirements of ULFM and shall be 

ULFM listed and completely assembled, wire and test the motor equipment at 

the factory. 

1. The assembly shall be specifically approved for fire pump purposes. 

2. Mark the controller "Fire Pump Controller". 

3. Enclose all equipment in one or more approved grip tight enclosures. 

4. The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic across the 

line type incorporating all required accessories for a complete system. 

B. Securely mount the following components on a single non combustible, non 

moisture absorbing, non conducting panel suitable for temperatures up to 200 

degrees F within the enclosure: 

1. Main line externally operated circuit breaker of the automatic type having 



_______________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Pumps1302-2

one pole in each ungrounded conductor to isolate the motor control from 

the line in event of a short circuit; interrupting capacity not less than 

65,000 amperes. 

2. Motor starter of the heavy-duty magnetic clapper type with double break 

contact in each conductor. 

3. Power failure alarm relay, which shall drop open on voltage failure or if the 

circuit breaker is opened. 

4. Auxiliary contact on starter to operate a remote pump running alarm. 

Contact to open when pumps run. 

5. Pressure regulator of the Bourdon tube type; provide with adjustable cut in 

and cut out points. 

6. Pilot light to indicate power available. 

7. Pilot light to indicate that motor has been started manually and must be 

shut down manually. 

8. Selector switch marked "Automatic and Non Automatic" with no "off" 

position. 

9. Externally operated handle for manual starting. 

10. Terminal block for terminating remote alarm circuits. 

11. Minimum running timer. 

12. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. 

2.04 Jockey Pump 

A. The jockey pump shall be designed to deliver the rated capacity at the rated. 

head. The pump will be a vertical multistage stage centrifugal type, close 

coupled to an open drip proof motor. 

2.05 Jockey Pump Controller 

A Completely assemble, wire and test at the factory and enclose in steel enclosure 

incorporating the following: 

1. Fused disconnect switch. 

2. Across-the-line motor starter. 

3. Manual-Off-Automatic switch. 

4. Pressure regulator set to cut on and off at pressures as indicated. 

2.06 Repeater Panel 

A. A fire pumps repeater panel shall be provided to indicate the following status of 

all fire pumps. 

1. Pump start. 

1. Pump stopped. 

2. Pump failure to start. 

3. Power supply. 

4. Stand by power supply. 

5. It shall be linked with the Building Management System (if required) 



_______________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Pumps1302-3

6. The panel will be located in the operator room as required. 

7. It shall sound an alarm in the event that a fire pump fails to start. 

2.07 Assembled Package 

A. All of the above equipment will be mounted on an open structural steel base 

plate. 

1 .All piping, pressure sensing lines, pump by-pass, if required, shut off 

valves, stuff box and casing relief valve drains will be firmly anchored to 

the steel base by means of structural steel supports. 

2 .All electrical connections and wiring will be completed and tested prior to 

delivery to the jobsite. 

2.08 Testing 

A 

B 

Field acceptance testing of the unit will be performed by the pump supplier. 

All equipment will be factory tested in accordance with the requirements of 

NFPA 20 




_______________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Pumps1302-4

SECTION 1303 


FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. Zone alarm valves 

B. Alarm control valve 

C. Sprinklers. 

D. Sprinkler line testers. 

E. Fire hose cabinets. 

G. Siamese connection. 

H. Landing valves 

I. Fire hydrants 

J. Portable fire extinguishers. 

K. Flow switches. 

L. Automatic air relief valves. 

1.02 RELATED WORKS 

A .SECTION 1300 Fire protection systems. 

B .SECTION 1301 Fire protection piping. 

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Use only those products specifically listed/approved for fire protection services by 

Civil Defense Department 

1.04. SUBMITTALS 

A. Submit product data, samples and installation details under provisions of Section 

9000. 

B. Submit selection criteria and ordering schedule, listing types against use and 

location. 

1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A .Deliver products to site, store and protect under provision of section 1010. 

B. Keep factory packed items in shipping cartons, until time of installation. 

C. Store factory calibrated items which are dropped or subjected to shock otherwise in 

separate containers with appropriate labels, till completion of works. Keep a record 

of the same for inspection by the Project Manager. 



______________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Protection Specialties 

1303-1


2.01 CONTROL VALVES 

A .System Isolation Valve: 

1. Iron body, bronze mounted, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) construction with solid 

wedge and flanged ends. 

B. Alarm Check Valve : 

1. Flap type construction with flanged ends, metered bypass with ball valve for 

pressure maintenance flow, test and alarm trimmings, bolted access cover, pressure 

gauges (as specified elsewhere) at inlet and outlet. 

C Test And Drain Valve: 

1. All bronze, angle valve with screwed ends complete with metering orifice, 

discharge tundish etc. 

D. Alarm Test Valve: 

1. All bronze multiport plug valve with screwed ends, operating lever, 

engravedposition indicator attached to body. 

E. Strainer: 

1. All bronze, y type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and 30 mesh stainless 

steel screen for alarm supply line. 

F. Water Motor Alarm: 

1. All bronze construction of through the wall type with threaded inlet and outlet 

connections, wall sleeve, drive shaft and bell. 

G. Retarding Chamber 

1. All installation control valves shall have a retarding chamber in order to avoid false 

alarms. 

H. Pressure Switch 

1. Pressure switch shall be provided and linked with the fire alarm control panel. 

2.02 SPRINKLERS 

A. All sprinklers shall be the frangible glass bulb type, rated at 79°C. All sprinklers shall 

be U.L, listed. 

B. Sprinkler Heads 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-2

1. Pendant Type Sprinklers 

Water spray type, bulb type, concealed type, white plate in. 

C. Upright Type Sprinkler: 

1. Shall be with bronze/brass finish. 

D. All sprinklers: 

1. Shall be located in accordance with NFPA requirements . 

2. The Contractor's attention is drawn to table 4-5.4.6 (NFPA 13) "Position of 

Deflector when located above bottom of beam", this clause being applicable to the 

location of upright sprinklers and other ceiling sprinklers. 

2.03 SPRINKLER LINE TESTERS 

A. Forged Brass fitting with 25 mm (1 inch) female threaded inlet, 9mm (1/2 inch 

nominal) threaded sprinkler outlet and 25 mm (1 inch nominal) male hose threaded, 

drain outlet with cap and chain. 

B. The drain valve shall be wrench operated. 

2.04 FIRE HOSE REELS 

A. Fire hose reels shall be provided as shown on the drawings. The hose shall be of 25 

mm diameter 30.0 m long, wound on a swing type automatic reel with textile hose. 

B. The hose shall be made of reinforced non-kink rubber. The flow rate at each hose 

nozzle shall not be less than 23 liters per minute (6 gpm) with an effective jet of 6 

meters 

C. The hose reel shall be housed in a cabinet that contains also globe valve, a portable fire 

extinguisher powder of 6.0 kg capacity. The cabinet shall be recessed type.(80*120) 

D. The fire hose cabinet shall be of dimensions sufficient to include the hose reel, the 

globe valve and the fire extinguisher and to fit with the available space as shown on 

the Drawings.it also includes the landing valve 

2.05 LANDING VALVES 

Landing valves shall be installed on the wet risers for the use of Fire Brigade 

inside buildings as shown on the Drawings. 

Landing valve shall be gunmetal globe valves, high pressure type to BS. 5041 

with 65 mm. dia. bore fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female coupling to 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-3

conform to BS 336 and a brass blank cap secured by a suitable length of 

chain. The landing valve shall have 65 mm. dia flanged inlet for attachment 

to the wet riser. 

The valve shall be equipped with spindle not less than 22.2 m dia. and fitted 

with a gunmetal hand wheel of about 90 mm. dia. marked with OPEN and 

CLOSED directions. Opening shall be anti-clockwise. 

The whole valve fittings shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested 

to a pressure of 20.7 bar before being connected to the dry riser. 

The valve shall be installed about 760 mm. above finished floor level. The 

valve shall be finished with red colour paint. 

Fire hose rack cabinet according to requirements of CDD, installed of staircase 

entrance. 

2.7 FIRE HYDRANTS 

Pedestal fire hydrant shall be constructed of cast iron castings to BS. 1452 

complete with 100 mm dia. flange inlet and two 65 mm dia. valves with 

instantaneous outlets to BS.336 and with brass male couplings protected with cap 

secured by a suitable length of chain. 

The fire hydrant shall be sound construction and hydraulically tested to a pressure 

of 20.7 bar before being connected to the fire fighting network. 

The fire hydrant shall be installed about 760 mm above ground level and finished 

with red colour paint. 

The fire hydrant shall be provided with an isolating valve installed underground 

complete with extension tube, operating key and cover. 

A fire hose unit shall be installed to serve each fire hydrant, it shall comprise 65mm 

dia. textile fire hose 30 m long with male and female couplings, nozzle jet and spray 

with male coupling, and cabinet 

2.06 SIAMESE CONNECTION 

A Siamese connection assembly shall be installed for the use of Fire Brigade, as 

shown o n the Drawings. 

S. Siamese connection assembly shall be gunmetal with two inlets. Each inlet shall 

consist of a 65 mm. instantaneous male coupling and a non-return valve and 

protected with a cap secured by a suitable length of chain. The coupling shall 

conform to B.S. 336. 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-4

C. Siamese connection assembly shall have 2-way inlet breeching and drain valve. 

D. Siamese connection assembly shall have 100 mm. dia flanged outlet for 

attachment to the dry riser or wet main. 

E. Siamese connection assembly shall be finished with red colour paint. 

F Siamese connection assembly shall be located 760 mm. above ground level. 

2.07 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. All portable extinguishers shall have welded steel/light alloy shells with floor stand 

(injection moulded plastic shells shall be considered for approval, when contents are 

not stored under pressure - i.e. those with pressure cartridges) internal lining of 

polypropylene or similar material and external enamel finish over rust proofing. 

1. Color of finishing shall be coded as follows: 

Carbon Dioxide Black 

Water 

Red 

Dry Powder Blue 

B. Operation instructions: 

1 Operating and safety precautions in English and Arabic along with appropriate 

graphics, shall be provided on all extinguishers. 

2. All extinguishers shall have labels attached, which state the date of last 

inspection, next due date and the name and address of the inspection agency. 

C. Pressurized Water Extinguishers: 

1. Pressurized water extinguishers shall be of 9 liters capacity with an effective jet 

length of 10 meters. 

2. The continuous duration of operation shall be not less than ninety (90) seconds. 

The temperature rating shall be up to 60° C ambient. 

3. The body shall be mild steel to BS 1449. 

4. The neck ring shall be steel welded internally to the body. 

5 The head cap shall be all metal with squeeze grip action with controlled 

discharge facility. 

6. The hose shall be terylene reinforced P.V.C. tubing and the hose nozzle shall 

be moulded in high density polythene. 

7. The gas cartridge shall be a standard fitting 55 gram plastic coated cartridge 

and the gas cartridge piercing spindle shall be made from stainless steel. 

8. The body shall contain a polythene lining to give complete protection against 

corrosion. 

D. Dry Powder Extinguishers: 

1. Dry Powder Extinguishers shall contain 6.0 kg of type ABC (standard) dry 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-5

powder pressurised with nitrogen or CO2. . 

2. The container shall have a chrome-molybdenum steel or aluminium alloy 

body tested at 25 bar. 

E. CO2 Extinguishers: 

1. CO2. Extinguishers shall consist of a 6 kg capacity extinguisher with a 

chrome-molybdenum steel or aluminium alloy body tested at 250 bar. 

2. The unit shall be complete with a 940 mm hose and snow horn. 

2.08 FLOW SWITCHES 

A. Provide vane type flow switches with volt free, normally open contacts rated for 5 

amps at 240 volts A/C (max) and enclosure with tapped conduit entry. 

B. The flow switch shall be adjustable, to give contact and signal at any water flow 

equal to that of one sprinkler. 

C. The electrical signal shall be transmitted and give alarm at the remote fire indicator 

panel. 

D. The unit shall be complete with pipe size saddle, clamp, sealing gasket etc. 

2.09 AUTOMATIC AIR RELIEF VALVES 

A. Bronze body with non-ferrous float and internal working parts. 

B. Construction shall be take apart type for easy maintenance. 

C. Outlet shall be tapped for connection to drain line. 

2.10 PROTECTIVE WRAPPING 

A. All fire protection pipework buried external to the building and embedded in the 

concrete structure without sleeving shall be protected by wrapping with an 

anticorrosion tape. 

B. The tape shall be manually applied (50%) overlapping) after testing the piping for 

water tightness. 

C 

The anticorrosion tape shall consist of a non woven fabric carrier free from 

chemical impurities, fully impregnated and coated on both sides with a neutral 

compound based on saturated petroleum hydrocarbons with inert siliceous 

fillers. 

2.11 SUPERVISORY SWITCH 

A. Provide a supervisory Switch attached to each O. S. & Y indicated gate valve 

scheduled under "Remote Fire Indicator Panel". 

B. The supervisory switch shall signal valve tampering and an electrical signal shall 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-6

e transmitted to give alarm at the remote fire indicator panel. 

C. The switch shall consist of a single-pole, double throw switch with a roller type 

switch actuator and a spring loaded plunger. 

2.12 FLOW METER 

A. Provide venturi type flow meter test pipes as indicated on Drawings. 

B. The flow element shall be a venturi tube; fiberglass reinforced polyester 

plastic body with stainless steel connections. 

C. The flow indicator shall be well type mercury manometer suitable for the 

closed valve pressure of the system. 

D. Provide all necessary trimmings (i. e., over scale fluid check valve, three 

way manifold, vent plugs, shut off valves, etc.). 

E. Allow for at least five (5) diameters of straight pipe upstream and 

downstream of the venturi tube flanges. 


3.01. SPRINKLERS 

A. Do not install sprinklers, until after the complete system has been flushed. 

B. Do not install sprinklers which are contaminated with paints or similar 

coatings, or that were once installed and removed for any reason and those 

which were dropped or have visible physical damage. 

C. Use only wrenches, supplied by the sprinkler manufacturer for installing the 

sprinklers. 

D. Use adjustable return drops with threaded fittings for installing sprinklers in 

areas with false ceiling. 

E. Do not exceed 30 cm length for standpipes or drop pipes for installing 

sprinklers, where so required. 

F. Install guards on sprinklers prone to mechanical damage. 

G. Install sheet metal water shields on sprinklers located near electrical or 

other equipment prone to damage from water. 

H. Provide additional sprinklers at the underside of HVAC ducts wider than 80 

cms. 

I. Spare Sprinkler Heads: 

1. Provide a set of spare sprinkler heads in an approved steel cabinet with 

hinged door and latch along with a sprinkler wrench. 

2. Include spares for each type and rating installed. 



______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-7

3. Finish cabinets in red enamel with white letters on door reading "Spare 

Sprinkler Heads"; wall mount where directed by Architect. 

3.02. SPRINKLER LINE TESTERS 

A. Provide one for every distribution main in the sprinkler system, for testing 

purposes, in accessible locations. Provide this fitting for the last sprinkler in 

all the ranges, which are not drainable from the zone control valve. 

3.03. SIAMESE CONNECTION PIPE 

A. The Siamese pipe connection shall be connected to the fire protection piping 

upstream of the alarm control valve 

3.04. FLOW SWITCHES 

A. Install on sprinkler supply mains or cross mains covering areas requiring 

separate indication of sprinkler operation and where indicated in drawings. 

B. Coordinate with the electrical works and ensure their connection with the 

building fire alarm system. 




______________________________________________________________________ 


1303-8



A. HVAC scope 

B. Basis of design 

C. Systems descriptions 

1.02 HVAC SCOPE 



SECTION 1401 

HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 

A. The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning shall include the following systems 

and all systems and components shown of the drawings and in the schedules. 

B. HVAC systems to all areas of the Residence. 

C. Complete ductwork installation. 

D. Complete chilled water installation, including the roof top chiller plant. 

E. Automatic Controls. 

F. Complete hot water heating system installation including boilers, pumps, pipes and 

radiators. 

G. Chemical Water Treatment. 

H. Provision of all acoustic sound and vibration control system and employment of an 

Acoustic Specialist. 

I. Complete setting to work, testing, regulating and commissioning of all systems. 

J. Production of all operating and maintenance manuals, record documentation, and 

provision of an electronic software based planned preventative maintenance regime 

complete with all initial data input. 

K. Training of Clients staff. 

L. Maintenance of the complete installation for the period as directed in the Contract 

Documents. 

___________________________________________________________________________ 

Heating, Ventilation and 

Conditioning 

1401-1

1.03 BASIS OF DESIGN 

A. DESIGN CRITERIA USED FOR HVAC CALCULATIONS 

1. External ambient design conditions 

Summer 36 o C dry bulb for chillers 

selections 

Summer Design Dry Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 36 o C dry bulb 

Summer Design Wet Bulb Temp. @ 2.5% 22 o C wet bulb 

Winter design dry Bulb Temp. @ 1% 0 o C dry bulb 

Site location: 

Palestine - HEBRON 

2. Internal Conditions 

The design room temperatures are in general: 23º C DB/17ºC WB for cooling; 

and 21ºC for heating. 

3. Noise Criteria 

Space 

NC Level 

Offices 40 

Shops 40 

Multipurpose halls 40 

Apartments 35 

Lobby 40 

Storage Area 45 

1.04 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS 

A. General Description 

The building is basically divided into individual zones, these zones shall be supplied 



___________________________________________________________________________ 


Conditioning 

1401-2

using an air system includes, air handling units to serve the different zones. 

Fan coil units will be provided to serve the required rooms as shown on the drawings. 

Temperature shall be controlled by a temperature sensor suitably located in the return 

duct; where full fresh air units are used, room thermostat will control the temperatures. 

Cooled air shall be supplied to each room via ceiling mounted diffusers; the type of air 

terminals shall be selected to suit the arrangement of interior design. Return air shall be 

collected in the ceiling void and taken by a main return air duct connected to the air 

handling unit mixing box. 

B. Toilets Ventilation 

Individual extract air system shall be provided to serve the toilets, extract air from toilets 

shall be ducted to a ceiling fan. Make up air shall be provided by transferring air through 

door louvers or transfer grilles from adjacent spaces 

C. Noise and Vibration 

The following measures shall be provided to control the noise and vibration generated 

by the HVAC equipment within the allowable limits under noise criteria table 4. 

· Sound attenuators shall be specified for the supply and return air ducts near the 

air handling units. 

· Internal acoustic lining shall be specified for the supply and return air ducts near 

the fan coil units. 

· Careful selection of air outlets. 

· HVAC equipment shall rest on concrete foundations of suitable mass. 

· Vibration isolators of ample deflection characteristics shall be specified between 

the units and concrete foundation. 

· Flexible connectors shall be specified for duct connections to air handling units 

and fan coil units. 

· Spring type isolators shall be specified for fan/motor frame and compressors. 

D. Chiller Plant 

A. The building shall be served by air cooled water chillers located on the roof. 

B. Chilled water shall be circulated through the chillers via constant speed 

circulating pumps. 



___________________________________________________________________________ 


Conditioning 

1401-3

C. Chillers shall all run in normal mode. . 

E. Heating System 

The heating system shall include, boilers, water distribution systems (pumps, pipes). 

Low temperature water system shall be used to serve the whole building, the 

allowable working pressure of the boilers shall not exceed 4 bar while the hot water 

supply temperature shall not exceed 82º C and the temperature difference of supply 

and return water shall not exceed 11º C. 

End suction centrifugal pumps shall be used to circulate the water within the system. A 

closed type expansion tank shall be provided to pressurize the system and provide make 

up water to the network. 



___________________________________________________________________________ 


Conditioning 

1401-4

SECTION 1402 


HVAC THERMAL INSULATION 


A. This technical specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the standard 

of workmanship to be used in the supply and application of thermal insulation for 

HVAC items. 



operations in connection with the supply and application of thermal insulation as 


B. Coordination : The Contractor shall be responsible for the full coordination of the work 

of all trades. 


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of thermal insulation 

materials whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not 


B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the application of thermal insulation 

materials with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar 

nature. 

C. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework and ductwork services until the 

installations have been inspected and approved by the Engineer and tested in accordance 

with the relevant sections of this specification. 


A. The thermal insulation products and all associated materials shall comply with the latest 

relevant British Standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards associated 

with thermal insulation products and associated material. However, the Contractor shall 

ensure that all applicable British Standards are complied with whether listed here or not. 

BS 476 Part 4: Non-combustibility Test for Materials. 

BS 476 Part 7: Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of Flame of Products 

BS 476 Part 20 Method for Determination of the Fire Resistance of Elements 


Consultant Engineers ____________________________________________________ 

HVAC Thermal Insulation 

1402-1

Construction. 

BS 1485: 

BS 3958 Part 3: 

BS 3958 Part 4: 

BS 3958 Part 5: 

BS 5422: 

BS 5970: 

Specification for Zinc Coated Hexagonal Steel Wire Netting. 

Metal Mesh Faced Man-made Mineral Fibre Mattresses. 

Bonded Preformed Man-made Mineral Fiber Pipe Sections. 

Specification for Bonded Man-made Mineral Fiber Slabs. 

Specification for the use of Thermal Insulation Materials. 

Code of Practice for Thermal Insulation of Pipe work and 

Equipment. 



B. Products: Full manufacturers data confirming type and composition of all products 

including thermal characteristics. 

C. Samples - Section of insulated duct 

- Section of insulated pipe 

Both showing detail of resilient spacer at bracket location. 

D. Samples of aluminum cladding to pipes and ducts-bends, tees, branches, valve boxes, 

cut-outs for field located control devices to ensure acceptable workmanship standards. 



1.07 WARRANTY 




To comply with the specifications. 

2.02 GENERAL 




1402-2

A. For general applications the thermal insulation materials shall be made from materials 

which will not burn, but materials which are not entirely non-combustible may be 

accepted if they have self-extinguishing characteristics, the total mass of combustible 

materials is small and combustion does not produce dense smoke or toxic fumes. All 

material finishes shall conform to spread of flame classification class O. Such materials 

shall only be used with the prior permission of the Engineer. 

B. Insulation shall be rot proof, odorless, non-hydroscopic, shall not sustain vermin and 

shall not contribute to metal corrosion. Any finishes (or coverings) used shall not 

deteriorate with age or the effects of solar heat. 

C. Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free and be suitable for 

continuous use throughout the range of operating temperatures and within the 

environment indicated. 

D. All insulating materials and associated products, sealants, tapes, adhesives, securing 

bands and protective cladding shall be as specified or equal and approved. 

2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION 

A. Thermal insulation of rectangular ductwork inside building shall blanket type glass fibre 

consisting of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse fibres) bonded with a 

temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 24 Kg/m 3 . Where 

ductwork is installed outdoor exposed to a troposphere, thermal insulation shall be rigid 

glass fibre of 48 Kg/m 3 density. 

B. Thermal insulation of circular ductwork shall be flexible mineral fibre material 

consisting of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse fibres) made up in mat form. 

The density shall be a minimum of 32 Kg/m 3 . 

C. Thermal insulation on ductwork etc. inside buildings generally shall be at least 25mm 

thick where its declared value of thermal conductivity at the relevant temperature is 

equal to or less than 0.04 W/m deg. C or at least 38mm thick where the declared value 

of thermal conductivity is between 0.04 and 0.06 W/m deg. C. In the open air, in plant 

rooms and in large unconditioned open areas of buildings, the thermal insulation shall be 

at least 50mm thick where the thermal conductivity is less than or equal to 0.04 W/m 

deg. C or at least 63mm thick where the thermal conductivity is between 0.04 and 0.06 

W/m deg. C. 

For ductwork carrying chilled air, the insulation shall cover the flanges either by means 

of flange boxes or by increasing the general thickness of insulation to give at least 6mm 

covers at the flanges. 

D. All ductwork thermal insulation shall be complete with a reinforced aluminium foil 

applied to one side during the manufacturing process. 




1402-3

E. Where integral or surface reinforcement is called for, or required in connection with 

insulation materials, it shall be one or other of the following: 

i. Galvanized wire netting of not less than 0.914mm. diameter and 22mm mesh size. 

ii. Galvanized wire, either 0.914mm diameter spirally wound at approximately 

75mm pitch or 1.219mm diameter when used in single strands at right angles to 

the axis of duct (or pipe). 

iii. Aluminium bands 20mm wide by 0.51mm thick, with galvanized wire end 

loops. 

iv. Aluminium or galvanized steel edge reinforcement strips secured to the 

insulation with adhesive. 

F. Where there is a requirement to prevent noise transmission through the walls of the 

ductwork, either in the form of noise breakout prior to an attenuator, noise break-in on 

the attenuated side, acoustic insulation shall be applied to the external surface of the 

ductwork to the Acoustic Specialists requirements. The acoustic insulation shall be of an 

approved noise control barrier with a minimum density of 50 Kg/m 3 . The acoustic 

insulation shall be at least 50mm thick and the thermal conductivity less than or equal to 

0.04 W/m o C. 


A. Thermal insulation shall be pre-formed rigid sections or slabs, the basic material 

consisting of the following: 

* Glass fibre (density 110-160 Kg/m 3 ). 

* Thermal conductivity 0.040 w/m deg C. 

The insulation shall be manufactured from long stranded mineral fibres, resin bonded to 

form sections having uniform density and high compressibility. The preformed rigid 

insulation outside surface shall be smooth, unbroken, uniform, concentric and firm. 

B. Pipework insulation shall be high density rigid resin bonded preformed glass fibre 

sections of the thickness specified. The insulation shall comprise of two half sections 

with a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil covering hinging the two half mating 

sections for ease of installation. The covering shall have a 50mm side overlap of 

reinforced aluminium foil to enable the outside surface to be completely sealed. 

C. Where thermal insulation of plant is required the insulation shall be preformed rigid 

sections or slab. The material shall consist of long fine fibres (free from short and coarse 

fibres) bonded with a temperature resistant resin. The density shall be a minimum of 48 

Kg/m 3 and the surface shall have a factory applied reinforced aluminium foil finish. 

D. Thickness of insulation shall be determined in accordance with the following tables for 

the appropriate medium and the declared value of thermal conductivity of the insulation 

material at the relevant temperature. 

When selecting the insulation thermal conductivity, the space available for the 

installation shall be thoroughly examined to ensure that the resultant thickness can be 

accommodated. 




1402-4

TABLE 1 

THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSATE 

DRAINAGE PIPEWORK 

______________________________________________________________________ 

____ 

DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY W/m deg. C 

______________________________________________________________________ 

PIPEWORK WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACES 

SIZE OF TUBE (mm) 

UP TO 0.040 W/m deg C 

Minimum Thickness of Insulation (mm) 

______________________________________________________________________ 

9 to 20 32 

25 to 50 38 

65 to 300 50 

Flat Surfaces 50 

TABLE 2 

THICKNESS OF INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSATE 

DRAINAGE PIPEWORK 

______________________________________________________________________ 

DECLARED THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY W/m dig’s 

______________________________________________________________________ 

PIPEWORK WITHIN UNCONDITIONED SPACES, PLANT ROOMS AND OPEN 

AIR 

SIZE OF TUBE (mm) 

UP TO 0.040 W/m deg. C 

Minimum Thickness of Insulation (mm) 

______________________________________________________________________ 

9 to 20 38 

25 to 50 50 

65 to 100 63 

125 to 300 75 

Flat Surfaces 50 

2.05REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION 

A. Thermal insulation shall be preformed un-slit foamed Class 1 plastic material to suit the 




1402-5

size of the pipe. The vapour barrier shall be an integral part of the material. The 

insulation shall have a thermal conductivity of 0.0375 W/m o C and shall be satisfactory 

for a temperature range of 0 o C to 104 o C without deformation or deterioration. The 

minimum thickness of the insulation shall be 25mm. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All thermal insulation materials shall be stored in their original packaging in such a 

manner as to prevent the ingress of dust or moisture. The height of the packages shall be 

restricted to prevent any deformation of preformed rigid sections. 

B. Flat sheet and rolled metal materials used for protective claddings shall be stored away 

from the ground surface, adequately covered and protected in a manner to prevent 

damage to the materials. 

C. All storage areas shall have adequate lighting to allow for the inspection of all materials. 

D. Refer to Division (1) 

3.02 FIXINGS 

A. All mechanical fixings (rivets, screws) shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of 

the material being fixed. All mechanical fixings, sealants, tapes and adhesives shall be 

entirely suitable for the medium that they are being applied to and the application shall 

be fully in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 

3.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION 

A. Thermal insulation to ductwork shall be carried out neatly and to a high-grade quality by 

skilled workers experienced in the trade, and strictly in accordance with this 

Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to any ductwork prior to 

completion of any air leakage testing required and only then after a full inspection and 


B. Thermal insulation shall be applied to all supply and return ductwork carrying 

conditioned air through unconditioned areas including plant rooms. Thermal insulation 

shall not be installed on the sections of return air ductwork covered with fire resistant 

cladding. 

Supply ductwork carrying conditioned air through conditioned areas shall be insulated, 

whereas return ductwork passing through conditioned areas shall not be insulated unless 

otherwise stated. 

All ductwork exposed to the atmosphere shall be insulated. All ductwork in plant rooms 

shall be insulated except return ductwork covered with fire resistant cladding. 




1402-6

C. All rectangular ductwork shall be insulated with rigid slab, cut to fit so that the top and 

bottom pieces overlap the sides, bonded to the ductwork with adhesive applied in 

100mm bands at 300mm intervals. On ductwork where the width exceeds 900mm, 

stickpins shall be used on the underside and sides to prevent any excessive sagging. 

D. All circular ductwork shall be insulated with mineral fibre mat bonded to the ductwork 

with adhesive applied in 100 mm bands at 300 mm intervals. 

E. All joints in the thermal insulation shall be fully sealed to maintain a continuous vapour 

barrier throughout by the use of 75 mm wide aluminium tape. 

F. Load bearing inserts of hardwood complete with factory applied vapour seal shall be 

used at support positions. The inserts shall be of the same thickness as the insulating 

material and cut such that 50 mm protrudes either side of the support. The rigid slab 

shall be butt jointed to the insert and the joint fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium 

tape to maintain the vapour seal. The vapour seal shall not be pierced or fouled by the 

supports, and shall be continuous. 

G. All insulation on ductwork carrying conditioned air shall have a continuous vapour seal. 

H. The insulation on ductwork exposed to view and within plant rooms shall be clad totally 

in an aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8mm thick with folded and cleared joints and 

corners and held in place by means of rivets. Self-tapping screws shall not be used. All 

joints shall be sealed with a non-setting sealing compound. 

J. All ductwork exposed to the outside atmosphere shall be insulated and clad as for plant 

rooms. 

K. Where ductwork passes through masonry walls, floors and roofs a sheet metal sleeve 

shall be installed and the gap, equal to the insulation thickness, shall be packed with a 

load-bearing insert with integral vapour seal. The thermal insulation shall be butt jointed 

to the insert and the joint sealed by the use of 75 mm wide aluminium tape. All openings 

through external walls and roofs shall be fitted with a flashing fixed to ensure water will 

not enter the insulated space between the ductwork and the cladding. 

L. Where the insulation is 50 mm thick or more (except for insulation which is sprayed or 

molded in site) the insulation shall be fixed in two layers with joints staggered. For air 

heaters using media at high temperature the thermal insulation material shall be suitable 

for use at those temperatures. 

M. All joints, surfaces, edges and overlaps shall be neatly finished and where possible 

overlaps shall be arranged on the `blind' side. Overlaps shall be even and parallel to the 

circumferential and longitudinal joints. Insulation shall be neatly shaped around flanged 

joints; access openings etc., irregular joints, surfaces, edges and the Engineer in any 

circumstances will not accept overlaps. 

Until final acceptance of the installation by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make 




1402-7

good any damage to insulation at his own expense, so that the installation is handed over 

in a perfect conditioned. 

N. All attenuators and diffuser plenums shall be insulated and vapour sealed to the same 

specification as the ductwork connecting to them. 


A. Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in 

accordance with this Specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework 

prior to witnessing of the pipework pressure test and only then after a full inspection and 


B. Thermal insulation shall be applied to the following: - 

(i) All pipework carrying chilled fluids in circulation including flanges and bodies 

of valves on all sizes of pipework. 

(ii) External distributing mains and fittings above ground and in ducts, chases and 

trenches including all valve bodies and flanges. 

(iii) Feed and expansion vessels and vent pipework in roof spaces and elsewhere, as 

indicated, to prevent the shedding of condensation. 

(iv) Buried pipework shall have special forms of insulation as indicated. 

(vi) All chilled water pipework (including valve bodies, specialties and flanges) shall 

be insulated. 

(vii) All condensate drainage pipework to prevent shedding of condensation. 

Insulation shall fit closely on pipework and other surfaces without gaps between. 

C. All sections of the insulation shall be of the correct size and made for the type and grade 

of piping to which it is fitted and shall form a tight fit on the pipework after application 

of adhesive and lapping. Bends shall be formed by cutting a series of gussets in the preformed 

sections to form a continuous finish with the pipework. The valve bodies and 

flanges in plant rooms and those components within the entire pipework system 65mm 

dia and above shall be insulated with the same insulation as the accompanying pipework 

but contained within a removable aluminium box. Where a vapour seal is incorporated 

into the insulation, all joints shall be effectively sealed with approved sealing material 

and securely fixed. 

D. Load bearing inserts of hardwood complete with a factory applied vapour seal shall be 

used at support positions on chilled water pipework. The insert shall be of the same 

thickness as the insulating material and cut such that 50 mm protrudes either side of the 

support. The pre-formed insulation section shall be butt jointed to the insert and the joint 

fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape to maintain the vapour seal. 

At flanges, expansion joints and anchor points, particular attention shall be paid to 

sealing the insulation against water vapour ingress. 




1402-8

E. Each pre-formed rigid insulation section shall be butt jointed to the next, the point being 

fully sealed with 75 mm wide aluminium tape. The preformed sections on domestic hot 

and cold-water services shall be secured hard to the bracket where inserts are not used. 

The reinforced aluminium side overlap shall be sealed with a suitable adhesive or 75 

mm wide aluminium tape. Outer coverings shall not come into contact with pipework 

and attachments. 

F. Each section of pre-formed insulation shall be secured to the pipe by one of the 

following means: 

* Circumferential tie wires each formed from three turns of wire not less than 1 

mm thick, spaced not more than 450 mm apart. 

* Circumferential bands of non-ferrous metal, plastic fibre or adhesive sheet. 

* Rigid insulation applied to cylinders and flat surfaces shall be secured with nonferrous 

metal or plastic fixings. 

G. The insulation on pipework concealed from view within buildings will not require 

further protective cladding. 

H. Insulation on pipework exposed to view and within plant rooms and external to the 

building shall be clad fully in a pre-formed aluminium stucco finish cladding 0.8 mm 

thick held in place by means of rivets or self tapping screws. All joints shall be sealed 

with a non-setting sealing compound. The Contractor shall take extreme care to ensure 

that the application of the metal cladding does not destroy the continuity of the vapour 

barrier. 

I. Valves, flanges and specialties shall be fitted with insulated removable boxes formed in 

0.8mm thick aluminium stucco cladding. Boxes shall be in two sections hinged and 

secured by lift-lock latches. 

J. At all instrument points or tapings on pipework or ductwork the insulation shall be cut 

away and the edges neatly finished and sealed with the aluminum cladding as for 

adjacent finishes allowing access for the instrument. 

3.05 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION 

A. The suction line from the evaporator to the compressor shall be insulated with foamed 

plastic as specified previously and shall be protected by a vapour barrier which shall not 

be broken between joints of sectional material or at discontinuities of valves or brackets. 

B. Where possible the insulation shall be sleeved on the pipes before they are fitted. At all 

junctions, elbows, valves, and the like, it shall be carefully cut and fitted to the method 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

C. All open edges, joints and the like, shall be sealed with an adhesive as recommended by 




1402-9

the insulation manufacturer. 


A. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect the works during 

construction. Any damaged sections of insulation shall be completely cut out and 

replaced with a new section. The vapour seal shall be repaired to ensure continuity. 

All damaged sections shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense until the system is 

accepted and finally handed over. 





1402-10

SECTION 1403 

DUCTWORK 




standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Metal Ductwork. 



operations in connection with the supply and installation of metal and plastic 

ductwork as specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings. 




A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the factory fabrication of Metal and 

Plastic Ductwork whose products have been in satisfactory use in a similar application 


B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Metal and 

Plastic Ductwork with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of 

a similar nature. 


A. The Metal and Plastic Ductwork and all associated materials and workmanship shall 

comply fully with the latest relevant standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used and relevant British, American and other 

Standards for Metal Ductwork and associated materials. However, the Contractor 

shall ensure that all applicable standards are complied with whether listed here or not. 

1. Specification for sheet metal ductwork No. DW 142 and Addendum "A" 1988 

for low, medium and high pressure / velocity air systems published by 

Heating, Ventilating Contractors Association (HVCA) UK. 

2. A practical guide to Ductwork Leakage Testing DW/143 published by HVCA 

UK. 

3. Specification for Plastic Ductwork DW/91. 



Ductwork 

1403-1

4. Guide to Good Practice – Internal Cleanliness of New Ductwork Installation. 

5. The SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National 

Association, Inc.) duct manual and sheet metal construction for ventilating and 

air conditioning systems 

6. Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, 5th ed. (SMACNA). 

7. Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards. (SMACNA) 

8. The ASHRAE handbook published by the American Society of Heating, 

Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc. - Duct Construction 

9. ASTM Standard A525 : Hot Dipped Galvanized Steel Sheets 

10. Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

(National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90A-93). 

11. Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

(National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90A-93). 

12. Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning 

Systems (National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 90B-93). 

13. Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock 

and Vapor Removal or Conveying (National Fire Protection Association, 

ANSI/NFPA 91-92). 

14. Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and 

Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment. (National Fire 

Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 96-94). 



B. Calculations - refer to 1000 

Fan static head calculations shall be submitted to the engineer for approval based on 

Contractor ductwork working drawings. 

C. Products - Typical duct section and fittings to demonstrate integrity of construction. 

D. Full details of air test procedures. 





Ductwork 

1403-2

1.07 WARRANTY . 

A. Provide warranty in accordance with the contract conditions. 


2.01 GENERAL 

A. All figure numbers referred to throughout this ductwork specification relate to those 

contained in DW 142. 

B. All ductwork shall be manufactured from hot-dip galvanised steel sheets to BS 2989 

grade Z2 coating type or equal in accordance with DW 142 specification for low, 

medium and high pressure / velocity air systems. 

C. Ductwork shall be manufactured to the sizes detailed on the drawings, however where 

ductwork is to be internally lined the ductwork size shall be increased to compensate 

for the lining thickness. 

D. The interior surfaces of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, 

angles, or similar shall project into the air stream for any reason unless specified to do 

so. All seams and joints shall be external. 

E. The minimum nominal sheet thickness for any ductwork shall be 0.8 mm for internal 

systems with the longer duct size up to 1000mm. Where the longer duct size exceeds 

1000 mm the nominal sheet thickness shall be 1.0 mm. 

F. The Contractor shall ensure that the choice of gauge thickness for ductwork and the 

stiffening provision is such that the ductwork installation does not drum or vibrate. 

Single stiffeners shall be used as illustrated in figures 44-49 inclusive of DW 142. 

G. Ductwork performance standards shall be as follows:- 

Ductwork system 

Air conditioning supply air 

duct 

Air conditioning return air 

duct 

Toilet extract ventilation 

ductwork 

Low 

Low 

Low 

Pressure/Velocity 

classification 

Air Leakage 

Class "B" 

Class "B" 

Class "B" 



Ductwork 

1403-3

H. All ductwork operating at pressures classified as "Low" and "Medium" pressure in the 

table above shall be tested to establish conformity with leakage limits set out in DW 

142 and in accordance with procedures described in DW 143. 

Additionally samples of straight duct beads and tees on low, medium and high 

velocity ductwork systems should be selected and pressure tested during erection to 

demonstrate the adequacy of jointing methods. 

I. All jointing and construction methods shall be approved by the Engineer. 

J. Approved sealant shall be used on all ductwork longitudinal seams. The sealant can 

be included in the seam during manufacture and applied as an edge sealant. 

K. Button punch snap lock longitudinal joints shall not be used. 

L. Particular attention shall be given to ensuring that cross jointing methods are suitable 

for the specified pressure rating. Cross joints shall generally be flanged and corner 

treatment shall be such that corners pull-up true and square and do not leak. An 

approved liquid or mastic sealant shall be used on all cross joints. 

M. Longitudinal joints on rectangular ductwork shall be seamed as illustrated in Figures 

1-4 inclusive DW 142. 

Seams illustrated in figures 5, 6 and 7 shall not be used. 

N. Aerofoil section turning varies shall be used on all 90° square bends. Turning vanes 

shall be securely attached at each end either to the duct or to internal runners and the 

runners fastened to the duct by mechanically-closed rivets or bolts at 90mm maximum 

spacing. Turning vanes in twin bends in which the widths of the straight section and 

branch differ shall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the turning vanes 

are parallel to the duct axis. 

O. Change shapes that maintain the cross-sectional area shall have sides where the slope 

does not exceed 22.5 o on any side. Should it be necessary to reduce the cross 

sectional area the slope shall not exceed 9 o on any side and the reduction in area shall 

not exceed 20%. In this instance the approval of the Engineer shall be sought prior to 

manufacture. 

P. The slope of expansions and contractions shall not exceed 22.5 o on any side unless it 

is unavoidable, in which case splitters shall be provided to bisect the angle between 

the sloping side and the centre line of the duct. 

Q. Ductwork connections to plant and equipment (eg. cooling coils,) shall, in the case of 

bolted flanges, be provided with matching flanges of similar size and thickness. Sheet 

metal returned flanges shall not be permitted. 

R. Construction requirements for circular ducts shall be in accordance with DW 142 and 

DW 91. Circular plastic shall be used for fume cupboard and microbiological safety 

cabinets. 



Ductwork 

1403-4

The grooved seam of spiral seamed ducts shall be tightly formed to produce a rigid 

duct and as such shall be accepted as an airtight joint without the use of sealant. The 

longitudinal seam for straight seamed ducts shall be a grooved seam continued to the 

extreme end of the duct and sealed during manufacture. Plastic ducts shall be solvent 

welded throughout the whole length of the system with bolted flanges to equipment 

for disconnection. 

S. The ductwork sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal, therefore for socket and 

spigot joints the actual dimensions of ductwork and fittings shall be correctly related 

so that when installed the joint shall be effectively sealed. 

T. Bends shall be either segmented with swaged ends, or in the case of ductwork 400mm 

diameter and below, pressed bends of the long radiussed type shall be acceptable. 

U. Tapers of the concentric type shall be manufactured with an angle not exceeding 9 o . 

Tapers of the eccentric type shall have angles not exceeding 30 o . 

V. Hangers and supports for ductwork systems shall generally comply with DW 142 Part 

6. Primary fixings into the building structure shall be subject to approval by the 

Engineer. 

W. Ductwork hangers and supports shall be adjustable for height, spaced to ensure 

adequate support and where practicable, fitted at each ductwork joint or spaced at not 

more than the maximum centres in Tables 24, 25 and 26 for rectangular, circular and 

flat oval horizontal ducting. Securing of formed brackets to corners of ductwork as a 

means of suspension shall not be permitted. 

X. Supports for vertical ductwork in buildings shall be generally located at each floor 

slab but subject to a maximum spacing of 4 metres. 

Y. All ductwork shall be securely supported from the building structure but inert packing 

material shall be provided between ducts and supports to prevent direct contact of the 

ducting with the structure. 

Z. Thermal insulators shall be installed between sheet metal ductwork carrying 

conditioned air and the support steelwork as described in this specification and as 

shown on the drawings. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. Ductwork shall be either stored on purpose made racks of welded construction, or in a 

dry open area stored clear of the ground. 



Ductwork 

1403-5

B. All open ends of ductwork shall be sealed with polythene sheeting to prevent the 

ingress of dirt. 

C. Small ductwork sections shall not be stored within larger sections except in the case 

of circular ducts. 

D. Ductwork shall not be stacked in a manner that will result in damage to or 

deformation of the sections will occur. 

E. All ductwork shall be stored with an identification label indicating the piece number, 

size and location in which it is to be installed. 

F. Comply with Division (1) 

3.02 FIXINGS 

A. Mechanically closed rivets shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers 

recommendations with regard to use, size and clearance drill size. 

B. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be used for flanged sections of ductwork and shall be of 

mild steel protected by electro galvanizing, cadmium plating or a similar approved 

finish. 

C. Self tapping screws shall only be used subject to the approval of the Engineer, in 

instances where other types of fixing is not practical. 

D. Welding shall not be permitted on galvanized sheet steel materials. 


A. Ductwork shall be installed generally as indicated on the drawings subject to full 

coordination and fully in accordance with the HVCA DW 142 manual referred to in 

Part 2.0 and HVCA DW 91. 

B. Where sets and final plant connections are required site measurements shall be taken 

to establish dimensions prior to manufacture. 

C. All ductwork joints shall be fitted with the recommended minimum number of 

fixings, cleats or clamps. Sealants shall be used at all joints. 

D. Branches shall be installed off straight sections of ductwork and not off taper sections. 

E. Ductwork expansions shall be made upstream of a branch connection and 

contractions downstream of a branch connection. 

F. Concentric tapers on circular ductwork shall be used in preference to eccentric tapers. 

The latter shall be used only where it is necessary to offset the ductwork centre line. 

G. Particular regard must be paid to the preventation of duct movement, with consequent 



Ductwork 

1403-6

noise, potential leakage and strain upon flexible connections. 

H. Attention shall be given to the installation of long runs of air ducts to the direction of 

expansion or contraction movement due to thermal change, towards flexible inserts 

provided for the purpose of absorbing such movement. 

I 

Test holes shall be provided in all main ducts and branches floor airflow measuring. 

Test holes shall be neatly formed and fitted with removable type airtight plastic plugs. 

J. Care shall be exercised to ensure that no edges protrude into the airways, and that all 

spigots (especially on high velocity systems) are well matched so that a smooth 

airflow is achieved throughout the length of the ducting. Any section of ductwork 

causing noise due to poor construction shall be removed and reinstated at the 

Contractor's expense. 

K. Due consideration shall be given to the space required for all other services and 

allowance made for the thickness of thermal insulation. 

L. Air-leakage testing shall be carried out progressively, to the requirements for the 

particular pressure classification of the system in accordance with DW/142 

Appendices A + B. 

M. All testing, balancing and commissioning shall be in accordance with the relevant 

section of this specification (section 9996). 




Ductwork 

1403-7

SECTION 1404 

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 



A. This Technical Specification establishes the type and quality of materials and the 

standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Ductwork 

Accessories. 



operations in connection with the supply and installation of Ductwork Accessories as 





A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Ductwork Accessories 

whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than 

10 years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Ductwork 

Accessories with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of 



A. The Ductwork Accessories and all associated materials and workmanship shall 

comply fully with the latest relevant British Standards HVCA DW/142 specification 

for sheet metal ductwork and other applicable codes and standards in all respects. 

B. The following are the most commonly used relevant British Standards and other 

applicable codes and standards associated with Ductwork Accessories and associated 

materials. However, the Contractor shall ensure that all applicable standards are 

complied with whether listed here or not. 

BS 476 

(Part 7) - Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of Flame of 

Products. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 

Duct work Accessories 

1404-1

BS 476 

(Part 8) - Test Methods and Criteria for the Fire Resistance of Elements 

of Building Construction. 

BS 6821 - Methods for Aerodynamic Testing of Dampers and Valves. 

BS 8233 - Code of Practice for Sound Insulation and Noise Reduction for 

Buildings. 

HVCA DW142 - 

HVCA DW 91 - 

Specification for sheet metal ductwork. 

Specification for plastic ductwork. 

CP 413 - Code of Practice for Ducts for Building Services. 

NFPA 90A - National Fire Protection Association - Standard for the 

Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 

SMACNA - All related codes and publications. 



B. Products: Samples of access doors, volume control dampers, fire dampers, attenuators, 

flexible connections sealants to be submitted for approval. 

C. Calculations demonstrating attenuator performance and selection. 

D. Manufacturers data for every component to be submitted for approval. 



1.07 WARRANTY 



2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS 

A. All dampers shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent fluttering. Unless otherwise 

indicated the air leakage past dampers in the fully closed position shall not exceed 5% 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-2

of the maximum design air flow in the duct. 

B. All duct volume control dampers shall be fitted with locking devices and position 

indicators. 

C. Manual and motorised dampers shall be provided for the proper balancing control and 

isolation of the ductwork system. 

These shall be of the multi-leaf opposed blade type each damper comprising narrow 

width low profile aerofoil blades. 

D. Each leaf of a multi leaf damper shall comprise of a low profile aspect ratio aerofoil 

galvanised steel blade. The blades shall be provided with a totally enclosed galvanised 

steel reinforced locking rod. Each blade shall be connected to low pressure angle 

toothed gears in galvanised steel with brass bearings. The gear drive assembly shall be 

positioned totally out of the air stream in a totally enclosed galvanised steel dustproof 

control box which shall be externally mounted. The frame shall comprise of a 

galvanised steel formed inner frame and a roll-formed zintec steel outer frame having 

integral flanges, pre-punched with elongated holes for connection to the adjoining 

ductwork. 

Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminium with the words 

`OPEN' and `SHUT' cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely fixed and the 

damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant hubs to prevent any damper 

movement when the damper levers are locked. 

E. Motorised control dampers shall be incorporated into air handling units where 

practicable. The selection of motorised control dampers shall be made by the controls 

specialist. 

2.02 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Fire dampers shall conform in their entirety with NFPA 90A and shall meet the fire 

damper standard detailed in the manual of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 

Contractors, National Association Inc. (SMACNA). 

B. Each fire damper shall have at least the same standard of fire resistance as the wall or 

floor through which the duct passes or where applicable, the fire rating of fire-clad 

ductwork abutting it. Unless otherwise indicated it shall have a fire resistance rating 

of 2 hours. When a fire resistance rating of 4 hours is required either 2 dampers, 

mechanically connected or a single damper having a fire resistance rating of 4 hours 

shall be provided. 

C. All dampers except where indicated for solenoid and motorised actuation shall have 

the blades housed in an enclosure located out of the air stream cross section. 

Connection shall suit the particular duct size with spigot or flanged ends as 

determined by the operating pressure/velocity and physical dimensions of the 

associated system ducting. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-3

D. Provide fire dampers of 16 gauge stainless steel with 100% interlocking joints to form 

a continuous steel curtain when closed. 

E. The damper shall be housed in a corrosion-resistant casing constructed to avoid 

distortion due to stress in fire conditions. Provision shall be made to accommodate 

expansion of the damper blades within the casing in fire conditions. A fire damper 

shall also incorporate provision for expansion in the form of an installation frame 

within the surrounding structure together with lugs for building into the structure. 

F. Provide out of the air stream positive closure stainless steel constant tension springs 

on all fire dampers. 

G. Each fire damper casing shall be clearly marked with a permanent indication of the 

correct fixing attitude of dampers, the direction of air flow and the side at which the 

access/maintenance opening shall be located. 

H. Each fire damper shall be held in the open position by a releasing device consisting of 

a fusible link and either a stranded wire or a steel strap. Alternatively the damper 

blade may be released by a fusible phial in a cartridge housing. The fusible element 

shall operate at 70 o C. 

I. Fire dampers which are solenoid or motorised operated shall be of the stainless steel 

interlocking aerofoil blade pivot type complete with continuous twin trailing edge 

double metal seal located in the air stream. The blades shall be interlinked and the 

mechanism shall be arranged to enable solenoid operation for instantaneous closure 

and or motor operation for opening or closure as required. The dampers shall be 

activated by the fire detection system. 

J. For dampers with blades out of the air stream, the resistance to air flow shall not 

exceed 5Pa. For the aerofoil blade pivot type, the resistance to air flow shall not 

exceed 5Pa. 

K. Fire dampers which are solenoid or motorised shall be activated and reset by the fire 

control panel. 

L. Fire dampers shall subject to the approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 

M. Smoke dampers shall be manufactured in stainless steel, with aerofoil type blades 

permanently in the air stream. A control assembly shall be mounted on the extended 

section of the smoke damper. This control assembly shall house the spring release 

mechanism and motor drive for shutting and opening the smoke damper. 

2.03 ACCESS DOORS 

A. All access openings shall be rigidly framed, with airtight covers designed so that they 

can be speedily removed and refixed. Multiple set screws and self-tapping screws are 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-4

not acceptable, as a method of fixing. 

B. Covers shall be pre-insulated "sandwiched" construction to match thermal/vapour seal 

performance of surrounding ductwork insulation. 

C. Subject to the restrictions imposed by duct dimensions, openings for access should not 

be smaller than 375 x 300mm or larger than 450 x 375mm, and openings for 

inspection should have a minimum diameter of 100mm. 

D. Where ducts are to be thermally insulated the frame of the access door or cover shall 

be extended beyond the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of 

the insulation and be so arranged that the insulation and finish can be "dressed" into 

the frame, thereby ensuring that the opening is not concealed and the edges of the 

insulation are protected from accidental damage. 

2.04 DUCTWORK ATTENUATORS 

A. Rectangular duct attenuators shall have their outer casing manufactured from 

galvanised sheet metal of not less than 20 gauge with all joints lock formed and 

mastic sealed. All attenuators shall have galvanised angle flanges at each end, being 

secured to the casing by sealed bolts or spot welding. Attenuators measuring up to 

1200mm x 1200mm shall be fitted with galvanised angle flanges 40mm x 40mm x 

5mm. Attenuators with one side in excess of 1200mm shall be fitted with galvanised 

single flanges 50mm x 50mm x 10mm. All galvanised angle flanges shall be drilled 

with a slotted hole 12mm wide. 

B. All acoustic splitters shall comprise inert, non-combustible non-hygroscopic and 

vermin proof mineral wool packed to a density of not less than 50 Kg/m 3 . Each 

splitted infill shall be protected by a glass cloth to prevent particle migration and 

finally covered with galvanised steel, perforated and fitted with light aero dynamically 

shaped leading and trailing edges. Square ends shall not be acceptable. The perforated 

galvanised sheet steel shall not be less than 26 gauge. In the case of attenuators for use 

in ductwork for clinical areas, a protective, hygienic lining suitable for sterilisation by 

air borne treatments shall be used. 

C. Circular attenuators shall be manufactured to the same standards as rectangular 

attenuators and diameters of 1.5m shall not be exceeded. Each circular silencer shall 

include an acoustic infill aero dynamically shaped centre pod. The pod shall be 

treated in the same manner as all other acoustic infill, i.e. protected by a layer of glass 

cloth to prevent particle migration and covered with 26 gauge galvanised mild steel 

perforated sheet. 

D. All attenuator performance shall be determined in a duct to reverberant room test 

facility which provides for air flow through the attenuators. The tests procedures shall 

eliminate end reflection, directivity , flanking transmission, standing waves and test 

chamber sound absorption. The attenuator performance shall be tabled indicating 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-5

dynamic insertion loss and self noise levels at various case velocities for air flow in 

both directions. 

E. The static pressure loss from each attenuator shall not exceed 60Pa. 

F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the attenuator selection data 

indicating the calculated required insertion loss together with the performance of the 

selected attenuator. The approved attenuator shall be incorporated onto the working 

drawings prior to submittal for approval. 

2.05 FLEXIBLE JOINTS 

A. The material for flexible joints shall have good acoustic absorption performance and 

shall satisfy the conditions of temperature, air pressure and fire resistance specified, 

and shall comply with the standard of airtightness specified for the rest of the 

ductwork system of which it forms part. 

B. Flexible joints shall be kept as short as practicable above a minimum effective length 

of 50mm. In no case shall the flexible joint exceed 250mm in length. 

C. The flexible materials flange shall be backed by an angle or flat iron flange and the 

flexible joint shall be securely held between the metal flanges. 

D. Flexible joints shall be made from, or protected by, material having a fire penetration 

time of at least fifteen minutes, when tested in accordance with BS 476, Part 8. The 

material shall be of the glass fibre cloth type. 

2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 

A. The flexible duct shall have a liner and a cover of tough tear-resistant fabric equal in 

durability and flexibility to glass fibre fabric and shall be impregnated and coated with 

plastic. It shall be reinforced with a bonded galvanised spring steel wire helix 

between the liner and the cover and an outer helix of glass fibre cord or equal shall be 

bonded to the cover to ensure regular convolutions. 

Alternatively, the flexible duct shall consist of a flexible corrugated metal tubing of 

stainless steel, aluminium, tinplated steel or aluminium coated steel. The metal may 

be lined on the inside or the outside or both with plastic material. 

B. The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of the flexible duct shall not 

exceed 50% more than the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanised steel 

ducts of equivalent diameter. 

C. The leakage from any section of flexible duct shall not exceed 1% of the design air 

flow rate at the static operating pressure. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-6

D. Flexible ducts shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -18 o C to 120 o C 

and the pressure range of the system. Flexible duct shall comply with BS 476 Part 7 

(Class 1 : Surface of very low flame spread). 

E. Flexible ducts of more than 0.5 metre length shall not be permitted. 

F. Flexible ducts shall be either pre-insulated at the works, or alternatively insulated as 

for circular supply ducts. 

2.07 SEALANTS, GASKETS AND TAPES 

A. All materials including liquid and mastic sealants shall, when used in connection with 

ductwork jointing, permanently retain adhesion and elasticity through a temperature 

range of 0 o C to 70 o C and pressure range applicable to the system. 

B. Gaskets shall be of a pre-formed roll, sheet or strip. Gaskets shall not be less than 

3mm thick for rectangular ducts up to 900mm (longest side) or circular ducts up to 

1250mm diameter. For larger ducts, the gaskets shall not be less than 4mm thick. 

2.09 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINAL BOX (VAV) (NOT APPLICABLE) 

A. The VAV terminal box shall comprise of:- 

1. A Supply air volume controller unit 

2. Inside terminal box Sound attenuator 

3. Single or multiple outlet plenums 

4. Microprocessor Application Specific Controller (ASC). 

B. The air terminal shall be of the independent pressure type, single duct with ARI 

Certified performance data. The air terminal shall be constructed of coated steel of 

minimum 1mm thickness suitably stiffened to prevent drumming and shall be 

internally insulated with non inflammable, non -toxic and face with neoprene to 

prevent erosion by air stream. 

C. The box shall have circular spigot connection and shall provide a minimum lapped 

joint of 38mm. The inlet shall have a round (or oval) damper operating within a round 

(or oval) chamber enclosed by an insulated sheet metal casing. 

D. The damper seal shall be provided by a flexible gasket mounted in the damper blade 

without adhesives. The damper shall be a double thickness of 24-gauge steel and 

leakage around the damper shall be less than 1% of maximum flow at 3” static 

pressure 

E. Construction to be minimum 24 gauge steel for the Air Terminal casing and inlet plate. 

The universal control mounting panel and damper cylinder shall be constructed of 

minimum 20 gauge steel. The VAV box shall be insulated with 1" minimum thick 

1.5 pcf density fibrous glass, lined with neoprene to prevent air erosion up to 6000 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-7

FPM surface velocity. All raw edges shall be coated with adhesive to seal loose 

fibers. Insulation, adhesive and gasket materials shall meet NFPA90A. 

F. The air terminal shall be provided with control linkage design that allows the damper 

to be repositioned without the use of tools so that damper can be switched from 

normally open to normally closed, or vice versa, without removing or relocating the 

damper actuator. The air terminal with the multi port velocity sensor and flow sensing 

device shall be provided with a quick release access door to permit damper inspection 

and removal of the air flow sensor. Each air terminal shall have a control wiring 

diagram specific to that air terminal affixed to the control mounting panel and shall be 

marked with specific setting and location tagging. 

G. The electric or electronic actuator shall be fitted with an end switch which shall be 

connected to the BMS (Building Management System) to indicate the position of the 

damper. 

H. Attenuators: Where the selected terminal unit has at NC level which does not conform to 

that specified for the area under consideration, a terminal box attenuator shall be 

employed to reduce the unit noise level even further. 

I. The differential pressure sensor, the pressure shall be measured at the pressure sensor 

and sent to BMS via a controller to the multi-controller. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All materials shall be stored on purpose made compartmented racks or shelving within 

a well lit storage container and suitably covered to prevent the ingress of dirt. 

B. Larger items shall be covered and stored clear of the ground in an area where they are 

not susceptible to damage. 

C. All items shall be separated by their type and size, laid out in an orderly fashion and 

clearly marked for ease of identification. 

D. Comply with Division (1). 

3.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS 

A. Dampers shall be installed in the positions shown on the Drawings and where 

branches or sub-branches leave the main distribution ducts. Sufficient dampers shall 

be provided to regulate and balance the systems. 

B. Dampers shall be positioned to enable full access to operating handles, and such that 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-8

position indicators are clearly visible. 

C. Dampers shall be positioned in sufficient length of straight ductwork to enable access 

doors to be mounted adjacent to the damper. 

D. Dampers shall be installed as remote as possible from terminal devices and ductwork 

open ends, to prevent regenerated noise being transmitted to the occupied space. 

3.03 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Fire dampers shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and in all positions 

where air passages or ducts pass through fire compartments and ceiling smoke barriers 

and at the termination point of fire-clad ductwork. 

B. In large section ducts where single units of sufficient size cannot be incorporated 

multi-section units shall be fitted. 

C. Fire dampers shall be installed to enable full access to linkages, and in such manner 

that position indicators are clearly visible. 

D. The Contractor shall include for the full testing of all fire dampers and for resetting 

after testing. 

E. Fire dampers shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's 

instructions, with particular attention to the maximum number and diameter of bends 

on solenoid operating cables. 

3.04 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Access doors shall be installed in all positions indicated on the Drawings and where 

required to gain full access to all duct mounted items. 

B. Access doors shall be installed adjacent to all fire dampers in such a manner that full 

access is available to both the damper and fusible link. 

C. Access doors shall be provided adjacent to all balancing dampers. 

D. Should adequate access not be achieved due to the physical restrictions of the duct 

size then one access door shall be positioned either side of the fire dampers or volume 

control damper. 

3.05 DUCTWORK ATTENUATORS 

A. Attenuators shall be installed in all positions indicated on the Drawings and strictly in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-9

B. All attenuators shall be independently supported from adjacent ductwork plant items. 

3.06 FLEXIBLE JOINTS 

A. Flexible joints shall be fitted at inlet and outlet connections to all fans and air handling 

units, and where ducts cross building expansion joints. Any other required locations 

shall be indicated on the design drawings. Care should be taken to maintain 

alignment between the fan and the duct connection. 

B. With flanged rectangular connections the flexible material shall be held in placed with 

flat bar strips attached to a mating flange. For spigot connections the flexible material 

shall be held in place with flat bar strips. Flat bar strips shall be used with proprietary 

flexible material having sheet metal attached along the edges. Flat bar strips shall be 

not less than 2 mm thick. 

C. Adaptors shall be used to provide plain circular ends for spirally-wound ducts. A 

sealant, in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, shall be used 

between the duct and the flexible joint and the joint secured by clip bands with 

adjustable screw or toggle fittings. 

3.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 

A. Flexible connections shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and selected to 

suit the spigot size of the relevant duct or item of equipment. 

B. Flexible connections shall be secured to spigots with bandclips of a proprietary 

manufacture. 

C. The use of flexible duct between rigid sections of sheet metal ductwork to change 

direction or plane will not be permitted except where indicated or expressly authorised 

by the Engineer. 

D. Radius bends in flexible duct shall not be permitted and sets shall be of such a nature 

that a reduction in the cross sectional area shall not occur. 

3.08 SEALANTS, GASKETS AND TAPES 

A. The manufacturer's recommendations and precautions relating to use of sealants, 

gaskets and tapes shall be strictly complied with. 

B. Sealants, gaskets and tapes shall be applied to the mating surfaces of a joint and joint 

pulled together such that the form of sealing is under compression. Sealants applied 

over a joint shall not be permitted. 



_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-10

C. Self-adhesive tape shall not be permitted as a primary sealant. 

3.09 TEST HOLES 

Where test holes are cut at works or drilled on site at time of commissioning, all holes 

shall be plugged, using effective removable plastic airtight sealing plugs. Samples of 

these plugs shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer. 




_____________________________________________________________________ 


1404-11

SECTION 1405 

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 




standard of workmanship to be used in the supply and installation of Air Outlets and 

Inlets or Air Terminal Devices. 



operations in connection with the supply and installation of air terminal devices as 

specified herein and where referred to on the Drawings and Schedules. 




A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air terminal devices 

whose products have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than 

10 years. 

B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of air terminal 

devices with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects of a similar 

nature. 


A. The air terminal devices and all associated materials and workmanship shall comply 

fully with the latest relevant British Standards and ISO Standards in all respects. 

The following are the most commonly used and relevant British Standards and ISO 

standards associated with air terminal devices and associated materials. However, the 

Contractor shall ensure that all applicable British Standards and ISO Standards are 

complied with whether listed here or not. 

BS: 4773 : Methods for testing and rating air terminal devices for air 

distribution systems: Part 1, Aerodynamic testing. 

ISO: 5219 : Air distribution and air diffusion: Laboratory aerodynamic 

testing and rating of air terminal devices. 



Air Outlets & Inlet 

1405-1





1.07 WARRANTY 



2.01 GRILLES 

A. Grilles shall be of aluminum extrusion of the types and sizes indicated on the 

drawings and in the schedules and be of the concealed fixing type. Where the size is 

not indicated, the grilles shall be selected for the air volume flow rates indicated in the 

schedules to achieve the required throw, and be within the relevant noise level for the 

area being served. 

B. All grilles shall be provided with an aluminum opposed blade multi leaf damper, with 

loose key to allow adjustment of the concealed adjuster from the face of the grille. 

One loose key for every 20 grilles shall be provided. 

C. Each supply grille shall have two sets of individually adjustable aluminum blades, one 

set horizontal the other vertical. 

D. Extract grilles shall be as indicated on the drawings, and in the schedules. 

E. All grilles shall be powder coated to the color approved by the Engineer. 

2.02 DIFFUSERS 

A. Air diffusers shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the duties, sizes and 

locations shown on the drawings. 

B. Square diffusers for both supply and return air shall be manufactured from extruded 

aluminum and shall be supplied complete with opposed blade volume control 

dampers. Both dampers and grilles shall have concealed screw type fixings. Spring 

clip fixings shall not be permitted. 

C. Where a supply diffuser is directly connected to a stub duct which has a straight of 

less than two diameters or equivalent diameters, then an equalizing grid or deflector 

shall be used. 




1405-2

D. The frames of all diffusers shall be provided with positive seals with the except of 

those mounted on exposed ductwork. Frames shall be of a type compatible with the 

ceiling type or wall finish. 

E. Linear slot diffusers where required shall be constructed from extruded aluminum and 

shall be supplied complete with pattern control element. Linear slot diffusers shall 

have mitered flanges end caps and concealed fixing straps. Spring clip fixing shall not 

be permitted. Where linear slot diffusers cross partition locations closure plates shall 

be provided to give a neat termination line either side of the partition. 

F. All return air square diffusers shall be identical to the supply air diffusers within each 

conditioned zone. 

G. All diffusers shall be supplied with a stove enamel paint finish to a colour as approved 

by the Architect. 

H. The schedules provided indicate volume flows, throws, maximum noise levels and 

maximum pressure drops. The Contractor shall ensure that the grille and diffuser 

manufacturer shall assess the data and confirms that his selections comply with the 

stated parameters. 

I. Special radiussed continuous slot diffusers shall be manufactured from site 

dimensions to ensure full co-ordination with the ceiling. 

J. All diffusers shall be powder coated to the color approved by the Engineer. 

2.03 LOUVRES 

A. Air intakes and discharges associated with air handling plant shall consist of ducted 

connections made to flanged openings formed in the galvanised sheet steel blanking 

plates fixed to the rear of the building weather louvres. The blanking plates shall be 

used to cover over un-used areas of the weather louvres, and shall be provided under 

Division 9. 

B. Sand trap louvres shall be incorporated into the air intake ductwork sections where 

indicated. 

C. The sand collection efficiency of the sand trap at a face velocity of 0.6 m/s shall not be 

less than 80% with a sand consistency of 92% of particles falling within the 90 to 425 

microns range. The pressure loss shall not exceed 30 Pa. 

D. Louvres not forming part of the building cladding are scheduled in Division 9. 


3.01 STORAGE 

A. All air terminal devices shall be stored within a well lit container on purpose made 




1405-3

shelving. The devices shall be stored in their original packaging to prevent damage to 

the finish. 


A. The air terminal devices shall be identified by reference number as to their final 

location. Plenum boxes shall be similarly numbered to reduce the risk of incorrect 

matching. 

B. Grilles, diffusers and plenum boxes shall be supported independently from the 

building structure unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Grilles diffusers and 

plenums shall not be supported from the ceiling grid. 

C. All volume control dampers shall be left in the fully open position. 

D. Diffusers shall be securely fixed to plenum boxes by means of concealed adjustable 

mounting brackets. 

E. Side wall grilles shall be fixed to grille plenum boxes or direct ductwall as indicated 

on the drawings. 

F. During construction the Contractor shall ensure that the location and fixing of all 

grilles and diffusers is fully coordinated between the relevant trades. 

G. Continuous slot diffusers shall have hairline butt joints and shall have provision for 

alignment to ensure an unbroken visual line. Make up pieces shall be site measured 

and factory cut. Site cutting of diffusers will not be permitted. 





1405-4

LIST OF MANUFACTURERS - MECHANICAL WORKS 

DRAINAGE AND RAIN WATER SYSTEM 

No. Item (1) (2) (3) 

1. Soil, waste, rain water 

pipes, 

fittings 

UAP(Taken) Holuit((Taken) 

2. Floor Drains, Roof 

Drains 

Floor Cleanouts and 

Flower 

Bed Drain (UPVC) 

Key Terrain Ltd 

(UK) 

REDI 

(Italy) 

Hepworth 

(UK) 

3. Floor Drain in Garage 

Area 

(cast iron) 

Zurn 

(USA) 

Wade 

(UK) 

Smith 

(USA) 

4. Sanitary fixtures Ideal Standard 

(San Remo) 

Jacobdelafon 

(Odion) 

Roca 

(Meridian) 

14

POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 

No. Item (1) (2) (3) 

1. Cold and hot water pipes 

insulation 

Armaflex 

(UK) 

Kaimann 

Flex 

(Germany) 

Clima 

Flex 

(Belgium) 

2. Cold and hot water pipes 

valves 

Crane 

(UK) 

kIM 

3. Pressure, booster pump set 

included valves, headers, 

control system 

Grundfos salmsong ITTlowara 

4. Electric Water Heater Local made 

5. Copper monifold Giacomomini 

(Italy) 

Toma 

(Italy) 

Tiemme 

(Italy) 

15

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 

No. Item (1) (2) (3) 

1. Hot/chilled water pipes Armaflex Kaimannflex Climaflex 

insulation 

(UK) 

(Germany) (Belgium) 

بيت الاردن 2. Diffusers, Grills METALPRESS 

3. Fans Woods 

(UK) 

Rosenberg- 

(German) 

16

FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 

No. Item (1) (2) (3) 

1. .Fire fighting pipes Silcotub 

(Romania) 

2. Fire fighting pump set 

included valves, headers, 

control system 

Armstrong Aurora ITT 

3. Fire fighting cabinets Thorn Norsen 

(UK) 

4. Portable fire extinguishers Thorn Norsen 

(UK) 

FOUNTAIN SYSTEM 

Angus 

(UK) 

Angus 

(UK) 

Total Walther 

(Germany) 

Total Walther 

(Germany) 

No. Item (1) (2) (3) 

1. Filter Hayward Astral Kripsol 

2. Pumps Hayward Astral Kripsol 

3. Chlorinator Hayward Astral Kripsol 

* Notes: 

1. Given list of manufactures is intended only to be used as a guideline for 

materials/equipment quality objective. 

2. Contractors can provide equal or better quality of that stated, and as per engineer 

approval. 

17

Ramallah Recreational Complex - UNDP

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?